Skip to Main Content
Beta

Help us to improve this service by completing our feedback survey (opens in new tab).

Vald. Nielsen Holding A/S Newwatch Ltd v Baldorino & Ors

[2019] EWHC 1926 (Comm)

MR JUSTICE JACOBS CL-2015-000305

Approved Judgment

Neutral Citation Number: [2019] EWHC 1926 (Comm) Case No: CL-2015-000305
IN THE HIGH COURT OF JUSTICE
QUEEN'S BENCH DIVISION
COMMERCIAL COURT

The Rolls Building, Fetter Lane, London, EC4A 1NL

Date: 18/07/2019

Before :

MR JUSTICE JACOBS

Between :

(1) VALD. NIELSEN HOLDING A/S

(2) NEWWATCH LIMITED

Claimants

- and -

(1) MR VICTOR BALDORINO

(2) MR RICHARD BENNETT

(3) MR JULIAN MANTELL

Defendants

Michael Booth QC and Christopher Lloyd (instructed by Collyer Bristow LLP) for the

Claimants

Alain Choo-Choy QC and Nicholas Sloboda (instructed by Cooke Young & Keidan ) for the Defendants

Hearing dates: 18th – 21st March, 25th – 28th March, 1st – 4th April, 8th-12th April, 15th-17th April, 8th – 10th May 2019.

Approved Judgment

I direct that pursuant to CPR PD 39A para 6.1 no official shorthand note shall be taken of this Judgment and that copies of this version as handed down may be treated as authentic.

.............................

MR JUSTICE JACOBS

MR JUSTICE JACOBS:

INDEX PARAGRAPH

A: Introduction 1

B: Factual background and broad chronology of relevant events 39

C: Deceit: the law 130

D: The 20 April e-mail 160

E: The 3 June e-mail 226

E1: The preparation of the Weighted Budget and the information provided to Tenon and

LMS.

230

E2: The background to 3 June e-mail

253

E3: The allegation of deceit in relation to 3 June e-mail

283

F: The Defendants’ case and evidence: further considerations and conclusions.

314

F1: The Defendants’ case as to fraudulent intent.

315

F2: Motive and the Defendants’ evidence as to their desire to obtain the maximum price

321

F3: The strike out application

337

F4: Other relevant conduct at the material time

359

F5: Specific arguments advanced by the Defendants

362

F6: Legal responsibility for the deceit

372

F7: Conspiracy

387

G: Inducement

H: Causation and Loss

391

H1: The shape of the parties’ arguments

425

H2: The facts relevant to the causation and loss arguments

437

H3: The parties’ arguments in more detail

462

H4: Analysis and conclusions: legal principles

484

H5: Analysis and conclusions: Causation

492

H6: Analysis and conclusions: quantification

541

I: Fair value of Updata UK

568

J: Assignment

J1: The shape of the arguments 621

J2: The facts 631

J3: Danish law 658

J4: Analysis and conclusions 678

K: Breach of fiduciary duty 716

L: Conclusion 764

.

A: Introduction

The claims made in the proceedings

1.

This case, involving allegations of fraud, arises out of the sale of a business to its management and private equity investors in July 2009. The courts are familiar with claims made by buyers of businesses against sellers who are alleged to have given the buyers far too rosy a picture of the business being sold. The present case is unusual because it is the converse. The basis of The Claimants’ claim is that the business being sold was far more successful than the sellers had been led by the management to believe, and that the sellers were misled into selling at the time when they did, and for the price which they received. The sellers contend that if the true picture had been presented to them, they would not have been willing to sell at that time at the price which was being offered.

2.

The business in question was a company called Updata Infrastructure (UK) Ltd (“Updata UK”). This was an English company whose majority shareholder was

Updata Europe A/S (“Updata Europe”), which in 2009 owned 60% of its shares. The majority of the shares in Updata Europe were owned by members of the family of its founder, Mr. Peter Johnsen (“Mr. Johnsen”), directly or via a long-established company, the First Claimant (“Vald. Nielsen”). There were two other shareholders in Updata Europe, Mr. Henrik Hildebrandt and Mr. Henrik Bremerskov. A further 12.4% of the shares were held by the Second Claimant, Newwatch Limited (“Newwatch”). This was a Jersey company which was owned by Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt. Updata Europe and Newwatch were referred to at trial as the “European vendors” or “EVs”.

3.

The three Defendants were the executive management team of Updata UK, and their management buyout (“MBO”) was backed by a private equity house called LMS Capital Plc (“LMS”). The sale was successfully completed in July 2009. This was after a bidding process where there was a competing potential purchaser, Mr. Jens Nielsen and interests which he represented. Mr. Nielsen was a former chairman of Updata UK. The final LMS offer was considered more attractive by Updata Europe than the proposals which were forthcoming from Mr. Nielsen, and the sale took place. The entire issued share capital of Updata UK was purchased by a new company, Updata Infrastructure Holdings Limited (“Updata Holdings” or “newco”), in which the Defendants and LMS had significant stakes. For that purpose, a sale and purchase agreement (“SPA”), and various associated documents, were signed on 11 July 2009.

4.

The sale price received by Updata Europe for its 60% share was £ 5.244 million. The Claimants contend that the true value of this stake, at the time of the sale, was £ 22 million. The success of the business was such that in March 2014, less than 5 years after the sale, Updata Holdings was sold to Capita IT Services Holdings Ltd. (“Capita”) for £ 80 million, and the Defendants together received at least £ 21 million for their shares in that sale. Long before that sale, however, Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt had come to believe that they had been misled in the course of the negotiations for sale in 2009.

5.

Vald. Nielsen claims to be the assignee of the rights of Updata Europe to bring claims in fraud and for other remedies against the management who are alleged to have been party to the deception. There is a significant issue in the case as to the validity of the assignment agreements pursuant to which Vald. Nielsen allege that they acquired the rights of Updata Europe, and the Defendants make allegations of fraud against certain individuals involved in the assignment, including Mr. Johnsen. This allegation of fraud was ultimately the only point relied upon by way of an attack on the validity of the assignment, since other arguments based upon champerty and a “non-assignment” clause in the SPA were abandoned by the Defendants in closing argument. The allegation of fraud focused on the backdating of the assignment documents so as to record a date of 19 November 2010 instead of the actual date of signature which was January 2011.

6.

Newwatch does not bring a claim in fraud, since such claims were struck out by order of Sir Richard Field in 2016. Newwatch cannot claim to have suffered loss by fraud because it was able to roll over its prior investment in Updata UK into an equivalent shareholding in Updata Holdings. This meant that in due course Newwatch was able to benefit from the sale to Capita. However, Newwatch makes various equitable claims based upon the proposition that the Defendants acted in breach of fiduciary duty.

The witnesses called and the important areas of factual dispute

7.

The trial occupied 23 days, including just over 18 days of factual and expert evidence. A large number of factual witnesses gave evidence at trial, and the evidence covered the history of Updata Europe and Updata UK over many years in a very considerable amount of detail.

8.

The factual witnesses who gave evidence on behalf of the Claimants were: Mr. Johnsen, Mr. Henrik Hildebrandt, Mr. Flemming Holm and Mr. Jorgen Johnsen, all of whom had been the Danish directors of Updata UK at various times in the period prior to the sale in July 2009. The other factual witnesses were:

i)

Mr. Jens Nielsen (the former chairman of Updata UK who was interested in purchasing the business in 2009);

ii)

Mr. Esben Bigaard (whose company purchased Updata Europe in late 2009, and who was a signatory to the assignment documentation);

iii)

Mr. Mads Birkeland, a dual-qualified Danish lawyer and English solicitor who worked in London for the law firm Corren Troen, and who acted on behalf of Updata Europe and Newwatch in connection with the sale, and subsequently on behalf of Vald. Nielsen in connection with the assignment;

iv)

Mr. Henrik Bremerskov, who was a 5% shareholder in Updata Europe and worked in Denmark for the Updata group;

v)

Mr. Thomas Nyegaard, an investment banker by profession, and a shareholder in Updata UK by virtue of having provided some initial funding at the request of Mr. Johnsen who was a childhood friend;

vi)

Mr. Lynge Thang Jorgensen, who was a senior officer within the bank which had extended loan facilities to Updata Europe and its Danish subsidiary; and

vii)

Ms. Tina Kambo (nee Rana), who was in 2009 a junior solicitor at Corren Troen. She assisted Mr. Birkeland with certain administrative but nevertheless important aspects of the transaction. This included the gathering of materials for a data room (“the Data Room”) in connection with the bidding process and the eventual sale.

9.

In addition, a number of Civil Evidence Act statements were adduced, most notably a statement given by Mr. Helge Homann prior to his death in 2017. Mr. Homann was a senior partner with KPMG in Denmark, and played various roles in the events leading to the sale. He was responsible for the audit of Updata Europe, but he also provided assistance to Mr. Nielsen in connection with his proposed bid and due diligence work.

10.

On the Defendants’ side, the principal factual witnesses were the Defendants themselves. Each of them was cross-examined at considerable length. The only other factual witnesses were:

i)

Mr. Pieter Hooft, who had been responsible for the MBO transaction on behalf of LMS; and

ii)

Mr. Finn Jepsen who had briefly been appointed as “Supervisor” of Updata Europe and whom (the Defendants alleged) was the person that was intended to be deceived by the backdating of the assignment documentation.

11.

At the time of the events leading to the sale, the Defendants had been advised by a firm of corporate financial advisers called Tenon Corporate Finance (“Tenon”). Despite their central role in the relevant events, no witness from Tenon gave a statement or was called to give evidence.

12.

Although the factual evidence was wide-ranging, the important aspects of the that evidence in my view concerned the following areas:

i)

The events, which really began in early 2009, concerning the negotiations and dealings of the parties, and ultimately leading to the sale of Updata UK in July 2009. These are central to the allegations of deceit and conspiracy, and in particular what representations were made, whether they were deliberately false, and whether they induced the sale.

ii)

The factual circumstances, also in 2009, relevant to the parties’ arguments on causation, and in particular whether or not Updata Europe would or would not have sold to LMS at the offered price even if false representations had not been made. The facts relevant to this issue included the dealings and relationship between Updata Europe and its bank in the context of Updata Europe’s indebtedness to that bank, the general market conditions prevailing at that time (not long after the onset of the global financial crisis in the autumn of 2008), and whether there was a realistic possibility of any sale to an alternative purchaser, such as Mr. Nielsen or his backers.

iii)

The facts relating to the assignment to Vald. Nielsen which was executed in January 2011, and the circumstances which led to it. This sequence of events starts in mid-2010, but the critical period is November 2010 to January 2011.

13.

Accordingly, this judgment deals in some detail with the facts between 2009 and early 2011, and in less detail with the facts outside that period except in so far as those facts cast light on the events in the period 2009 to early 2011.

14.

Although there were a large number of witnesses called, this is not a case whose determination requires the resolution of sharp or significant conflicts between the evidence called by the Claimants on one side and the Defendants on the other. Disputes between these witnesses did exist, for example as to what was said at a meeting on 29 May 2009 in the run-up to an important e-mail sent on 3 June 2009

(“the 3 June e-mail”), and which the Claimants allege to contain fraudulent misrepresentations. Rather, the principal focus of cross-examination on both sides involved examining and exploring what was really known and happening on the other side of the fence, as it were, and which was not known at the time by the EVs on the one hand, or the Defendants on the other. Thus, in relation to the deceit and conspiracy case, the Claimants sought to cross-examine the Defendants by reference to the picture that was said to emerge from a careful examination of the Defendants’ own internal documents; the principal feature of that picture being expected financial results which were far more optimistic than those given to the EVs. Similarly, on the issues of whether any loss had been suffered, the Defendants explored in some detail the circumstances in which Updata Europe found itself, and in particular its indebtedness to its bank. The Defendants did know at the time that there was a significant indebtedness, but they did not know much of the detail of the dealings which were explored in the evidence. Similarly, the assignment issue involved examination of dealings on the Claimants’ side of which the Defendants were unaware at the time. It was only as a result of disclosure within these proceedings that the Defendants became aware of materials which, on their case, enabled them to attack the assignment by alleging serious wrongdoing by a large number of individuals, but which ultimately narrowed so as to focus on just three: Mr. Johnsen, Mr. Homann and Mr. Bigaard. Prior to these proceedings, the Defendants had taken no point on the validity of the assignment: for example, in February 2011 they had each been happy to sign a “Deed of Rectification” to the SPA which identified Vald. Nielsen as assignee, and which provided them with a significant benefit.

15.

Each side therefore sought to contend that the evidence advanced by the witnesses on the opposing side, as to what they were thinking, doing and would have done in other circumstances, should be rejected in the light of the contemporary documents and inherent probabilities.

General approach to the evidence

16.

There was no dispute that, in assessing the evidence of the factual witnesses on all issues, I should adopt the approach commended by Robert Goff LJ in Armagas Ltd v. Mundogas S.A. (The Ocean Frost), [1985] 1 Lloyd's Rep. 1, 57:

“Speaking from my own experience, I have found it essential in cases of fraud, when considering the credibility of witnesses, always to test their veracity by reference to the objective facts proved independently of their testimony, in particular by reference to the documents in the case, and also to pay particular regard to their motives and to the overall probabilities. It is frequently very difficult to tell whether a witness is telling the truth or not; and where there is a conflict of evidence such as there was in the present case, reference to the objective facts and documents, to the witnesses' motives, and to the overall probabilities, can be of very great assistance to a Judge in ascertaining the truth.”

17.

In the same case, Dunn LJ said (to similar effect):

“I respectfully agree with Lord Justice Browne when he said in re F, [1976] Fam. 238 at p. 259, that in his experience it was difficult to decide from seeing and hearing witnesses whether or not they are speaking the truth at the moment. That has been my own experience as a Judge of first instance. And especially if both principal witnesses show themselves to be unreliable, it is safer for a Judge, before forming a view as to the truth of a particular fact, to look carefully at the probabilities as they emerge from the surrounding circumstances, and to consider the personal motives and interests of the witnesses. As Lord Wright said in Powell v. Streatham Manor Nursing Home sup. at p. 267:

. . . Yet even where the Judge decides on conflicting evidence, it must not be forgotten that there may be cases in which his findings may be falsified, as for instance by some objective fact . . .

and he referred in particular to some conclusive document or documents which constitute positive evidence refuting the oral evidence of the witnesses.”

18.

The approach of Robert Goff LJ was approved by the Privy Council in Grace Shipping v Sharp & Co [1987] 1 Lloyd’s Rep 207 at 215-216:

“And it is not to be forgotten that, in the present case, the Judge was faced with the task of assessing the evidence of witnesses about telephone conversations which had taken place over five years before. In such a case, memories may very well be unreliable; and it is of crucial importance for the Judge to have regard to the contemporary documents and to the overall probabilities.

That observation [i.e. of Robert Goff LJ] is, in their Lordships' opinion, equally apposite in a case where the evidence of the witnesses is likely to be unreliable; and it is to be remembered that in commercial cases, such as the present, there is usually a substantial body of contemporary documentary evidence.”

19.

Robert Goff LJ’s approach is also reflected in more recent authority such as Gestmin SGPS SA v Credit Suisse (UK) Ltd at [2013] EWHC 3560 (Comm) at [15]-[23].

20.

There was therefore no dispute in the present case that my approach should be to consider the objective evidence and in particular the documentary evidence, as well as the inherent probabilities, and to test the accounts of the witnesses against those matters.

21.

In so doing, I bear in mind that the events with which the trial are concerned took place some 10 years ago. It was obvious that a number of witnesses, in particular Mr. Jorgensen from the Bank, had great difficulty remembering those events with any degree of accuracy, given the passage of time and the ageing process. In some cases, too, illness or the effect of retirement from the business world meant that individuals who may have been much sharper 10 years ago were no longer at the top of their game. The Defendants also rightly submitted that the principal witnesses on both sides have much to gain or lose from the present litigation, which has been bitterly fought for many years, and that this will inevitably colour the ability of some of the witnesses to give objective evidence about the relevant events.

Assessment of the witness evidence: general views

22. In assessing the evidence of the various witnesses, I have endeavoured to take into account their evidence as a whole. It does not follow from the fact that the evidence of a witness on a particular issue is to be rejected, or that a witness gave a single bad answer or series of bad answers, that everything that a particular witness has said is to be rejected. The evidence of a witness as to one part of the case may be consistent with the documents or inherent probabilities, whereas his evidence on another area of

the case may be otherwise. Accordingly, where the factual evidence of particular witnesses on a particular topic is important, I address that evidence in more detail below in the context of that topic. However, I start by giving some general observations which are reflected in my fact-findings later in this judgment.

The Claimants’ witnesses

23.

On the Claimants’ side, the principal witness was Mr. Peter Johnsen. He has, quite plainly (and in my view with some justification, for the reasons set out in this judgment) nursed a grievance against the Defendants for a considerable time; in that in 2010, fairly soon after the relevant events leading to the sale, he considered that he had been misled during the course of the negotiations. He has had to struggle to bring this claim to a hearing, facing the need to raise significant funds and also needing to overcome a strike-out application made by the Defendants. He has therefore been living with this case for many years. That said, it did seem to me that he did seek to give fair answers to the questions which he was asked, with as much objectivity as one might expect in the circumstances. For example, he made no attempt to downplay the financial difficulties which confronted Updata Europe, and he gave frank evidence about his unsuccessful attempts to find outside investment in Updata Europe in late 2008 and 2009 and the reasons for that lack of success. I have significant reservations, however, about his evidence as to his knowledge of the circumstances leading to the backdating of the assignment documentation in 2011. But this does not lead me to reject his evidence on other aspects of his case where his evidence is material, in particular the issue of inducement.

24.

Mr. Henrik Hildebrandt has also been living with this case for many years, and is one of its main protagonists together with Mr. Johnsen. He stands to gain significantly in the event that the claim succeeds. Nevertheless, it seemed to me that he sought to give careful and truthful answers to all the questions that he was asked. He gave a disarmingly frank account of the difficulties that would have confronted Updata Europe if it had tried to obtain alternative finance from a different bank in the aftermath of the 2008 financial crisis; evidence which to my mind holed one aspect (albeit not the most important part) of the Claimants’ case on causation. I thought that in many ways he was an impressive witness, and consider that his evidence as to how he did react to the information that he was given, and how he would have reacted to other information that he was not given, was generally reliable.

25.

Mr. Flemming Holm is now aged 78, and has been retired for many years after a successful professional career. He was a witness who, in my view, must have lost something of his former sharpness. His recollection of events was not good. But he was undoubtedly seeking to assist the court in the evidence that he gave, even if at times the contemporary documents indicated that it was unlikely to be accurate. He was one of the individuals on the Claimants’ side who was involved in the discussions leading to the 3 June e-mail, and it was plain from his evidence (which in material respects was not disputed) that he was both extremely concerned to ensure that both

bidders were operating on a level playing field, and understood and believed, following the 3 June e-mail, that they were.

26.

There were two other former Danish directors of Updata UK who gave evidence. First, there was Mr. Jorgen Johnsen, the father of Peter Johnsen. He was crossexamined only briefly, and no allegation of intention to deceive (in the context of the assignment) was put to him or ultimately pursued. The Defendants did not mount any particular attack on his evidence in their closing submissions. It did not seem to me that his evidence added very much, if anything, to the Claimants’ case. But I see no reason to doubt the evidence that he gave.

27.

The other former director was Mr. Jens Nielsen. It was clear from the correspondence that he was held in low regard not only by the Defendants but also by Mr. Nyegaard

(whose e-mail at the time referred to Mr. Nielsen as a “dimwit”). He had also fallen out with Mr. Johnsen some time before the sale. He has the prospect of a relatively small financial recovery, in respect of monies unpaid many years ago, if this action were to succeed. But I did not consider that he was a witness whose evidence was in any way motivated by the prospect of such recovery. As a witness, I thought that he sought to assist the court on the relevant facts by giving honest evidence, and that this was generally consistent with the documentation that he was shown in crossexamination. He was rather more impressive as a witness than some of the contemporaneous assessments of him as a businessman would indicate.

28.

Mr. Thomas Nyegaard provided seed capital for Updata UK, and ultimately substantially benefited from the sale to Capita in 2014, although his reward would have been greater if he had been permitted by LMS and the management team to roll over the full amount of his investment at the time of the sale in 2009. He had a good relationship with the Defendants in 2008 and early 2009, assisted them and was very much on their side in relation to the proposed MBO. He maintained a good relationship thereafter, notwithstanding a degree of unhappiness arising from his shareholding being reduced by the sale. He has no financial outcome in the present litigation, but in the light of the facts which have emerged he has a strong and genuine feeling that the Defendants behaved improperly in relation to the sale. I thought that Mr. Nyegaard was a most impressive witness, and at all times he sought to give accurate and truthful answers to the questions asked. In their closing submissions, the Defendants did not make any particular criticism of his evidence. I thought at the time, and still think, that his evidence provided a valuable insight into the relevant events, not least because in many respects Mr. Nyegaard could reasonably be viewed as an independent witness and I did not consider that he had any particular axe to grind.

29.

Mr. Birkeland gave evidence over a number of days, with other factual evidence being interposed. There were times when Mr. Birkeland was somewhat combative and argumentative, with a tendency to wish to support the Claimants’ case. This is perhaps not surprising since he was heavily involved on Updata Europe’s behalf in

the relevant events in 2009, and on Vald. Nielsen’s behalf in relation to the assignment. He had also assisted in the litigation, certainly at the outset. Despite these matters, I considered that generally speaking Mr. Birkeland sought to assist the court by giving his genuine recollection of events. His evidence did not always support Mr. Johnsen. In relation to the deceit case, he gave evidence of the events which led to the 3 June e-mail, and in particular the preceding meeting on 29 May. I discuss this evidence in more detail below, where I accept much of his evidence about what was said at the meeting albeit not everything.

30.

Mr. Bigaard is a lawyer of many years’ standing. He was not closely involved in the discussions which led to the assignment documents, which he had very much left to Mr. Homann. He had no obvious interest in the outcome of this litigation. He answered questions in a reasonable way, although his memory of events was somewhat hazy. I address his evidence in more detail in the section (Section J) addressing the assignment. I was not persuaded that he had intended to deceive the supervisor, Mr. Jepsen.

31.

Mr. Bremerskov was a small shareholder in Updata Europe. Neither his witness statement, nor the ensuing cross-examination, seemed to me to add anything material to either party’s case. Indeed, his evidence was not referred to in the Claimants’ closing, and merited only a brief footnote in the Defendants’ closing.

32.

Ms. Tina Kambo (nee Rana) (“Ms. Rana”) was the junior solicitor at Corren Troen who carried out work in relation to the Data Room. As part of her work, she was the recipient in July 2009 of a CD. This CD contained an important document: a “Weighted Budget” which had originally been prepared in March 2009. However, neither Ms. Rana nor anyone else on the EVs’ side spotted that a potentially important document had been disclosed in the closing stages of the transaction and the EVs never looked at it. These events relating to this CD were central to the argument advanced by the Defendants on a strike out application in 2016 before Sir Richard Field. In particular, the Defendants argued on that occasion that the disclosure of this Weighted Budget meant that the Defendants could not have been dishonest, and that the case was a suitable one for striking out. By the end of the trial, however, it seemed to me that this particular argument had rather evaporated, and rightly so. Ms. Rana’s evidence as to her work on the Data Room was not the subject of any significant challenge, and she gave her evidence carefully and well. If her evidence were truly material to any issue, then I would have no difficulty in accepting it. But in the end I did not consider her evidence to be of any particular importance.

The Defendants

33.

The Defendants are three intelligent individuals who clearly worked hard to make Updata UK the success that it undoubtedly was. They were each handsomely rewarded by the eventual sale to Capita, receiving around £ 21 million for their shares. In 2009 they were, in my view, very highly motivated to make sure that the LMS bid and the MBO succeeded, and that Mr. Nielsen’s bid failed. As Mr. Hooft explained in his evidence when speaking of the position in mid-April 2009, the Defendants were “very scared of losing control of the business”. Contrary to the evidence given by the First Defendant (“Mr. Baldorino”) and the Second Defendant (“Mr. Bennett”), they were not at any stage interested at that time in trying to obtain the maximum price either for their own shares or still less for the shares owned by the majority shareholder Updata Europe. They were also highly motivated to remove, or at least significantly dilute, Updata Europe as shareholder; something which is essentially an aspect of their desire for the MBO to succeed. (I address these matters in more detail in Section F below.) Their motivation for the MBO to succeed, and for Mr. Nielsen to fail, was such that they were in my judgment prepared to lie in the two e-mails which are at the heart of the Claimants’ case on deceit. I do not consider the responses in those e-mails to be consistent with honest responses to the questions or issues raised, and to which the responses were being given: see Sections D and E below. I am also, for reasons which will be explained in this judgment, unable to accept the Defendants’ evidence on many of the critical issues in the case. I also consider that the Defendants’ evidence to Sir Richard Field was misleading; in particular in failing to explain to the Court that, as all the Defendants have now said in their evidence, the disclosure of the Weighted Budget to Ms. Rana was accidental and by mistake. Had this been explained, and for reasons also explained in Section F, I consider that the central case advanced to Sir Richard Field (namely that the Defendants could not have been dishonest because they disclosed the Weighted Budget) would have been fatally undermined and indeed would have been unarguable. It will therefore be apparent that I am not willing to accept the evidence of the Defendants on important issues unless corroborated by contemporary documents or other evidence or unless clearly consistent with the inherent probabilities.

34.

Mr. Hooft of LMS was a witness who generally gave reasonable and fair answers to the questions which he was asked. I did consider, however, that he had a tendency to seek to “spin” some of his answers on important questions so as to paint LMS in a good light and justify what, even on the Defendants’ expert evidence, was the purchase of Updata Europe’s shareholding at a significant undervalue. I was not convinced by his denial that LMS’s offer started from the level of the debt and then used the EBITDA figures to justify it, rather than the other way round. It seemed to me that this was the natural reading of the relevant slide in the presentation which LMS gave on 2 April 2009. This slide started by saying that the “Loan face value of £ 5m sets “base level” expectation for 60% stake”, and then went on to state that the historical, last 12 months and year to date figures gave “ammunition” for a lower valuation. Mr. Hooft had not, as far as I could see, exhibited or disclosed any of LMS’s internal documents relating to the transaction, and it was therefore not possible to test some of Mr. Hooft’s assertions – for example as to how the original offer was calculated, whether certain figures for future earnings prepared by Mr. Szpiro were considered too optimistic, and whether LMS had in fact reached close to the maximum amount that they were prepared to pay for the business – against such materials. I do not suggest that Mr. Hooft was other than an honest witness, but bearing in mind the above matters as well as the fact that Mr. Hooft was giving evidence in relation to matters many years ago and without LMS’s internal documents in front of him, I treat his evidence with a degree of caution.

35.

Mr. Jepsen gave a short statement and was cross-examined briefly. His evidence was not controversial, since there was no dispute that he was not told about the assignment of Updata Europe at the time it was made. He only learned of it long after his short tenure as supervisor had come to an end.

Expert evidence

36.

The expert evidence on Danish law was given by Mr. Jakob Rosing and Ms. Kamilla Krebs for the Claimants, and Ms. Henriette Gernaa and Mr. Peter Carlstedt Nortved for the Defendants. The Claimants’ original expert on Danish law was Mr. Jens Rostock-Jensen. Owing to illness, he was unable to give oral evidence, and Mr. Rosing and Ms. Krebs (partners at Mr. Rostock-Jensen’s law firm) stepped in at a late stage and, save for some relatively uncontroversial and minor points, adopted what Mr. Rostock-Jensen had said in his prior reports and the joint report. In the end, there was relatively little disagreement between the experts as to the relevant Danish law principles, and I address their evidence in context below.

37.

The experts on valuation were Mr. Doug Hall for the Claimants and Mr. Paul Smethurst for the Defendants. Their disagreements were more substantial. Again, I address their evidence in the appropriate context below.

Scheme of this judgment

38. In the following section of this judgment, I outline the factual background and the broad chronology of the relevant events in Section B. Section C sets out legal principles relating to the tort of deceit. A number of the issues in the case require more detailed treatment and consideration of the facts, and these are addressed in later sections: Section D, which addresses the 20 April e-mail relied upon by the Claimants in support of their case on deceit and conspiracy; Section E, which addresses the 3 June e-mail; Section F, which addresses a number of aspects of the Defendants’ evidence and conduct at the time; Section G, which addresses inducement. I then turn to consider the arguments on causation (Section H), the fair value of Updata UK (Section I), assignment (Section J) and breach of fiduciary duty (Section K).

B: Factual background and broad chronology of relevant events

The Updata group of companies

39.

The origins of the group of companies which ultimately included Updata Europe and Updata UK can be traced back to 1996. In that year, Mr. Johnsen, a Danish citizen, founded Updata Danmark A/S. By 1999, the business of that company was the provision of network solutions to local government authorities in Denmark. It enjoyed a measure of success, winning a large proportion of new tenders for local government contracts in Denmark, although by 2009 it owed substantial amounts to its bank. In 2001, Mr. Henrik Hildebrandt joined Updata Denmark as sales director.

40.

In 2003, Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt decided to open an English company to develop a similar business in the UK market. Mr. Johnsen decided to go into business with Mr. Baldorino, who took a 15% share in the company, Updata UK. Mr. Bennett” was Mr. Johnsen’s cousin, and Mr. Johnsen offered him a position at Updata UK together with a 7.5% shareholding. Part of the initial funding for Updata UK was provided by Thomas Nyegaard. Mr. Nyegaard provided a £ 100,000 loan and received 5.1% of the shares. Mr. Johnsen’s shareholding was initially held through Newwatch, but in 2006 this was changed so that 60% of the shares were held by Updata Europe and 12.4% by Newwatch. Thus, by the time of the sale in 2009, the shares in Updata UK were held as follows:

Shareholder

No. of shares

Percentage

Updata Europe

600,000

60%

Newwatch

124,000

12.4%

Mr. Baldorino

150,000

15%

Mr. Bennett

75,000

7.5%

Mr. Nyegaard

51,000

5.1%

41.

Updata Europe, which became the main shareholder in Updata UK, was incorporated by Mr. Johnsen in 2001 and acted as a holding company for the shares in other Updata entities. By early 2007 the shareholders in Updata Europe were Mr. Johnsen, his father Jorgen Johnsen, his mother Kristen Johnsen, Mr. Hildebrandt, Mr. Henrik Bremerskov and Mr. Jens Nielsen. Mr. Nielsen was in due course to play an important part in the events which led to the MBO.

42.

Prior to June 2007, Mr. Nielsen had acted as a director and chairman of Updata UK and Updata Europe. However, in June 2007 Mr. Johnsen took steps to remove Mr. Nielsen from these positions and purchased his 7.5% shareholding, although as matters transpired he defaulted on payment of the full purchase price. By December 2008, Vald. Nielsen had become a shareholder together with the individuals (apart from Mr. Nielsen) identified in the preceding paragraph. Vald. Nielsen was a company which was owned by Jorgen Johnsen and other members of his family, and it (or its subsidiaries) had been the Johnsen family business for nearly 100 years. In due course, it was to become (or purported to become) the assignee of rights of Updata Europe. The assignment was aimed at benefiting the former shareholders of Updata Europe (although not Mr. Bremerskov) who had identified potential claims against the Defendants arising out of the sale in July 2009. By the time that these claims had been identified, these shareholders were no longer the owners of Updata Europe, which had been sold in December 2009 to a company owned by Mr. Esben Bigaard. Mr. Bigaard and his company had no interest in pursuing these potential claims for their own account, and were happy to assign them to Vald. Nielsen. As already outlined, there is a significant issue as to the validity of the assignment as a result of the backdating of the assignment documents. But, unsurprisingly, arguments that the assignment fell foul of English law principles relating to champerty were ultimately abandoned; no doubt in view of the fact that the assignment was intended to benefit the Danish prior shareholders in Updata Europe who had lost out in consequence of the alleged fraud.

43.

In addition to Updata UK, there were a number of other directly or indirectly owned subsidiaries of Updata Europe which played some part in the relevant events. There

were a number of Danish companies including Updata Danmark A/S (“Updata

Denmark”) and Change Networks ApS, both of which were both wholly owned by Updata Europe. Another Danish company within the group was Cagain Europe ApS in which Updata Europe had a 52% interest. Separate companies were incorporated in Spain and Germany with a view to an expansion into those countries which proved unsuccessful.

Sparekassen Lolland A/S

44.

Updata Europe’s bank at the material times was Sparekassen Lolland A/S (“the Bank”). This was a regional Danish bank whose CEO was Mr. Lynge Thang Jorgensen.Updata Europe and Updata Denmark had been customers of the Bank for some time prior the events of 2009, and had gradually built up significant debts. By the time of the sale in July 2009, Updata Denmark owed DKK 14-16 million to the Bank, Updata Europe owed DKK 27 million and had guaranteed the debts of Updata Denmark. The total liability was in the region of DKK 41- 43 million. At the time, the DKK:£ exchange rate was around 8.5:1. The total indebtedness to the Bank was therefore around £ 5 million, inclusive of the guarantee of the debts of Updata Denmark. A further DKK 14 million (around £ 1.6 million) was owed to Vald. Nielsen.

45.

The Bank’s lending to Updata Europe and Updata Denmark represented some 2% of its loan portfolio and this meant that the group was both an important customer and a significant exposure. By the end of 2008, the Bank was looking to reduce this exposure, not least because of a general desire to reduce exposures in view of the global financial crisis of late 2008. Indeed, the finances of the Bank itself, as with many banks around the world, were under strain as a result of this crisis and in particular because of problems within a subsidiary bank which was heavily exposed to the property market.

Updata UK’s business and management

46.

Updata UK’s business was in the telecommunications sector. It involved the creation of networks for local authorities, using existing infrastructure at a competitive cost. A contract would involve a customer paying an installation fee, and thereafter a periodic (usually quarterly) rental fee. The contracts were medium or long-term and the process of tendering and obtaining a contract was usually long, and could take 12-18 months. The nature of the business was such that Updata UK had, and was looking to obtain, a small number of large, long-term contracts rather than a large number of small contracts.

47.

The management team at Updata UK comprised Mr. Baldorino as Commercial Director, Mr. Bennett as Sales Director, Mr. Mantell as head of finance and Mr. George Cowan (who is not a defendant to these proceedings) who was head of operations. Mr. Baldorino was one of the initial directors of Updata UK. Mr. Bennett was initially the company secretary, and was later appointed as a director. Mr. Mantell had joined in 2004 but was not a director of Updata UK prior to sale.

48.

In addition to Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett, Updata UK’s board included a number of Danish directors. Initially these were Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Nielsen. Mr. Nielsen was removed as director in 2007 and Mr. Johnsen resigned as a director in February

2008. Following these changes, the Danish directors in 2009 were Mr. Hildebrandt, Mr. Holm and Jorgen Johnsen. Mr. Holm was a former partner in Arthur Andersen and became chairman of Updata UK. The three Danish directors were non-executive directors.

The position in late 2008

49.

Although the evidence in the case covered in immense detail much of the history of the various Updata companies, it is unnecessary to describe this in detail and the material events can be described by reference to the position in late 2008. However, I will briefly sketch the background which I take from the evidence of Mr. Nyegaard. He was the childhood friend of Mr. Johnsen who had provided around £ 100,000 as start-up capital for Updata UK, in return for 5% of the equity (which subsequently grew to 5.1%). He was an investment banker by profession and took an active interest in Updata UK and developed a close relationship with the UK management team, and specifically Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino. He was called as a witness by the Claimants, and much of his evidence as to the events which led to the buyout was not controversial. As I have indicated, he was a very impressive witness, and had the advantage from my perspective of not having any financial interest in the outcome of the present litigation.

50.

By 2006 and certainly by late 2008, Updata Europe was in an increasingly difficult financial situation due to its indebtedness to its Bank. This debt was exacerbated by the failure of an attempt to expand into Spain. Mr. Johnsen had decided upon this expansion against the advice of Mr. Baldorino, who was half Gibraltarian and knew the market. An attempt to expand into Germany had also been unsuccessful. The precarious nature of the finances of Updata Europe resulted in pressure on Updata UK.

51.

These factors contributed, over the course of several years, to a falling out between Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett on one side, and Mr. Johnsen on the other, and what Mr. Nyegaard described as a general lack of trust between the UK and Danish owners of Updata UK. Mr. Nyegaard said in his witness statement that Mr. Johnsen came to be considered as the “enemy” by the UK management team. Mr. Bennett wrote a lengthy memo to Mr. Holm, in around February 2008, where he referred to the relationship being characterised “by lack of communication and mutual distrust”. The memo referred to an accusation that the UK team had provided false, incomplete information to the majority shareholders for their own gain, and it went on to deny that this had ever happened:

“The information supplied by the UK team has never been manipulated to show a false picture and the figures provided have been the same with which the UK management team have managed the business and are the ones which have kept Lloyds and BDO satisfied with the reporting standards. The UK team bitterly resent accusations to the contrary”.

52.

Mr. Johnsen’s evidence was that he did not recall ever saying anything to the effect that he mistrusted the UK management, and did not recall Mr. Hildebrandt or his father doing so either. He thought that the accusation, referred to in the memo, had been made by Mr. Nielsen. He agreed, when it was put to him in cross-examination,

that from the Updata Europe board’s perspective, the UK management had always behaved professionally, and that as far as he could tell the management had always dealt with Updata Europe in a straightforward manner. Mr. Hildebrandt said that whilst the relationship between the UK management and Updata Europe was not the best, he did not believe (speaking of the position in June 2009) that Updata UK would hold back information, and that he “trusted” them. Mr. Holm said that he personally had good communication with the UK management, but did not think that they were “interested in co-operating with the group”. Mr. Bennett said in his evidence that he did not think that Mr. Johnsen “should have had reasons to distrust me”.

53.

Overall, the evidence in the case suggested to me that the lack of trust described by Mr. Nyegaard reflected more the attitude of Updata UK towards Updata Europe, rather than vice versa. But nevertheless the Updata Europe board was aware that relations were not the best, and that there was a degree of antipathy on the part of the UK management towards them.

54.

There were various attempts over the years to restructure the group. One plan was to merge Updata Europe and Updata UK, which would have had the effect of enabling Updata Europe to benefit directly from the business and cashflow of Updata UK. This was fiercely resisted by the minority shareholders of Updata UK (i.e. Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Bennett and Mr. Nyegaard). In late 2007, the minority shareholders put forward proposals for the acquisition of shares which would have the effect of reducing Updata Europe’s shareholding, but this was rejected by the Danish shareholders.

55.

Mr. Nyegaard described how, during 2008, the situation between Updata UK and Updata Europe was strained and continued to deteriorate, due to the lack of confidence that Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett felt in Updata Europe’s expansion plans. The UK management felt that the Danish shareholders were serving their own interests, or those of the various Danish companies, at the expense of Updata UK. These companies were seen as a potential drain on Updata UK, and the time of the UK management was spent in fighting internal battles with the shareholders of Updata Europe.

56.

In late 2008 and early 2009 a further proposal was made to regulate the relationships between the shareholders, but this came to nothing. The failure of this route led the UK management and Mr. Nyegaard to believe that the situation, which they regarded as profoundly unsatisfactory, needed to be resolved by replacing or diluting Updata Europe as the majority shareholder of Updata UK. From the UK management’s perspective, the preferred route was a management buyout rather than simply finding a new majority shareholder. Mr. Nyegaard agreed to assist the management team to find a solution that would give them more stability in the day-to-day business of running the company.

57.

In late December 2008 and January 2009, the Defendants had sought advice from Tenon. At that point in time, the Defendants wanted Tenon to assist them in: (i) demonstrating that Updata UK could not afford to pay £50,000 per month to Updata Europe; and (ii) preparing for a possible “pre-pack” administration of Updata UK.

January – March 2009: Mr. Nielsen’s approach

58.

In late 2008 and early 2009, Updata Europe was under increasing pressure from the Bank to repay or reduce its debts or provide further security. The Bank’s role and attitude at this time, and as the events of 2009 unfolded, are crucial to arguments advanced by the Defendants in relation to reliance, causation and quantum and I will address them in greater detail in that context. There is no dispute, however, that Updata Europe’s very difficult financial position was a significant factor in the events leading to the sale of Updata UK.

59.

The trigger for a possible MBO of Updata UK was a proposal made on 16 January 2009 by Mr. Jens Nielsen to Mr. Jorgensen of the Bank. The letter was copied to Mr.

Helge Homann of KPMG, who were Updata Europe’s auditors. Mr. Nielsen indicated that he was prepared to purchase 100% of Updata Europe or 100% of Updata UK. The letter sought an exclusivity period during which he could conduct due diligence. The letter indicated that, subject to due diligence, Mr. Nielsen anticipated placing a bid placing a value of £ 5.0 million on the UK company. That was roughly the level of Updata Europe’s debt to the Bank.

60.

The Defendants learned of Mr. Nielsen’s proposal in early February 2009. Mr. Nielsen’s possible purchase of Updata UK was regarded by UK management, for a large variety of reasons, as very undesirable indeed. They did not like Mr. Nielsen and held him in low regard. They were, as Mr. Hooft said, scared of losing control of the company, particularly to someone like Mr. Nielsen. In their evidence at trial, the Defendants explained that they would not have stayed with the business under Mr. Nielsen’s control.

61.

This unwanted approach led to Mr. Bennett, on 25 February 2009, meeting with Tenon again, this time for the purpose of discussing Tenon’s role in finding a backer for either an MBO or a pre-pack administration. An e-mail from Tenon on 26

February referred to the discussion at the meeting which was either to identify funders “prepared to invest £ 4-5 million to facilitate an acquisition from your overseas parent” or alternatively “identifying funders prepared to fund an acquisition out of administration of £ 2-2.5 million”. In due course, on 16 March 2009, Tenon were formally engaged by the UK management. A letter of engagement set out Tenon’s role and responsibilities. The sequence of events and the terms of engagement are discussed in more detail in Section E below. In the meantime, prior to or around the time of Tenon’s formal engagement, the Defendants had meetings with a number of private equity houses in early March 2009 with a view to finding a backer for an

MBO. These included meetings on 12 March 2009 with Moore Capital; 17 March 2009 with Inflexion; and with Lloyd’s Development Group.

62.

Between 16 and 18 March 2009, Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann attended Updata UK’s offices for the purpose of conducting due diligence. In addition to his role as Updata Europe’s auditor, Mr. Homann was providing assistance to Mr. Nielsen in connection with his bid. They sought information about Updata UK’s financial forecasts for 2008/09 and 2009/10, as well as copies of all customer contracts. Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann received a copy of a presentation headed “Financial Overview”. This document (“the Financial Overview”) is a critical document in the case. It showed the following:

(£000)

Budget 2009

Forecast 2009

Budget

2010 Worst case

Budget

2010 Middle case

Budget

2010

Best case

Turnover/sales

11,046

10,490

6,864

7,540

15,183

Profit before tax

1,103

904

154

418

2,195

EBITDA

1,695

1,496

1,129

1,393

3,348

63.

The important figures, on which the arguments in the present case have centred, are those for EBITDA (i.e. Earnings before Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortisation). This is the financial metric which is particularly relevant to potential investors in companies, with valuations commonly being based upon a multiplier being applied to EBITDA. The Financial Overview therefore indicated that Updata UK was behind budget for the financial year 2009, which by that stage had run for just over 8 months: the company’s financial year ended on 30 June of each year. It also indicated that the company’s “Middle Case” for the following year (i.e. the year ending 30 June 2010) would decline; i.e. reduce from EBITDA of £ 1,496,000 to £ 1,393,000, albeit that the “Best Case” would show an improvement to £ 3,348,000.

64.

The concepts of “Worst case”, “Middle Case” and “Best Case” were explored in the evidence, and I say something about those concepts at this stage since they are relevant to the figures which I subsequently describe. Mr. Hooft of LMS agreed in evidence that: a “best case is normally on the assumption that everything goes right. Worst case will be everything that can go wrong does and middle case will be realistic.” Similarly, Mr. Bennett agreed:

“Q. Would you agree, therefore, normally when someone has, as it were, best case, middle case and worst case, obviously worst case you’re not assuming an asteroid hits the planet or something of that sort, but in realistic terms, you’re looking at what realistically the worst case for the worst case; yes? What you would more or less expect as a reasonable outcome being the middle case; yes? A. Yes.

Q. And then, again, although sometimes best case can be exceeded, but the best case would normally be the realistically best case that it was thought could be achieved?

A. I would agree with that.”

65.

Accordingly, the concepts of a “worst case” and a “best case” would not be understood literally, with worst case denoting Armageddon (or as Mr. Booth colourfully put it, an asteroid hitting the planet) and a best case denoting Utopia. Rather, they denote a realistic worst case and a realistic best case. A company’s middle case would therefore represent something in between: as Mr. Bennett said what would be “more or less” expected to be achieved.

March – April 2009: events and the work leading to the LMS offer on 16 April 2009

66.

Prior to and around the same time as Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann were provided with the Financial Overview, the Defendants had started to provide financial information to Tenon for the ultimate purpose of producing an investment memorandum to send out to potential backers of their proposed MBO. There was evidence that Tenon were provided with the Financial Overview itself, but it is plain that this document was of no significance in relation to the projections which were developed in March and which ultimately were reflected in the investment memorandum.

67.

It is not necessary to describe in detail, at this stage, all the exchanges between the management team and Tenon in March: I address this in more detail in Section E below. For present purposes, the important features of those exchanges can be summarised as follows. The attachment to the e-mail sent by Tenon following the meeting on 25 February was a document headed “Updata Infrastructure – Due Diligence”. This referred to “[weighted case] budget for the year to 30 June 2010” and the “[weighted case] projections for the year to 30 June 2010”. (The words “[weighted case]” were in square brackets in the document.) The concept of a “weighted” case was that the budget or projection would consider contract opportunities which were available to Updata UK, and give them an appropriate weighting to reflect the likelihood of a successful outcome and the consequent income generation. This was a concept familiar to Updata UK, and in particular Mr. Baldorino who had developed his own system of weighting which depended upon the stage which a particular proposed project had reached.

68.

As matters progressed in March, Tenon were provided with a number of documents, again as described in more detail in Section E.

69.

The information provided to Tenon included a document setting out detailed information as to projects in the “pipeline”. Thus, on 25 March 2009, Mr. Baldorino e-mailed Guy Helman at Tenon with a spreadsheet entitled “Pipeline Breakdown v1”. He had shared this document with Mr. Mantell and Mr. Bennett in advance. It showed, in a digestible format: (i) the identity of the contracting counterparty; (ii) the value of each contact; (iii) the prospect (in a column headed “Probability”) of the contract being won by Updata UK expressed as a percentage, with a commentary on the stage reached in the negotiations; and (iv) the identity of nine contracts with 100% prospects (i.e. the contracts had been won by Updata UK albeit not yet formalised).

70.

The information also included detailed financial projections, in the form of a “Weighted Budget”. These budget documents were authored by Mr. Mantell (as shown on the metadata), and were based on Mr. Baldorino’s weighted pipeline. Mr. Mantell circulated a number of versions of a 2009/10 weighted budget on 25 March 2009: see further Section E below. The final version, referred to at trial (and herein) as the “March Weighted Budget” was circulated at 8.50 pm that night. This showed EBITDA figures for the 2009/2010 which were in excess of £ 6 million. The EBITDA figures were not shown as such in the budget documents, but are to be derived by adding back the figure for “depreciation” to the figure for “profit before tax”; the latter figure having originally been calculated after deduction of depreciation. The depreciation figure was £ 1,057,918, and the figure for “Profit before bank expenses” was £ 5,012,270. Using these figures, the EBITDA was £ 6,070 million. An alternative calculation was to add the depreciation figure to the figure for “Profit before exceptional items” (£ 4,981,305). This would produce EBITDA of £ 6,039 million. The relatively small difference between £ 6,070 million and £ 6,039 million was the inclusion of bank charges of £ 31,000.

71.

These budget documents contained very detailed workings in relation to each of the contracts which were considered relevant for consideration. Despite being a

“weighted budget”, the projections were based primarily on contracts which had already been won. Only six contracts were included on a ‘weighted’ basis, and all of the contracts which Mr. Baldorino had weighted at 100%, in his pipeline document, were included without a discount.

72.

On 27 March 2009, Mr. Mantell e-mailed Tenon with a spreadsheet entitled “Budget 2009-2010 (weighted case) (v4)”. The material figures had not changed. It showed

EBITDA (using the figure for “Profit before exceptional items”) for 2009/10 of £ 6.070m based on turnover of £ 19.039m.

73.

The information supplied by the Defendants was then incorporated into two documents: the “Tenon Memorandum” and the Tenon Data Pack. These documents were sent to potential backers of the MBO. The Tenon Memorandum ran to 23 pages, and stated at the start that it had been prepared by Tenon “based on information provided by the management of [Updata UK] and has been approved by the management.” It provided an upbeat assessment of the company’s prospects. It described the business as profitable, highly cash generative and with a significant qualified new business pipeline in excess of £ 70 million. It also provided a description of Updata Europe’s indebtedness to the Bank. The relevant paragraphs were in the following terms:

3.2 Opportunity

The opportunity is to acquire an established fast growing managed network service provider with long term contractual relationships with local authorities in the UK. The business is profitable, highly cash generative and has a significant qualified new business pipeline in excess of £70m.

Updata Europe owes c£3m to a small Danish Bank (‘The Bank’) which has taken security over the shareholding in Updata.

The Danish Bank is keen to find an investor into Updata Europe and has been exploring this option although it realises that a sale of their 60% holding in Updata is the most likely exit. The Bank is now actively exploring this exit route.

A private individual invested £1.5m into the Group in 2008 and their debt is held between two tranches of the Bank debt in terms of priority. Any purchaser will need to take this debt into consideration whilst formulating an offer for the business.

Whilst total debt within Updata Europe totals an estimated DKR40m (£5m), it is anticipated that a deal might be possible at slightly below par value, although this will require further discussion and negotiation with the Bank.

74.

The reference to “par value” (as Mr. Hooft confirmed in his evidence) meant the amount of the debt.

75.

I note in passing that, as described above, the total debt to the Bank was, inclusive of the guarantee of Updata Denmark’s debts, around £ 5 million, with an additional £ 1.6 million owed to Vald. Nielsen (the “private individual” referred to in the above passage). It seems, however, that (as the Claimants submitted) this was not appreciated by those on the MBO side at the time. They proceeded on the basis that the Bank was owed around £ 3 million (or DKK 26 million), which was secured by 1st and 3rd ranking charges on the shares, with a further sum of around £ 1.5 million owed to Vald. Nielsen and secured by a 2nd ranking charge sitting in between the Bank’s debt. That meant that in order to pay off the Bank’s DKK 26m debt in full, any offer would need to cover the sums owed to Vald. Nielsen as well. Nobody on the MBO side appears to have appreciated that the true extent of Updata Europe’s liability to the Bank included the sums owed by Updata Denmark to the Bank and guaranteed by Updata Europe.

76.

In the section headed “Financials”, there was a table which included the following actual and projected results which are material to the issues in the case:

(£000)

Actual year

end 30.06.08

Forecast year ended 30.06.09

Weighted forecast

for year ended

30.06.10

Turnover/sales

5,133

11,045

19,039

EBITDA

813

1,694

6,071

EBIT

265

1,103

5,014

77.

The figures for 2009/10 were explained as follows:

“The figures for Year Ended 30 June 2010 are weighted proportionately against the probability of securing the contracts. If Updata are successful in securing all of the contracts that they are presently tendering for this will lead to achieving a materially higher value of contracted revenue and EBITDA.”

The 2009/10 projection was therefore taken from the March Weighted Budget, described above, prepared at the end of March. The projection was therefore very substantially in excess of both the “middle case” and the “best case” which were set out in the Financial Overview.

78.

The Tenon Data Pack was a lengthy document which included: a detailed analysis of the company’s performance in the year to date; its anticipated earnings in the year to 30 June 2009; its projected earnings in the year 2009/10; and the status of each of its

actual and likely contract wins. The important features of the Tenon Data Pack included the following:

a)

It showed forecast EBITDA for 2008/09 of £ 2,479,000 against a budget of £ 1,717,000. Page 23 of the Data Pack gave details of this forecast under the heading “Management expect to outperform the FY09 budget by £ 0.8m of EBITDA”. A similar statement appeared on page 4 of the Data Pack in a box which referred to the “Management Run rate”. The text within the box stated: “Based on run rate Performance and known installations, management expect to outperform FY09 Budget”.

b)

It showed forecast EBITDA of £ 6.070m for 2009/10: i.e. the same figure contained in the Weighted Budget and the Tenon Memorandum.

c)

It also showed “pro forma EBITDA” for 2009/10 of £ 4.4m. This was based on existing contracts which were set out on page 7 of the Data Pack.

d)

It included a detailed breakdown of the company’s turnover and margin on each contract, as well as an analysis (in Appendix 2) of “current contracts” and (in Appendix 3) “new contracts” with weighting information as to the likelihood of new contracts being won.

79.

On 26 March 2009, the Defendants had meetings with three private equity houses (Octopus PE, Epic PE and Hamilton Bradshaw). Since the investment memorandum had not been completed at that point, the Defendants decided to use a pre-existing presentation known as the “Kelso Presentation” as part of their presentation to these potential investors. (This presentation had originally been given to a potential investor, Kelso, in October 2008). At 8.22am on 26 March, Mr. Bennett e-mailed the original Kelso Presentation to Mr. Mantell. At 8.30am Mr. Mantell replied, having amended the final slide on the Kelso Presentation to present the following financial information:

(£000)

Mgmt. 2008

A/Cs

Budget 2009

Forecast 2010

Turnover/sales

5,133

11,045

19,039

Profit before tax

28

1,112

4,981

EBITDA

854

1,704

6,039

80.

The 2009/10 figures in the amended Kelso Presentation were those from the March Weighted Budget circulated at 8.50pm on 25 March 2009. This amendment to the Kelso Presentation is of particular significance in the light of what was later said in the e-mail dated 3 June 2009.

81.

On 30 March 2009, Moore Capital followed up on their meeting with Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino by requesting further information. This particular e-mail chain had commenced on 19 March 2009 with Mr. Bich of Moore Capital asking for “Updata’s latest financial statements pls (Balance sheet, P&L, Cash flow statement)”. Mr. Mantell responded by sending Mr. Bich a document known as the “2009/10 Weighted Budget”. This is a shorter version of a revision (immaterial for present purposes) to the March Weighted Budget sent to Tenon on 27 March 2009. It shows:

(£000)

Budget 2009/10

Turnover/sales

19,039

Profit before tax

4,981

EBITDA*

6,039

* As previously indicated, EBITDA is not specifically shown, but it is to be derived by adding together the figure for “Profit before taxation” and “Depreciation”.

82.

Following the release of the Tenon Data Pack, on 3 April 2009 the Defendants received a number of offers from potential backers. Nearly all of them were pitched at the same level: roughly £ 5 million for Updata Europe’s 60% stake. This reflected the fact that the Tenon Memorandum had presented the “opportunity” as one to acquire at around or below the par value of Updata Europe’s debt. It also reflected Tenon’s remit, as described in their e-mail of 26 February 2009, to identify “funders prepared to invest £ 4-5 million to facilitate an acquisition from your overseas parent”.

83.

LMS appear not to have sent an offer letter but instead presented their offer in a Powerpoint presentation to 2 April 2009. On valuation (and as I have already mentioned in my discussion of Mr. Hooft’s evidence) LMS noted that:

-

“Loan face value of £5m sets “base level” expectations for 60% stake

-

This reflects equity value of £8.3m

-

Together with £1.4 million net debt at end of Feb this gives an enterprise value of £9.7 million

-

Certainly, Historical, LTM and YTD underperformance compared to budget give ammunition for lower valuation

-

However, if outturn numbers will be achieved, the entry price multiple falls to just below 4x EBITDA, a realistic valuation in today’s markets…

-

…whilst Pro Forma numbers give a flavour of the upside to be gained by Investor / Management if UD UK successfully executes on its plan.”

84.

Having considered the various proposals, the Defendants decided to work with LMS. On 14 April 2009, Mr. Bennett, Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Nyegaard, Mr. Hooft and Mr. Jamie Rhodes (of LMS), and Mr. Helman and Mr. Castledine (Tenon) met with Mr. Jorgensen in Denmark. I consider this meeting in more detail below (see Section H).

85.

On 16 April 2009 LMS sent their offer letter by e-mail to Mr. Holm, Mr. Johnsen and

Mr. Jorgen Johnsen. The letter was addressed to Mr. Flemming Holm, as chairman of

Updata Europe. LMS offered DKK 65 million for the entire issued share capital of Updata UK. The letter explained that this “would value the 60% stake held by Updata A/S at DKK 39 million”. LMS’s letter stated that LMS had worked closely with management and advisers; that they had performed their:

“stage one financial due diligence. This included a review of historical and year to date (YTD) trading results, historical and year to date (“YTD”) trading results, historical and current balance sheets positions including analysis of working capital, as well as a review of key contracts.”

86.

The letter went on to provide an explanation or justification for the level at which they had pitched their offer:

“From this information we know that YTD February 2009 results are behind plan due to delays on installations and lower than budgeted margins: Sales £6.0 million (budget £8.6 million) and EBITDA £0.8 million (budget £1.3 million). The actual run rate results of the company (12 months to 28th Feb 2009) are as follows: Sales £8.4 million, EBITA £1.5 million and EBIT £0.85 million. In other words, significant progress is still required to achieve budget results for June 2009. However, despite this shortfall, the Company is showing good growth compared to 2008.

In addition, our analysis shows several creditors have gone unpaid (including VAT!) and the true indebtedness of the Company is around £1.4 million. The resulting enterprise value of Updata UK (using an exchange rate of 8.5 DKK/GBP) is £9.1 million.

Therefore our Offer reflects the following valuation multiples:

EBITDA £1.50 million = 6.1x

EBIT £0.85 million = 10.7x

We have taken these factors and the resulting high entry price multiples into account in formulating our Offer. We believe that under LMS ownership, a well financed Updata UK, freed from its current constraints, has good prospects for profitable growth.”

Reaction to the LMS offer and the 20 April e-mail

87.

On the morning of 20 April 2009, at 10.12am, Mr. Holm e-mailed Mr. Hooft to say that Updata Europe had given exclusivity to another party and was interested in getting investment into Updata Europe. That response prompted various communications that morning between LMS, Tenon and the Defendants. These are described in more detail below. In particular, at 10.28am Mr. Bennett e-mailed LMS, Tenon and others to say that “Peter Johnsen is coming to the UK this week with the

express intention of raising circa £2m”. The Defendants at that stage already knew about Mr. Johnsen’s intention to look for investment of around £ 2 million as a result of a proposal which Mr. Johnsen had made known as ‘Project Eagle’. It was on the morning of 20 April that Mr. Bennett responded, rejecting that proposal.

88.

At 9.41am Mr. Johnsen e-mailed Mr. Bennett. The e-mail was written in Danish (which Mr. Bennett spoke), and the subject line was: “Re: Seneste budget”. This meant: “Re: Latest budget”.

“Could you forward the latest budgets for Updata UK for 2008/9, 2009/10 and 2010/11. Some adjustments need to [have] been made regarding the changes that are mentioned in the letter from LMS.

Thanks in advance.

PS. I would very much like to use them today if possible”

89.

At 3.05pm, Mr. Bennett replied. He did not change the subject line “Re Latest budget”. His e-mail response attached 6 pages of February 2009 management accounts and the Financial Overview. The text of his e-mail, which was written in English after the greeting “Hej Pede” was:

“The numbers used by LMS were taken from the February Management Accounts. The projections used were the same that we presented to Helge Homann and Jens in March. Please see attached. I do not know what adjustments LMS have made internally.”

90.

This e-mail forms one of the two central planks of the Claimants’ case on fraudulent misrepresentation. In summary, the Claimants contend that Mr. Bennett was dishonestly representing that the Financial Overview was the latest budget which Mr. Johnsen had requested, and that this was a document which had been given to LMS. The true position, so the Claimants contend, is that Mr. Bennett knew that the Financial Overview was not the latest budget. The management’s real expectation for 2008/2009 was for the higher figures which can be seen in the Tenon memorandum, and their real expectation for 2009/2010 was the higher figures in the March Weighted Budget which was also reflected in the Tenon memorandum. The Defendants deny that the e-mail contained any false representation and deny any intention to mislead. The parties’ arguments on this e-mail, and its attachments, were extensive and are addressed in greater detail below: see Section D.

May 2009 and the establishment of the Data Room

91.

On 6 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen’s team met with the Defendants as part of the continuation of Mr. Nielsen’s due diligence. The Defendants were reluctant to meet with him. Mr. Baldorino’s attitude is apparent from his e-mail to Mr. Nyegaard on 2

May: “Well, as far as I am concerned I don’t want to see him. If he has something to say he can put it in writing. Quite frankly whatever he says … we are not prepared to work with him”. Nevertheless, they did meet him.

92.

On 13 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen sent a “letter of understanding” to Mr. Holm and Mr. Jorgensen. He proposed to arrange for: (i) a capital injection of DKK 52.5 million for 75% of the share capital of Updata Europe (with the money to be used to repay the debts owed by Updata Europe to the Bank and to Vald. Nielsen); and (ii) the purchase of Newwatch’s 12.5% interest in Updata UK. The valuations were based on “5.0 x EBITDA for both the Danish and English operations”. Mr. Nielsen’s letter expressed concern that the Defendants had not answered his questions following his due diligence meeting with them in March. He also noted that the Defendants had produced a “Business Plan” which had not been provided to his team. He said that “this document ought to be made available as it would provide management and staff’s clearest picture of UK operations, revenue forecasts and commercial and strategic intelligence.”

93.

On 15 May 2009, LMS made a second offer. LMS offered to purchase the entire share capital of Updata UK for DKK 76 million (valuing Updata Europe’s 60% interest at DKK 46 million), representing an 18% increase in the price offered on 16 April. LMS explained that they had already done “extensive preliminary due diligence” in conjunction with Tenon and the management, but that final due diligence to completion would be required and this could start immediately. They stated that they would expect to enter into a period of exclusivity upon acceptance of the offer. They also offered the EVs the opportunity for them to “rollover” part of their interests into the new company: Newwatch could roll over its entire 12.4% interest; Updata Europe could retain a 10% interest in the newco.

94.

On 20 and 21 May 2009 Mr. Jorgensen e-mailed Mr. Birkeland recommending that a Data Room be opened as part of the sale process. Mr. Jorgensen asked Mr. Birkeland to pass his e-mail to Updata Europe’s Board and interested parties. The e-mail also stated that “if Jens Nielsen wants to access the data room from Tuesday, 26 May 2009, the binding offer shall be submitted no later than Sunday, 24 May 2009.” The requirement for a Data Room, and its subsequent establishment, are the important backdrop to the 3 June e-mail. The course of events is described in more detail in Section E below, and what follows here is a broad summary.

95.

In accordance with Mr. Jorgensen’s request, a Data Room was established, in relation to Updata UK, at its premises in Reigate. On 22 May 2009, Mr. Birkeland e-mailed Mr. Bennett a draft list of information to be included in the Data Room. The same list was sent to Mr. Hildebrandt at Updata Denmark. It included “any current budget, forecast or business plan (prepared by or for the company or the management)” and “customer contracts”. Mr. Bennett forwarded the list to Mr. Mantell.

96.

Both Mr. Nielsen and LMS were informed of the establishment of the Data Room on 22 May 2009. In response, Mr. Nielsen insisted that the Data Room should include:

“answers to our questions to the UK management, copy of all contracts, pipeline information for UK, copy of all information, written and oral, given to LMS Capital (together with confirmation from UK management that this is the exact information handed over in writing and orally)…”

97.

On 26 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen e-mailed Mr. Jorgensen with: (i) a letter stating that he was working with e-Kong Group Limited (a telecommunications company listed in

Hong Kong) on a model involving a cash injection of DKK 60 million into Updata Europe (including the acquisition of Newwatch’s shares in Updata UK); and (ii) a letter from e-Kong expressing their interest in participating in the acquisition of a majority stake in Updata Europe. On 28 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen sent a revised letter of understanding to Mr. Jorgensen (cc’d to Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Homann).

98.

On 28 May 2009, Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Bennett discussed the contents of the Data Room in a telephone call. Mr. Birkeland followed up his call by e-mailing Mr. Bennett a copy of the “draft data room rules”. On the same day, Mr. Birkeland circulated a draft confidentiality agreement and drafts of the Data Room rules to LMS. The same documents were sent to Mr. Nielsen on 29 May. The Data Room was to be open from 1 June 2009 – 12 June 2009; final offers were due by 19 June 2009 (to include a draft share purchase agreement); Updata Europe would decide whether to proceed with any offer by 24 June 2009; and any bidder chosen by Updata Europe would have an exclusivity period until 10 July 2009 to complete the transaction. The “draft data room rules” indicated that:

“Any sale and purchase agreement relating to the Target [Updata UK] shall provide that the contents of the documents contained in the data room shall be deemed to be disclosed against any warranties contained in the sale and purchase agreement, although no warranty shall be given as to the accuracy of those documents.”

99.

On the same day, 28 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen repeated his concerns that the Defendants (and LMS) had access to information which had not been disclosed to his team. He e-mailed Mr. Birkeland to describe what he called the “deficiencies in the process to date” and repeated his concerns about the disparity of available information:

“Outstanding Due Diligence

I also refer to my e-mail to you, dated 24th May 2009, and repeat my request for information to be included in the DD material:

(a)

answers to our questions to the UK management;

(b)

copy of all contracts, pipeline information for UK;

(c)

copy of all information or disclosure, written or oral, given to LMS Capital, including a copy of a UK management’s business plan (together with confirmation from UK management that this is the exact information handed over in writing or orally),

(d)

Due Diligence information package for Updata Denmark and Change Networks, concise statement on status of Updata

Germany and Spain (ongoing liabilities, contracts etc).”

100.

Mr. Nielsen’s concerns were taken seriously by the Bank, Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm. Mr. Birkeland e-mailed Mr. Holm to say that “we should follow up on this, and explicitly make sure that this is also complied with”.

29 May meeting and its subsequent correspondence

101.

On 29 May 2009, Mr. Birkeland had a meeting with Mr. Bennett at Updata UK’s offices. There are disputes as to precisely what was said at the meeting, and I deal in more detail below with the meeting and the correspondence which followed. There was no dispute, however, that Mr. Birkeland told Mr. Bennett that both parties had to have equal access to the documents and information provided to Tenon. It was also not disputed that Mr. Birkeland was told by Mr. Bennett that the Defendants would not be putting a copy of the Tenon Memorandum itself into the Data Room.

102.

Following the meeting on 29 May 2009, there were a number of important exchanges which are addressed in more detail in Section E below. They began with an e-mail from Mr. Birkeland to Mr. Bennett at 8.22 pm that night. Mr. Birkeland said that “as discussed we need to include a business plan in the [data] room” and he copied and pasted a series of bullet point information requests made by Mr. Nielsen the previous day. He also asked Mr. Bennett to answer a number of outstanding questions which had been raised by Mr. Nielsen much earlier. Finally Mr. Birkeland said:

“We will then prepare a statement from Management Team confirming that LMS Capital has not in writing/orally been provided with any factual information etc. which is different from the information included in the data room, hereunder in the business plan, or the responses.”

103.

On 29 May 2009, at 21.51, Mr. Bennett forwarded Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail to Mr. Hooft of LMS commenting: “a little too much information don’t you think?” On 31

May, Mr. Bennett sent Mr. Hooft his draft responses to Mr. Nielsen’s bullet points for Mr. Hooft to comment on.

104.

On 1 June 2009, Mr. Mantell on behalf of Mr. Bennett, sent Mr. Holm: (i) a copy of Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail with answers to Mr. Nielsen’s bullet-point information requests, and (ii) a document known as “JNDD1” (which contained the Defendants’ answers to the questions first asked by Mr. Nielsen following his due diligence meetings in March). In the e-mail, Mr. Bennett said that:

“There is no formal business plan in place for Updata UK. The document which most closely resembles a business plan is a presentation to Kelso Asset Management which RB & VB presented in October 2008. This can be updated but is a Power Point presentation and not a descriptive document.”

105.

In the meantime, the Defendants considered how to respond to Mr. Birkeland’s request for a statement that LMS had not been provided with any factual information which was different from that to be included in the Data Room. Mr. Robert Kidson of Tenon gave the following advice on 2 June 2009:

“Our advice is that ALL information which you as directors have supplied to Lee/Tenon in the course of them preparing a report for you (including any pipeline info) should go in the data room. The report by Tenon since it was commissioned by you and is for your benefit does not have to be shown to anyone else however.

Our view is that to breach the above would expose you to potential problems/even litigation.”

The 3 June e-mail

106. The second crucial plank of the Claimants’ case on fraudulent misrepresentation is an e-mail which was sent by Mr. Bennett to Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm in the afternoon of 3 June 2009. The e-mail was copied to Mr. Mantell, and was bcc’d to Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Cowan and Mr. Hooft. The e-mail was in the following terms:

“Hi Mads and Flemming,

I apologise for not getting this to you sooner. I came in on Sunday to complete and was convinced I had sent everything, except the presentation, off to you.

Please find attached answers to JN’s & HH’s questions from the round off meeting we had in the UK. Where further detail is required please refer to Julian as he has all the detailed paperwork.

In response to Mads’ e-mail earlier today and my subsequent conversation with Flemming, I would like to confirm that there is no business plan, nor has there been for a long time (years). The information we provided to Tenon began with the PowerPoint presentation attached, which was followed by a number of meetings in which they asked specific questions which we answered. From the information supplied they wrote an investment memorandum.

The factual data available to both Tenon at the time and LMS subsequently, does not differ from that information currently in the data room. In fact there is now far more factual data in the Data Room than has ever been supplied to Tenon or LMS in the past. We, as a management team will be available to answer questions, from either party, up until the 19th June when we understand that firm offers have been tabled by both reams. We would of course require some notice, although this is to some extent catered for in Data Room rules.

If either of you have any questions, concerns or suggestions, please revert back to me or Julian

Kind regards,

Richard”

107.

In addition to this text, Mr. Bennett had inserted (in red text) responses to the bulletpoint information requests which had been made by Mr. Nielsen, and which Mr. Birkeland had set out in his e-mail of 29 May. In response to the request for a

“Concise statement of business plans for the next 3 years, with long term (to 5 years) prospects for Updata DK, Change and Updata UK”, Mr. Bennett wrote:

“There is no formal or informal business plan in place for Updata UK. The document which most closely resembles a business plan is a presentation to Kelso Asset Management which RB & VB presented in October 2008. Jens and Helge Homann were given this presentation when they came to the UK in Feb/ March. We have updated this (please see attached) to reflect new business won but please bear in mind that this is a PowerPoint presentation and not a descriptive document.”

108.

The e-mail attached a Powerpoint document called “Kelso Presentation Updated May

2009” (the “Updated Kelso Presentation”). On the final page, under the heading “financial projections” the following information was provided:

(£000)

Man Accs 2008

Budget 2009

Best Case forecast 2010

Turnover/sales

5,133

11,045

15,183

Profit before tax

28

1,112

2,195

EBITDA

854

1,704

3,348

109.

The figure of £ 3,348,000 was exactly the same figure as contained in the Financial Overview which had been provided to Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann in March, and then sent to Mr. Johnsen as an attachment to the 20 April 2009 e-mail. It was therefore a substantially lower figure than the forecast in the March Weighted Budget and used in the Tenon Memorandum. It was also substantially lower than the figures which Mr. Bennett had previously used, in March 2009, to update the original Kelso presentation.

110.

The Claimants contend that the 3 June e-mail contained a number of fraudulent misrepresentations. Again, the Defendants contend that that there were no such representations or inducement, and they raise various arguments in that context which are addressed separately below.

June and July 2009

111.

The Data Room was in due course populated with various documents. Notwithstanding the advice of Tenon, these did not include all of the documents which “you as directors have supplied to Lee/Tenon in the course of them preparing a report for you (including any pipeline info)”. For example, there was no dispute that the Data Room was not populated with the pipeline document which Mr. Baldorino had prepared in March, and which was then used for the purposes of preparing the March Weighted Budget. The most significant omission, at least until a very late stage in the process, was the March Weighted Budget. This budget, whilst not included in the Data Room, was provided on the 6 July CD, sent to Corren Troen by Mr Mantell.

The fact that the Defendants had disclosed the March Weighted Budget was central to various arguments deployed by the Defendants on a summary judgment / strike out application heard by Sir Richard Field in 2016. Those arguments are now principally relevant to issues relating to the Defendants’ credibility, since it is no longer contended that the mistaken disclosure of the Weighted Budget at the very end of the process can realistically provide any answer to the case in fraud. I deal with the relevance of the summary judgment / strike out application, and the Defendants’ case presented to Sir Richard Field, in Section F below.

112.

Both LMS (on 4 June 2009 and 9 June 2009) and Mr. Nielsen’s team (represented by Mr. Hans Christian Iversen) (on 11 June 2009) visited the Data Room. They sought photocopies of certain documents. Mr. Nielsen received a copy of the Updated Kelso Presentation and “JNDD1” by e-mail on 10 June 2009. Mr. Iversen had a meeting with Mr. Mantell on 11 June 2009 in which they discussed, among other matters, “update on 2009 out turn”, “details of budgeting / forecast structure” and “a breakdown of rental and installation revenue”. Mr. Iversen’s report of the meeting indicates that he was looking at, amongst other things, the figures in the Financial Overview and the EBITDA figure of £ 3,348 million which was in both the Financial Overview and the Updated Kelso Presentation.

113.

The Data Room closed on 12 June 2009.

114.

On 19 June 2009 LMS made its offer to the EVs as well as Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett. LMS provided signed heads of terms, an exclusivity agreement and proof of funds (showing £ 15 million held with HSBC). LMS offered, subject to contract, to purchase the entire company at a value of DKK 76.6 million (£ 8.8m): this was the same figure as they had offered on 15 May 2009. Mr. Bennett, Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Nyegaard would receive shares in the purchasing vehicle instead of cash. The EVs would have the option to roll over part of the consideration by acquiring up to 17.36% in the purchasing vehicle. They would retain the option to acquire shares in the purchasing vehicle for a year after the sale, but at a decreasing percentage every month.

115.

Also on 19 June 2009, e-Kong submitted a letter to the board of Updata Europe. eKong said that it was “not in a position to submit any formal offer to Updata Europe and/or Sparlolland on any acquisition of interest in or assets of Updata Europe.” The letter noted that e-Kong had received very limited information on Updata Europe and its non-UK subsidiaries “and only until very recently some financial information on Updata UK.” e-Kong suggested that it remained interested in a transaction whereby it would acquire 75% of Updata Europe for DKK 52.5 million and Newwatch’s interest in Updata UK for DKK 7 million.

116.

On 20 June 2009, Mr. Birkeland produced a ‘score sheet’ for the two bids. The LMS bid out-scored the e-Kong bid on nearly every point. By contrast, Mr. Holm (and others) preferred the e-Kong bid as introducing a strategic partner at the holding company level.

117.

On 23 June 2009 there was a conference call between Updata Europe’s board and eKong (including its chairman Mr. Richard Siemens) to discuss e-Kong’s proposal. On 24 June 2009, Mr. Birkeland informed LMS that they had been granted exclusivity until 10 July 2009 to complete the transaction.

118.

In the period leading up to the sale, LMS engaged in further financial and commercial due diligence (with the assistance of Tenon, Nabarro (LMS’s solicitors) and a firm called AMR International (“AMR”)). They also sought to negotiate the finer points of the sale. The parties’ lawyers (Corren Troen for EVs; Nabarro for LMS; Rosenblatt for Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino) worked on the contractual documentation. Some features of the work carried out are relevant to the issues in the case, in particular the dispute between the accounting experts as to the market value of Updata Europe’s shareholding at the material time. It is not necessary to describe this work in any detail. However, it is relevant to note that there is no suggestion that the financial and commercial due diligence caused the Defendants, or indeed LMS, to downgrade their expectations as to the future prospects of the business.

119.

Thus, by way of illustration, on 29 June 2009 Mr. Szpiro of LMS e-mailed Mr. Bennett (copied to individuals at LMS and Tenon) with a “summary headline P&L for years 2011-2014” (which included figures for 2009 and 2010). Mr. Szpiro explained that he had given some consideration to the “outer year figures as these will ultimately drive value on exit.” He explained that his assumptions were conservative and “essentially build on the 2010 figures for “current”, “in the Bag” and “Weighted” (as per Julian’s model, although there are small differences if trying to reconcile) including further contract wins (called “New”) which are not in the pipeline.” Mr. Szpiro’s spreadsheet showed the following:

(£000)

Jun-09

Jun10

Jun-11

June-12

Jun-13

June14

Turnover/sales

10,681

21,439

24,065

24,884

25,755

26,755

Gross profit

4,911

10,842

10,127

10,425

10,774

11,174

EBITDA

1,911

7,402

6,515

6,633

6,791

6,992

120.

In order to produce these figures, LMS had received a “weighted budget 2009/10” produced by Mr. Mantell which contained the same figures for the 2009/10 financial year as those used by Mr. Szpiro. Like Mr. Szpiro’s figures, Mr. Mantell’s budget differentiated between income from “current” contracts, “in the bag” contracts and “weighted” contracts. It showed a net profit for 2009/10 of £ 6.9 million.

121.

Tenon’s financial due diligence report recorded the following financial information:

(£000)

Normalised

12 mths

to Jun-09

Run rate

at Jun-09

Proforma

run rate

at Jun-10

Projected normalised

12 mths to

Jun-10

Turnover/sales

10,860

11,887

17,368

21,161

Gross profit

5,190

5,814

8,207

10,562

EBITDA

2,103

3,089

5,106

7,460

122.

Tenon noted that there was “a margin for error around the above figures, in aggregate, ought to be within say £0.2 million” (notwithstanding revenue recognition difficulties and other issues).

123.

On 1 July 2009, Ms. Rana (the junior solicitor at Corren Troen) called Ms. Elizabeth Moynihan at Nabarro to note that Corren Troen were going to move the Data Room files back from Updata UK’s offices in Reigate but did not want to interrupt Nabarro’s due diligence. Ms. Rana and Ms. Moynihan spoke by telephone and Ms.

Moynihan said that Nabarro had a CD with all the documents on it. The same day,

Ms. Rana requested a copy of the CD from Mr. Mantell. Mr. Mantell posted the CD to Ms. Rana on around 3 July 2009 and it was received by Ms. Rana at Corren Troen on 6 July 2009. The CD included the 2009-10 March Weighted Budget. I conclude below that, as I have been told by all of the Defendants, this disclosure of the March Weighted Budget was accidental on the part of Mr. Mantell. Throughout the course of the events, the Defendants had intended to withhold this important document from the Data Room and had done so. By this time, the transaction was about to complete and

Ms. Rana did not appreciate that there was any significance to the March Weighted Budget. No-one at Updata Europe spotted the fact that this disclosure had been made, or saw the March Weighted Budget at that stage.

The Sale

124. The sale completed in the early hours of 11 July 2009. Updata Europe “cashed out”. It received £ 5,244 million for its 60% interest in the company. Newwatch “rolled over” its interests into the newco, Updata Holdings: it used the nominal consideration payable to them for their shares in Updata UK to subscribe for shares and apply for loan notes in Updata Holdings. Thus, Newwatch acquired: 63,046 “B” shares in Updata Holdings; £ 699,091 “A” loan notes and £ 349,546 “B” loan notes in Updata Holdings; and an option to acquire further shares and loan notes at any point in a period up to July 2010.

Subsequent events

125.

Updata Europe used its DKK 45.5 million proceeds of sale to repay its DKK 27 million debt to the Bank and its DKK 13 million debt to Vald. Nielsen. This debt arose from funding provided by Mr. Johnsen’s family some time previously, when Updata Europe was desperately in need of cash. It also paid certain professional fees due to Corren Troen and others. Updata Europe remained indebted to the Bank pursuant to its guarantee of Updata Denmark’s debts (approximately DKK 12 million) and owed other sums to various parties including KPMG and Mr. Nielsen.

126.

Despite the sale proceeds from Updata UK, Updata Europe remained in a difficult financial position. There were ultimately unsuccessful negotiations with the Bank and the minority shareholders in Change Networks for further funding to pay off part of the Bank’s outstanding debt. The Bank declared Updata Denmark to be in default. On or about 15 December 2009, 95% of the shares in Updata Europe were sold to Bigaard Ejendomme ApS (a company owned by Mr. Esben Bigaard) for DKK 1 million.

127.

As a result of financial information which Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt received in the course of 2010, and which indicated that Updata UK was performing very significantly better than the outlook which had been presented to them in 2009, they took advice from English counsel in the spring of 2010 about the possibility of a claim arising from the sale of Updata UK. One difficulty for them was that they no longer owned Updata Europe: they therefore sought advice as to whether or not they

could seek an assignment of Updata Europe’s rights against the Defendants and others who had been involved in the sale. Eventually, assignment documentation was executed in January 2011 following a sequence of events which it will be necessary to describe in some detail.

128.

Although Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt were contemplating possible litigation by 2010, and although a letter before action was sent in 2013, the present proceedings were not commenced until March 2015. However, this is no reflection on the merits of the claim, and instead was principally a consequence of the need to raise very significant sums of money in order to pursue the present case.

129.

Once the proceedings were commenced, the Defendants issued a strike out application. That application was supported by witness statements from each of Defendants: see further Section F below. Suffice it to say that although Sir Richard Field did strike out certain parts of the claim, he did not strike out the claim in deceit. This is the principal case that has been pursued before me and which I need to resolve, although the Claimants also advance claims for breach of fiduciary duty. In the case of Newwatch, which in substance retained its shareholding and therefore cannot claim to have suffered loss in consequence of deceit, it is the only claim advanced.

C: Deceit: the law

130. There was ultimately no significant dispute between the parties as to the legal principles relating to the tort of deceit, albeit that each side emphasised certain features of the principles established in the case-law. The decision of Hamblen J. in Cassa di Risparmio v Barclays Bank [2011] EWHC 484 (Comm) (“Cassa”) paragraphs [210] – [232] contains a valuable statement the relevant general principles, and my summary below is derived in substantial part from that judgment. (In two subsequent decisions, to which the Defendants referred, Hamblen J. restated the principles which he had set out in Cassa: see Standard Chartered Bank v Ceylon Petroleum Corporation [2011] EWHC 1785 (Comm) and Brown v InnovatorOne Plc and others [2012] EWHC 1321 (Comm). But it did not seem to me that these decisions established any additional point of principle.) There has been recent and important consideration of the principles relating to inducement by the Supreme Court in Hayward v Zurich [2016] UKSC 48; [2017] A.C. 142 and by the Court of Appeal in Nederlandse Industrie Van Eiprodukten v Rembrandt Enterprises [2019] EWCA Civ 596.

The basic requirements

131. The tort of deceit requires the claimant to show that: (i) the defendants made false representations to the claimants; (ii) the defendants knew the representations to be false, or had no belief in their truth, or were reckless as to whether they were true or false; (iii) the defendants intended the claimants to rely on the representations; (iv) the claimants did rely on the representations; and (v) as a result the claimants have suffered loss and damage: see e.g. Hayward at [58] per Lord Toulson JSC, and Cassa para [210].

Representation

132.

A representation is a statement of fact made by the representor to the representee on which the representee is intended and entitled to rely as a positive assertion that the fact is true. Determining whether any and if so what representation was made by a statement requires (1) construing the statement in the context in which it was made, and (2) interpreting the statement objectively according to the impact it might be expected to have on a reasonable representee in the position and with the known characteristics of the actual representee. It is essential in any case of fraud for the dishonest representation to be clearly identified.

133.

In order to be actionable a representation must be as to a matter of fact. A statement of opinion is therefore not in itself actionable. However, as stated in Clerk & Lindsell para. 18-13.

“A statement of opinion is invariably regarded as incorporating an assertion that the maker does actually hold that opinion; hence the expression of an opinion not honestly entertained and intended to be acted upon amounts to fraud. And the same goes for projections as to the future: if a defendant says he expects an event to take place when he does not, he makes an untrue statement of fact. The only obstacle in the way of maintaining an action for a false representation on this basis lies in the difficulty of proving what the defendant’s real opinion was, and in the difficulty of distinguishing a representation of the existence of an opinion from the representation of the existence of a fact on which that opinion is based.”

134.

In addition, at least where the facts are not equally well known to both sides, a statement of opinion by one who knows the facts best may carry with it a further implication of fact, namely that the representor by expressing that opinion impliedly states that he believes that facts exist which reasonably justify it. In the context of deceit, Clerk & Lindsell paragraph 18-14 expresses this in the following terms:

“Furthermore, at least where the facts are not equally well known to both sides, then a statement of opinion by one who knows the facts best will often carry with it a further implication of fact, namely that the representor by expressing that opinion impliedly states that he believes that facts exist which reasonably justify it. If he does not actually believe in such facts, it follows that he will be liable in deceit. In such a case, the test as to whether a statement of opinion involves such a further implied representation will involve a consideration of the meaning which is reasonably conveyed to the representee. The material facts of the transaction, the knowledge of the respective parties, their relative positions, the words of the representation and the actual condition of the subject-matter are all relevant to this issue.”

135.

Silence by itself cannot found a claim in misrepresentation. But an express statement may impliedly represent something. For example, a statement which is literally true

may nevertheless involve a misrepresentation because of matters which the representor omits to mention. The old cases about statements made in a company prospectus contain illustrations of this principle: for example, Oakes v Turquand (1867) LR 2 HL 325, where Lord Chelmsford said (at 342–3):

“… it is said that everything that is stated in the prospectus is literally true, and so it is; but the objection to it is, not that it does not state the truth as far as it goes, but that it conceals most material facts with which the public ought to have been made acquainted, the very concealment of which gives to the truth which is told the character of falsehood.”

136.

In relation to implied representations the ‘court has to consider what a reasonable person would have inferred was being implicitly represented by the representor's words and conduct in their context’: per Toulson J in IFE v Goldman Sachs [2006] EWHC 2887 (Comm); [2007] 1 Lloyd's Rep 264 at para. [50]. That involves considering whether a reasonable representee in the position and with the known characteristics of the actual representee would reasonably have understood that an implied representation was being made and being made substantially in the terms or to the effect alleged. The test for implied representations has recently been reviewed by the Court of Appeal in Property Alliance Group Ltd v Royal Bank of Scotland PLC [2018] EWCA Civ 355; [2018] 1 WLR 3259 at paragraphs [122] to [132]. The Court of Appeal approved as “helpful” a formulation of Colman J in a previous decision, namely “whether a reasonable representee would naturally assume that the true state of facts did not exist and that, had it existed, he would in all the circumstances necessarily have been informed of it”. But this was not to “water down the requirement that there must be clear words or clear conduct of the representor from which the relevant representation can be implied.”

137.

In a deceit case it is also necessary that the representor should understand that he is making the implied representation and that it had the misleading sense alleged. A person cannot make a fraudulent statement unless he is aware that he is making that statement. To establish liability in deceit it is necessary “to show that the representor intended his statement to be understood by the representee in the sense in which it was false”: per Morritt LJ in Goose v Wilson Sandford & Co [2001] Lloyd’s Rep PN 189 at para. [41].

138.

It is necessary for the statement relied on to have the character of a statement upon which the representee was intended, and entitled, to rely. In some cases, for example, the statement in question may have been accompanied by other statements by way of qualification or explanation which would indicate to a reasonable person that the putative representor was not assuming a responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of the statement or was saying that no reliance can be placed upon it. Thus the representor may qualify what might otherwise have been an outright statement of fact by saying that it is only a statement of belief, that it may not be accurate, that he has not verified its accuracy or completeness, or that it is not to be relied on.

139.

The courts have noted that “a cocktail of truth, falsity and evasion is a more powerful instrument of deception than undiluted falsehood. It is also difficult to detect”: Smith New Court Securities v Citibank [1997] AC 254 at 274 per Lord Steyn.

140.

Deliberate ambiguity – where the representor uses language intending to rely on its literal meaning, but hoping that the representee would understand it differently – is often a hall-mark of fraud: Spencer, Bower & Handley, Actionable Misrepresentation, 5th Ed. at 4.15 - 4.24 (“Spencer Bower”). At paragraph 4.15, the authors state:

“There is another type of ambiguity when the inference is open that the representor deliberately used ambiguous language intending to rely on its literal meaning, but hoping the representee would understand it differently. The contrast is between ambiguity that appears spontaneous, and that which appears contrived. In the latter case every presumption is made against he who used dubious language.”

141.

In the case of an ambiguous statement, it is “essential that the representor should have intended the statement to be understood in the sense in which it was understood by the claimant (and of course a sense in which it is untrue) or should have deliberately used the ambiguity for the purpose of deceiving him and succeeded in doing so”: per Rix LJ in The Kriti Palm [2006] EWCA Civ 1601; [2007] 1 All ER (Comm) 667 at [253].

142.

Different statements at different times must frequently be read or construed together in order to understand their combined effect as a representation. At paragraph 4.24 of Spencer Bower, the authors state:

“Statements connected by express or implied reference may form a single representation and their combined effect must be considered. This rule applies to statements in one document such as a prospectus, to statements in a number of documents such as a series of letters … This may render the composite representation false, though the components by themselves are true, or render it true, though some of the components, by themselves, are false. The composite representation may also be as false as every part, and every part as false as the whole.”

143.

Where one person has made a misrepresentation, it is open to him to correct the misstatement prior to the contract and to rely on the correction as a defence to a claim in deceit (effectively on the basis that the misrepresentations cannot have induced the claimant to enter the contract: see below). However, in those circumstances “it is not enough to show that the claimant could have discovered the truth, but that he did discover it.” It is not sufficient just to provide documents from which the claimant could work out the truth: the correction must be made fairly and openly: see Peekay v ANZ Banking Group [2006] EWCA Civ 386; [2006] 1 CLC 582 at [29]-[40]. The explanation must be “quite clear”: Arnison v Smith (1889) 41 ChD 348 at 370 per Lord Halsbury.

Falsity

144. The representation must be false. A representation may be true without being entirely correct, provided that it is substantially correct and the difference between what is represented and what is actually correct would not have been likely to induce a reasonable person in the position of the claimants to enter into the contracts: Avon Insurance v Swire Fraser [2000] Lloyd’s Rep IR 535 at [17] per Rix J.

The mental element

145.

The classic statement of the mental element required to found a claim in deceit remains that of Lord Herschell in Derry v Peek (1889) 14 App Cas 337:

“First, in order to sustain an action of deceit, there must be proof of fraud and nothing short of that will suffice. Secondly, fraud is proved when it is shown that a false representation has been made (1) knowingly, (2) without belief in its truth, or (3) recklessly, careless whether it be true or false. Although I have treated the second and third as distinct cases, I think the third is but an instance of the second, for one who makes a statement under such circumstances can have no real belief in the truth of what he states. To prevent a false statement from being fraudulent, there must, I think, always be an honest belief in its truth.”

146.

As to recklessness, even if the party making the representation may have had no knowledge of its falsehood, he will still be responsible if he had no belief in its truth and made it, ‘not caring whether it was true or false’: see Clerk & Lindsell, at [18-21]. As Lord Herschell put it Derry v Peek, supra, at 368 (and 361):

“Any person making such a statement must always be aware that the person to whom it is made will understand, if not that he who makes it knows, yet at least that he believes it to be true. And if he has no such belief he is as much guilty of fraud as if he had made any other representation which he knew to be false, or did not believe to be true.”

147.

It is not necessary that the maker of the statement was ‘dishonest’ as that word is used in the criminal law: Standard Chartered Bank v Pakistan National Shipping Corp (No. 2) [2000] CLC 133 . Nor is the defendant's motive in making the representation relevant. “If fraud be established it is immaterial that there was no intention to cheat or injure the person to whom the false statement was made”: Clerk & Lindsell, para. 18-20, quoting Bradford Third Benefit Building Society v Borders [1941] 2 All ER 205, 211 per Viscount Maugham. What is required is dishonest knowledge, in the sense of an absence of belief in truth: The Kriti Palm, [257] (Rix LJ). It is in that sense that I use the word “dishonest” in this judgment.

148.

The ingredient of dishonesty (in the above sense) must not be watered down into something akin to negligence, however gross: The Kriti Palm, [256]. However, the unreasonableness of the grounds of the belief, though not of itself supporting an action for deceit, will be evidence from which fraud may be inferred. As Lord Herschell pointed out in Derry v Peek at 376, there must be many cases:

“where the fact that an alleged belief was destitute of all reasonable foundation would suffice of itself to convince the court that it was not really entertained, and that the

representation was a fraudulent one.”

149.

The standard of proof in a case of fraud is the balance of probabilities. Whilst the court of course considers what is alleged when deciding on inherent probability, this is purely an aspect of common sense, not the standard of proof, In Re B [2008] UKHL 35; [2009] 1 A.C. 11 at [15] per Lord Hoffmann. There is no necessary logical connection between seriousness of the allegation and the likelihood of its having occurred, nor should the court talk about more serious allegations requiring more cogent evidence: In Re B at [64] and [72] per Baroness Hale. This approach was reaffirmed in Re S-B [2009] UKSC 17; [2010] 1 A.C. 678 at [12]-[13].

Intention

150.

Actionable fraud involves an intention on the part of the representor to induce the representee to act as he did. The Defendants submitted in their opening submissions, relying upon Spencer Bower paragraph 5.05, that the representor must actually intend the representee to be induced to act in the way that he in fact acted. In that paragraph, the authors discuss Peek v Gurney (1873) LR 6 HL 377, where a claim by a purchaser of shares on the Stock Exchange failed, because the representations in the prospectus were intended to induce subscriptions rather than purchases in the market. In their closing submissions, the Defendants made the same submission, but this time relying upon paragraph 5-19 of Cartwright: Misrepresentation, Mistake and Non-Disclosure 4th Ed.

151.

The nature of this requirement was considered by the Court of Appeal in Goose v Wilson Sandford, and subsequently Mead v Babington [2007] EWCA Civ 518, [2007] All E.R. (D) 226. As Cartwright notes, it is not necessary for the representor to intend to induce the specific action taken by the representee in reliance on the misrepresentation: see Goose at [48], where the Court of Appeal held that the “the more normal formulation is that the representor should intend to deceive the representee, with intent, that is to say, that it shall be acted upon by him.” In Mead, Longmore LJ applied Goose, holding that there “was no requirement that the representation had to be intended to be acted on in the manner in which damage resulted to the claimant. It was not the specific action of the claimant which had to be intended: it was only necessary that there should be an intention that the representation should be acted on…”

Inducement

152. A representee must show that he in fact understood the statement in the sense (so far as material) which the court ascribes to it, and that, having that understanding, he relied on it: Raiffeisen Zentralbank Osterreich v Royal Bank of Scotland [2010] EWHC 1392 (Comm) at [87]. This requirement is of particular significance in the case of implied representations.

153. In BV Nederlandse Industrie Van Eiprodukten v Rembrandt Enterprises [2019]

EWCA Civ 596, the court held at [43] that, in a case of deceit

“there is an evidential presumption of fact (not law) that a representee will have been induced by a fraudulent misrepresentation intended to cause him to enter the contract and that the inference will be “very difficult to rebut” to use the words of Lord Clarke (at [43]).”

154.

While the onus of proof is on the representee to prove inducement, he has the benefit of that evidential presumption, and he only needs to show that the misrepresentation was “actively present in his mind” when he made the decision to enter into the transaction (BV Nederlandse at [45]). The phrase “actively present in his mind” is taken from the judgment of Bowen LJ in Edgington v Fitzmaurice (1885) 29 Ch. D 459, 483 where he explained the principle as follows:

“But such misstatement was material if it was actively present to his mind when he decided to advance his money. The real question is, what was the state of the Plaintiff’s mind, and if his mind was disturbed by the misstatement of the Defendants, and such disturbance was in part the cause of what he did, the mere fact of his also making a mistake himself could make no difference”.

155.

It is sufficient for the misrepresentation to be an inducing cause of the claimant entering into the transaction on the terms that he did. It is not necessary for it to be the sole cause (Hayward v Zurich at [33]).

156.

There were differing submissions as to the necessary weight of impact of an inducing representation. The Defendants, relying on Dadourian v Simms [2009] EWCA Civ

169; [2009] 1 Lloyd’s Rep 601, submitted that the misrepresentation must play a “real and substantial part”, albeit not decisive, in inducing the representee to act. The Claimants, relying upon a decision of the High Court of Australia referred to in [33] of Hayward, submitted that the representation need only play some part, even if only a minor part, in contributing to the course of action.

157.

As Lord Clarke indicates in [36] of Hayward, in the context of his discussion as to what is required to rebut the presumption of inducement, “the authorities in this area are not entirely consistent as to “whether what must be proved is that the misrepresentation played “no part at all” or that it did not play a “determinative part”, or that it did not play a “real and substantial part””. This issue was not directly addressed in BV Nederlandse, although Longmore LJ did refer to the relevant part of Lord Clarke’s judgment: see [42]. The inducement issue in BV Nederlandse was determined in the claimant’s favour because the representation was “one of the reasons why the representee made the relevant contract”: see [49]. It seems to me that this – combined with the statements that “it is very difficult to rebut the presumption” – indicates that it is not appropriate to try to measure the precise weight of a representation where it is one of the reasons why a representee has entered a contract. If the representation is of no real significance, then a court will decline to hold that it was one of the reasons which induced the contract. If, however, it was a matter of significance, the decision will be the other way.

158.

It is no answer to a claim in fraud that the representee could have discovered the falsity of the statement by exercising reasonable care and skill (e.g. by inspecting books or records available to him) Hayward v Zurich at [39]. It therefore does not lie in the mouth of a liar to argue that the claimant was foolish to take him at his word: Clerk & Lindsell at 18-37. Nor can the representor escape liability (or argue that the representee was not induced by the false statement) simply because the representee’s agent (such as his solicitor) is in receipt of the truthful information to correct a previous misrepresentation: Wells v Smith [1914] 3 K.B. 722 at 725 per Scrutton J; Clerk & Lindsell at 18-37.

Causation and loss

159. In their opening submissions, the Claimants accepted that, if the representee would have acted in the same way even in the absence of the fraud, the claim will fail. The parties’ arguments in relation to causation and loss, and the relevant legal principles, are addressed separately in Section H below.

Section D: The 20 April e-mail

The 20 April e-mail

160.

As described in Section B above, the relevant e-mail exchange was as follows. At 9.41am on 20 April 2009 Mr. Johnsen e-mailed Mr. Bennett. The subject-line was “Re: Latest budget”.

“Could you forward the latest budgets for Updata UK for 2008/9, 2009/10 and 2010/11. Some adjustments need to [have] been made regarding the changes that are mentioned in the letter from LMS.

Thanks in advance.

PS. I would very much like to use them today if possible”

161.

At 3.05pm, Mr. Bennett replied. He attached 6 pages of February 2009 management accounts and the Financial Overview. The text of his e-mail was:

“The numbers used by LMS were taken from the February Management Accounts. The projections used were the same that we presented to Helge Homann and Jens in March. Please see attached. I do not know what adjustments LMS have made internally.”

Context

162.

Mr. Johnsen’s e-mail that morning was sent some four days after the LMS offer. It expressly referred to the LMS letter, and it is obvious that the LMS letter was part of the context of Mr. Johnsen’s e-mail. Mr. Bennett’s reply was not sent immediately: it took over 5 hours for him to reply. It is clear, in my judgment, that Mr. Bennett’s reply was carefully considered. It was not rushed, and he went to the trouble of removing certain pages from the February 2009 management accounts.

163.

In the meantime, there was some further communication on 20 April which provides further context for Mr. Bennett’s reply. Shortly after Mr. Johnsen’s e-mail, Mr. Holm e-mailed Mr. Hooft to say that their current objective was to “seek investments into Updata Europe A/S”. In other words, Updata Europe’s preferred course was not to sell Updata UK, but to seek investment at the parent company level. Mr. Hooft was also informed that Updata Europe had “given full exclusivity to another party” and

that they were not at liberty to enter into negotiation until 1 May at the earliest (i.e. 11 days later). The e-mail concluded:

“Should you wish to enter into a dialogue with us on the above mentioned conditions, please feel free to contact us then”.

164.

This e-mail from Mr. Holm resulted in something of a flurry of e-mail activity that morning. This e-mail activity does not form part of the context relevant to interpreting the 20 April e-mail exchange, because Mr. Johnsen was not aware of it. It is, however, relevant to the state of mind of Mr. Bennett, who was involved in this activity, as well as Mr. Baldorino who was copied in on the correspondence. It is plain that, unsurprisingly, Mr. Bennett and LMS were disappointed by the e-mail from Mr. Holm, and that discussion took place in order to decide tactics on how to respond.

165.

Thus, Mr. Hooft passed Mr. Holm’s e-mail to Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett, and others at LMS and Tenon, indicating that it would be interesting to know what the terms of the exclusivity were. Mr. Bennett’s response to Mr. Hooft, copied to others, was:

“Interesting … particularly as Peter Johnsen is coming to the UK this week with the express intention of raising circa £ 2m. It must be a fairly loose exclusivity agreement or perhaps they are in breach”.

166.

An e-mail from Mr. Nyegaard timed at 10.47 am indicated that he and Mr. Bennett had spoken. Mr. Nyegaard’s advice was to send Mr. Holm’s letter to the Bank’s lawyers. Mr. Nyegaard thought that the key was “to stay very close to the bank and have them know all communications surrounding this deal”. He added that he saw

“only Jens as a potential threat now”. In his witness statement, Mr. Nyegaard said that “from this point, I was repeatedly left with the impression that Richard and Vic perceived Mr. Nielsen as a threat to the success of their bid, and even to their livelihoods, if he were to be successful in winning a [bid] and subsequently fire them”. I consider that this evidence did fairly reflect the attitude of Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino at that time, and is consistent with, for example, Mr. Hooft’s evidence as to the management being scared of losing control of the company.

167.

At 11.12 that morning, Mr. Hooft sent an e-mail confirming his discussion with Mr. Bennett as to their approach. This approach included speaking to Niels Sorensen, the

Bank’s lawyer, and telling him of Mr. Holm’s note and forwarding it if he asked for it. The aim was “for the bank to ask to see the exclusivity agreement”. Mr. Hooft also proposed sending a note to Newwatch “extending our offer and inviting discussions at 12.4%”.

168.

Shortly afterwards, Mr. Bennett sent Mr. Sorensen the response from Mr. Holm, commenting that it was “a more negative response than LMS had anticipated in light of the fact that their offer repays all debt within such short time period”.

169.

In the meantime, Mr. Bennett responded, by e-mail at 10.31 am, to a paper that Mr. Johnsen had prepared and which put forward various proposals known as “Project Eagle”. These proposals, which had been made by Mr. Johnsen on 13 April, involved a restructuring of the group, essentially by merging Updata UK into Updata Europe. It

would have resulted in Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett becoming minority shareholders in Updata Europe, thereby diluting their interest in Updata UK. The proposals were rejected by Mr. Bennett. Mr. Johnsen’s paper had referred to a shortterm finance requirement of DKK 20,000,000; i.e. the figure of circa £ 2 million that Mr. Bennett had said that Mr. Johnsen was coming to the UK to try to raise.

What, if any, factual representations were made in the 20 April e-mail

170.

The e-mail itself consisted of four sentences. Yet the arguments (which will be apparent from my discussion below) as to what (if any) factual representations were made were elaborate, particularly on the Defendants’ side. On the Claimants’ side too there was a considerable degree of over-complication, because paragraph 48 of the Re-Amended Particulars of Claim set out a lengthy series of implied representations derived not simply from the 20 April e-mail, but also subsequent meetings and statements. In opening and closing submissions, and as cross-examination progressed, the Claimants’ case became rightly focused on the words which had actually been used in the 20 April e-mail. But it is convenient to start by identifying the terms of the representations pleaded:

“48. As a matter of construction of and/or implication from the statements made by Mr Mantell and Mr Bennett on behalf of and with the knowledge of Mr Baldorino as set out above, the UK management made the following representations to the European Vendors:

(1)

That UK management had a reasonable basis for believing that figures included in the Financial Overview to be correct;

(2)

That the figures in the Financial Overview represented the UK management’s genuine (and current) forecast of Updata UK’s financial position;

(3)

That the figures in the Financial Overview were the only forecasts of Updata UK’s financial position for the financial year 2009/2010 which had been prepared by or on behalf of the UK management;

(4)

That all the information which was material and/or relevant to Updata UK’s financial position and/or the value of Updata UK had been made available to the European Vendors;

(5)

That there was no other relevant or material information to disclose;

(6)

That the UK management had not provided to LMS and/or Tenon any information which the European Vendors did not also have;

(7)

That the UK management were not aware of the basis upon which LMS had calculated the value of Updata UK;

(8)

That no other information which would be included in a business plan was available; and

(9)

That all the contracts which Updata UK had won and/or had had renewed had been disclosed to the European Vendors, including the value and duration of each contract”.

171.

This is a case where express representations were made in a particular e-mail. The question of what representations of fact were made is in my view to be answered by construing that e-mail in the context in which it was made, and interpreting the statements objectively according to the impact that they might be expected to have on a reasonable representee in the position and with the known characteristics of Mr. Johnsen. The e-mail refers to attachments, and in accordance with the principles set out in Section C above it is appropriate to consider the combined effect of the statements in the e-mail and the attachments which were provided.

172.

Read in that context, it seems to me that there are a number of clear factual representations, which are material for present purposes.

173.

First, the e-mail was a response to a request, in Danish, for the “latest budget for Updata UK for 2008/9, 2009/10 and 2011”. The subject matter of the e-mail request, and of the response, was “Latest budget”, also in Danish. The evidence of Mr. Johnsen, which was not disputed in this respect, was that the word “budget” in Danish was used synonymously with “forecast” or “projection”, and that there was only one word in Danish for it. Mr. Bennett, in response, provided the Financial Overview, which set out the “Forecasts” for 2009 (EBITDA £ 1,496,000) and the best, middle and worst case “Budget” for 2009/2010 (EBITDA £ 1,348,000; £ 1,393,000, and £ 1,129,000). The body of the e-mail refers to “the projections”, and then says: “Please see attached”. In my view, any reasonable recipient of the e-mail and the attachments would understand that he was receiving the latest budget or forecast for the years in question.

174.

This conclusion is reinforced by the following matters. The request was one made by the founder of the business in the context of a possible sale of Updata UK following an offer received only a few days earlier. This is relevant context. There was additional context, known to both Mr. Bennett and Mr. Johnsen, that Mr. Johnsen was looking for an outside investor and was coming to the UK for that purpose. The figures were requested from, and provided by, a senior executive director of Updata UK in response to what was obviously an important request, made by Mr. Johnsen, naturally arising from the circumstances of a possible sale or investment. The projections were presented in the format of a detailed table containing not only a projection for 2008/2009 against the original “Budget”, but a series of forecasts for 2009/2010 indicating variation between the best, middle and worst cases.

175.

Secondly, the e-mail stated that the numbers used by LMS were taken from the February Management Accounts, and that “the projections used were the same that

we presented to Helge Homan and Jens in March”. Any reasonable recipient would understand that LMS had been given and used the same information as to projections as had been given to Mr. Homann and Mr. Nielsen in March. Since LMS had made its offer only 4 days earlier, this served to reinforce the fact that the information provided in the Financial Overview was current.

176.

For the above reasons, there is in my judgment no difficulty at all in concluding that there was a representation in the terms pleaded in paragraph 48 (2) of the ReAmended Particulars of Claim, namely, that “the figures in the Financial Overview represented the UK management’s genuine (and current) forecast of Updata UK’s financial position”. Indeed, this is a classic case where, as discussed in Clerk & Lindsell paragraph 18-13, a party provides a representation of his opinion as to what will happen in the future, and the law has no difficulty in saying that the opinion must be honestly entertained at the time that it is made. For reasons explained hereafter, I consider that this representation alone is sufficient for the purposes of the Claimants’ case based upon deceit in relation to the 20 April e-mail. Nevertheless, I will address the other representations which are set out in paragraph 48 of the Re-Amended Particulars of Claim.

177.

Paragraph 48 (1) of the Re-Amended Particulars of Claim pleads a representation that

“the UK management had a reasonable basis for believing the figures included in the Financial Overview to be correct”. The formulation of this representation can be criticised because, in the context of a forecast as to what results will be in the future, it is inappropriate to say that the figures are “correct”; at least if “correct” means that what will actually happen in the future. However, the Claimants did not contend that this pleaded representation was to be understood in that rather literal way. Rather, this pleading is intended to reflect the type of representation discussed in paragraph 18-14 of Clerk & Lindsell; namely a representation that by expressing an opinion (here as to the future results), the representor impliedly states that he believes that facts exist which reasonably justify it. I consider that in the circumstances of this case – where the senior Updata UK management knew the up-to-date information and where there was an imbalance of information between the management and the representatives of Updata Europe – such a representation was made. Indeed, this is in my view the substance of the representation pleaded if the words “to be correct” were omitted: i.e. a representation that the UK management had a reasonable basis for believing the figures included in the Financial Overview.

178.

Paragraph 48 (3) of the Particulars of Claim pleads that the “figures in the Financial Overview were the only forecasts of Updata UK’s financial position for the financial year 2009/2010 which had been prepared by or on behalf of UK management”. In so far as this representation goes beyond that pleaded in paragraph 48 (1) and (2), I do not consider that it was made in the 20 April e-mail. That e-mail contained a representation as to what were the latest or current forecasts, and (as discussed below) what projections had been provided to LMS, but did not represent that no other forecasts had ever been prepared in the past.

179.

I also consider that the representations pleaded in paragraphs 48 (4) (“that all the information which was material and/or relevant to Updata UK’s financial position and/or the value of Updata UK had been made available to the European Vendors”),

48 (5) (“that there was no other relevant or material information to disclose”) and 48 (6) (“that the UK management had not provided to LMS and/or Tenon any information which the European Vendors did not also have”) are not made out on the basis of the 20 April e-mail. These are all, in my view, far too broadly expressed and cannot reasonably be derived from the statements made in the 20 April e-mail.

180.

However, that e-mail did state, in response to the request for the latest budget for the years in question, that the “projections used were the same that we presented to Helge Homan and Jens in March”. It was common ground that the “projections used” referred to projections used by LMS. The first sentence of the e-mail referred to the “numbers used by LMS”. The statement in the second sentence as to the “projections used” is equally to be read by reference to what LMS had used. In context, any reasonable representee would understand that he was being told that these were the projections which had been provided to LMS by Updata UK’s management (just as they had been provided to Mr. Homann and Mr. Nielsen) and that these were the projections which had been used, in the sense of being considered or evaluated, by LMS in deciding upon their offer. In my view, this is the objective interpretation of what was said in the second sentence.

181.

Paragraph 48 (7) pleads a representation that the UK management were not aware of the basis upon which LMS had calculated the value of Updata UK. The Claimants sought to derive this representation from the final sentence of the e-mail, although by the end of the trial the Claimants’ case as to the meaning of the final sentence had moved significantly away from the pleaded case. I do not consider that Mr. Bennett’s statement, in context, was addressing the way in which LMS had calculated their offer. It was addressing a different point, arising from the LMS offer letter and Mr. Johnsen’s question.

182.

LMS’s offer letter (whose terms are important to the arguments as to the interpretation of Mr. Bennett’s e-mail which the Defendants advanced) stated:

“From this information we know that YTD February 2009 results are behind plan due to delays on installations and lower than budgeted margins: Sales £6.0 million (budget £8.6 million) and EBITDA £0.8 million (budget £1.3 million). The actual run rate results of the company (12 months to 28th Feb 2009) are as follows: Sales £8.4 million, EBITA £1.5 million and EBIT £0.85 million. In other words, significant progress is still required to achieve budget results for June 2009. However, despite this shortfall, the Company is showing good growth compared to 2008.

In addition, our analysis shows several creditors have gone unpaid (including VAT!) and the true indebtedness of the Company is around £1.4 million. The resulting enterprise value of Updata UK (using an exchange rate of 8.5 DKK/GBP) is £9.1 million.

Therefore our Offer reflects the following valuation multiples:

EBITDA £1.50 million = 6.1x

EBIT £0.85 million = 10.7x

We have taken these factors and the resulting high entry price multiples into account in formulating our Offer. We believe that under LMS ownership, a well financed Updata UK, freed from its current constraints, has good prospects for profitable growth.”

183.

I think that it is likely that Mr. Johnsen was thinking that LMS might have made some adjustments to the budgeted figures which they had been given; because they referred to the YTD February 2009 results being behind plan due to delays on installations and lower than budgeted margins. Mr. Johnsen was therefore enquiring as to what adjustments had been made. In the final sentence, Mr. Bennett was replying to indicate that he did not know what adjustments LMS had made internally. I do not consider that this exchange can be read as being a representation as to the way in which LMS had calculated their offer. However, to my mind, the final sentence of the e-mail serves to reinforce my conclusion as to the meaning of the second sentence (see paragraph 180 above); i.e. that Mr. Bennett was referring to the projections which had been provided to LMS by Updata UK’s management and that these were the projections which had been used, in the sense of being considered or evaluated, by LMS in deciding upon their offer. This is because the reference to “adjustments” only makes sense if they are adjustments to figures which have been given to LMS. Mr. Bennett was therefore indicating that LMS might have made some adjustments to the figures which had been given by the UK management, but he did not know what they were.

184.

Paragraph 48 (8) is a representation which clearly cannot be derived from the 20 April e-mail. It is dependent upon the events leading to, and statements made in, the 3 June e-mail, as Mr. Booth acknowledged in closing submissions. Similarly, paragraph 48 (9) clearly cannot be derived from the 20 April e-mail.

185.

Accordingly, I conclude that the representations which are material to the case advanced by the Claimants, and which can properly be derived from the 20 April email are as follows:

a)

That the figures in the Financial Overview represented the UK management’s genuine (and current) forecast of Updata UK’s financial position.

b)

That the UK management believed that facts existed which reasonably justified the figures included in the Financial Overview.

c)

That the projections in the Financial Overview were those which had been provided to LMS by Updata UK’s management (just as they had been provided to Mr. Homann and Mr. Nielsen) and that these were the projections which had been used, in the sense of being considered or evaluated, by LMS in deciding upon their offer.

The Defendants’ arguments in greater detail

186.

The Defendants advanced a number of arguments directed at the proposition that the representations relied upon by the Claimants could not be derived from the 20 April email. I accept, as is apparent from the above discussion, that many of the representations pleaded in paragraph 48 of the pleading cannot be derived from the 20 April e-mail alone. However, I now address in more detail the Defendants’ arguments as to why the three representations cannot be so derived. I start with what I consider to be the most important representation, namely that set out in paragraph 48 (2): that the figures in the Financial Overview represented the UK management’s genuine (and current) forecast of Updata UK’s financial position. In that regard, the Defendants’ argument had a number of themes.

187.

First, Mr. Choo Choy emphasised that the context of Mr. Johnsen’s request for information was the LMS offer. Mr. Johnsen accepted in cross-examination that it was the LMS offer letter which had prompted his e-mail. (This is a point which is relevant to inducement, as I shall describe below: see Section G). The substance of Mr. Choo Choy’s argument was that Mr. Bennett’s response was simply addressing the derivation of the figures in the passage from the LMS offer letter. Thus, the first sentence referred expressly to the “numbers used by LMS”. The second sentence, referring to the “projections” used, was only a reference to the column in the Profit and Loss Account headed “Budget 2009”, which identified that the Budget for 2009 was £ 1,695,000. The LMS letter referred to progress being required to “achieve budget results for June 2009”, and this was the only projection to which Mr. Bennett was referring. The logic of this submission, from which Mr. Choo Choy did not shrink, is that Mr. Bennett was declining to respond to Mr. Johnsen’s request for the “latest budget for Updata UK for 2008/9, 2009/10 and 2010/11”, and was providing no information at all in response to that request.

188.

I have no hesitation in rejecting this argument. The Financial Overview provided by Mr. Bennett contained not simply the budget figure for 2008/9, but also a “forecast” for that year, and “budget” figures (which were obviously forecasts) for 2009/2010 on a best, middle and worst case basis. Any reasonable reader would understand that Mr. Bennett was indeed responding to the request for the latest budgets, albeit that he did not provide a figure for 2010/2011. In that regard, the conclusion that would naturally be drawn, and which Mr. Johnsen said that he drew, was that Mr. Bennett was responding with the figures that he had, and that the omission of 2010/2011 indicated that he did not have figures for that year. The reference in the e-mail to the

“projections” obviously refers, in my judgment, to the forecast for 2008/9 and the forecasts for the following year which were provided. The word “projections” might possibly be said to encompass the figure for the 2008/9 “Budget”, although given that the forecast (£ 1,496,000) was substantially behind budget (£ 1,695,000), the “budget” figure in that context would be understood to have been an earlier projection rather than the “latest” figures which were what Mr. Johnsen was asking for. On any view, however, the reference to “projections” in the e-mail was not confined to the earlier budget figure for 2008/9. Had Mr. Bennett’s intention been simply to convey information as to that earlier budget, then there was no reason to send the Financial Overview in that form, containing other forecasts.

189.

Had Mr. Bennett simply sent the Financial Overview in response to Mr. Johnsen’s email, with the various figures there set out, there could be no doubt that he would have been responding to Mr. Johnsen’s request for the latest budget (i.e. forecasts) for those years. There is nothing at all in the words of his 20 April e-mail which suggest that he was not doing so. On the contrary, he was indicating that the attachments were the figures which LMS had used in the context of an offer which had been made only

a few days earlier, and they were the same as figures given previously to Mr. Homan and Mr. Nielsen.

190.

Mr. Choo Choy’s argument in the present context focused heavily on the word “used” (i.e. the projections used by LMS), when read in conjunction with the relevant section of the LMS offer letter. There was, however, an obvious difficulty (as Mr. Choo Choy’s submissions accepted) in identifying any projections “used” in the LMS offer letter itself. The explanation of the offer contained in the relevant part of the LMS letter was not based upon projections at all. Rather, LMS were referring to historic results. They referred to the “YTD February 2009 results”: this was a reference to Updata Europe’s financial year to date, namely the 8 months from July 2008 to February 2009. LMS also referred to the “actual run rate results of the company (12 months to 28th Feb 2009)”: this was a reference to the results from 1 March 2008 to 28 February 2009. Therefore the offer letter did not “use” any forward projections, in the sense of basing the offer on forward projections. The letter did refer to the 2009 budget in the sentence: “significant progress is still required to achieve budget results for June 2009”. But I agree with the Claimants that it is an extraordinary interpretation of the 20 April e-mail to treat the reference to the “projections used” as being a cross-reference to this particular reference to the 2009 budget in the LMS letter, whilst ignoring everything else in the Financial Overview. I do not consider that this is how any reasonable reader would understand the e-mail and specifically the reference to “projections used”. In context, and as already explained above, I consider that this would have been understood to be a statement that the projections in the Financial Overview had been given to LMS and used, in the sense of being considered or evaluated, by LMS in deciding upon their offer.

191.

There is a further point which is significant in the present context. As further discussed below, the Defendants argued – both in their written opening and written closing – that the reference to the “projections used” was indeed a reference to one of the projections contained in the Financial Overview; namely the figure of £ 1,496 million which was set out as the “Forecast 2009”. Their argument was that this was the same “projection” that had been used in the LMS offer letter. As described below, it was only after this argument was revealed to be a bad point that the Defendants sought to suggest that the “projections” could only have been a reference to the budget referred to in the LMS offer letter.

192.

Once it is accepted (as I do accept) that the 20 April e-mail was referring to all of the projections in the Financial Overview, the Defendants then needed to meet the Claimants’ argument that (see Clerk & Lindsell paragraph 8-13) the forecasts given represented the views which UK management held at that time. The Defendants argued, in substance: that forecasting was uncertain; that any forecasts necessarily involved the use of assumptions; that Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann had previously been given not simply the Financial Overview, but also the assumptions upon which it was based; and that nothing could be read into the statements about “best”, “middle” and “worst” cases in the Financial Overview beyond the proposition that these were forecasts based on certain specific assumptions.

193.

Again, I have no hesitation in rejecting this argument. I did not think that any of the reasons given by Mr. Choo Choy in the course of his submissions provided any reason for rejecting what I would regard as the obvious conclusion that, by putting forward the projections in the Financial Overview, there was a representation that

these were the management’s genuine and current forecast. Any forecast or projection in a business context will of course be based upon assumptions. But that does not negate the representation relied upon as to the genuineness of the forecast given at the time at which it was given.

194.

It was also argued that the concepts of “Best case”, “Middle case” and “Worst case” are too uncertain to be ascribed any meaning, at least beyond a representation that certain assumptions have been made. I disagree. I have already referred to the evidence of Mr. Hooft and Mr. Bennett in relation to these concepts: see Section B above. I agree with the Claimants that a “best” case would ordinarily be understood to be the realistic “best case”, and a worst case understood to be the realistic “worst case”. If a range from “worst” to “best” is provided, the reasonable reader would understand that the range encompasses all the reasonable assumptions that could be made at either end of the scale. The “middle” case would be understood as indicating the management’s expectation as to where, on that scale, the results were considered to be most likely to land.

195.

Accordingly, there is nothing in the Defendants’ submissions which persuades me that the paragraph 48 (2) representation should be rejected. I next turn to the representation, based upon paragraph 48 (1), that UK management believed that facts existed which reasonably justified the figures included in the Financial Overview. I should note that in view of my findings below that there was a fraudulent misrepresentation as to the opinions held by the UK management, the paragraph 48 (1) representation is not crucial in this case. Such representations are likely to be more important in cases where the Claimants are unable to prove that opinions put forward were not genuinely held. Nevertheless, apart from the criticism that paragraph 48 (1), with its reference to the figures being “correct”, was too broadly pleaded, it did not seem to me that the Defendants had any real answer to the substance of the representation relied upon. Their principal argument was that such a representation, with its reference to “reasonable basis for believing”, was in practice an allegation of negligence, and that such a case was not permissible in view of the decision of Sir Richard Field to strike out negligence claims. I disagree. As Clerk & Lindsell makes clear, there can in principle be a fraudulent representation by a person expressing an opinion who thereby impliedly states that he believes that facts exist which reasonably justify it. If “he does not actually believe in such facts, it follows that he will be liable in deceit”.

196.

The third representation, which was in my view made, concerned the provision of the Financial Overview to LMS. The Defendants’ arguments in that regard were based on the narrow interpretation which they sought to ascribe to the word “used” in “the projections used”. I have already rejected that argument for the reasons set out above.

197.

The parties’ closing submissions addressed in some detail the statement in the first sentence of the 20 April e-mail: “The numbers used by LMS were taken from the February Management Accounts”. It is not necessary to discuss in detail whether this was a misrepresentation, because – as the Defendants rightly pointed out including in brief submissions made in writing subsequent to closing – the various representations pleaded in paragraph 48 did not include an allegation of misrepresentation in relation to this first sentence, and indeed did not appear to be based upon it. It seems to me that the parties’ arguments as to the first sentence are therefore relevant only to the credibility of Mr. Bennett (and the other Defendants in so far as they may have known

and approved what Mr. Bennett was saying). I shall therefore deal with this point briefly, not least because there are in my view other more significant points concerning the Defendants’ credibility. In my view, it was incorrect for Mr. Bennett to state that the “numbers used by LMS were taken from the February Management Accounts”.

198.

The material part of the LMS offer letter referred to two sets of numbers. The first was the result for the year to date (i.e. commencing on 1 July 2008) as at February 2009. The numbers which LMS used (sales £ 6 million against budget of £ 8.6 million and EBITDA of £ 0.8 million against budget of £ 1.3 million) were in fact taken from the Tenon Data Pack. The relevant figures, which LMS rounded, appear on page 5, which is headed: “Management expect to exceed budget for FY09 by £ 0.8m with volatile pipeline reversing YTD trend”. It is true to say that the figures for sales of £ 6 million, and EBITDA of £ 0.8 million against budget of £ 1.3 million, can be seen or derived from the information in the pages of the management accounts which Mr. Bennett sent Mr. Johnsen. But the figure of £ 8.6 million was not contained in those numbers (the equivalent figure was £ 8.1 million), and perhaps more importantly there is no documentary or other evidence that LMS were ever given the management accounts sent to Mr. Johnsen.

199.

The second set of numbers, referred to by LMS, were for the “actual run rate results of the company (12 months to 28th February 2009)”. These were: Sales £ 8.4 million, EBITDA £ 1.5 million and EBIT £ 0.85 million. These figures were again taken from the Tenon Data Pack, page 4: in a slide headed “Strong historical growth has resulted in increased recurring rental income with future growth visible through a strong pipeline”. None of these figures can be seen in the management accounts sent to Mr. Johnsen, although he did not look sufficiently closely at the management accounts to appreciate the point at the time. There are two further matters to note in the present context.

200.

First, the page of the Data Pack which contained the LTM (last 12 months) numbers used by LMS also included the statement, in a box, that: “Based on run rate Performance and known installations, management expect to outperform FY09 Budget”. The box referred to a budget for the FY 2009 of £ 1,717,000 and “outturn” of £ 2,479,000. This is relevant to the allegation of falsity which I will address shortly.

201.

Secondly, the figure of £ 1.5 million EBITDA, based on the actual run rate of the company for the last 12 months, was a significant figure in the LMS offer letter. The letter used that EBITDA figure in explaining that the offer reflected a multiple of 6.1 x £ 1.5 million. The Defendants’ written closing submissions sought to correlate the figure of £ 1.5 million in the LMS offer letter with the forecast of £ 1.496 million for 2009 which was contained in the Financial Overview. In that written closing, the Defendants submitted as follows in paragraph 42.6:

“The second sentence stated that “The projections used were the same that we presented to Helge Homan and Jens in March.” Again, the “projections used” can only have meant the projections used in the LMS offer letter. Those were projections for FY09, as Mr Johnsen accepted: [Day4/25/1724]. And the projections used in the LMS offer letter for FY09 were EBITDA of £1.5m, which was the same projection given to Mr Homann, Mr Nielsen (and indeed Tenon) on 23 March 2009 in the Financial Overview (and which ended up being

£0.3m higher than the actual year-end figure).”

202.

The Defendants had made a similar point in paragraph 71.1 of their written opening:

“The LMS offer was based on a multiple of FY09 (not FY10) forecast EBITDA. The FY09 EBITDA numbers LMS mentioned in their letter were the same (rounded up) as in the Financial Overview (of £1.496m), which he attached.”

203.

This particular argument did not withstand analysis, as Mr. Choo Choy recognised in his oral closing submissions. Whilst it is true that there was a similarity between the figures used in the LMS offer letter (£ 1.5 million), and the forecast for 2009 in the Financial Overview (£1.496 million), the two figures were calculated on a different basis. The £ 1.5 million in the LMS offer letter was not a projection at all, but was an historic figure looking at results to 28 February 2009. The figure of £ 1.496 million in the Financial Overview was a forecast for Updata UK’s financial year to the end of June 2009. It was only after this point had been exposed as a bad point that the Defendants sought to argue, in oral closing, that the “projections used” in the 20 April e-mail referred not to the forecast in the Financial Overview for 2008/9, but rather to the budget.

204.

The parties’ submissions also addressed the final sentence of the e-mail, and I have already rejected the argument that this contained a representation as to the UK management’s knowledge of the basis on which LMS had calculated the value of Updata UK. The last sentence does, however, have some relevance to Mr. Bennett’s integrity and credibility, as discussed below.

Falsity

205.

I again have no hesitation in saying that each of the representations made were false.

206.

First, the figures in the Financial Overview did not represent the UK management’s current forecast of Updata UK’s financial position. Their current forecasts (to use the pleaded words, which I consider to be synonymous with the “latest” budgets which Mr. Johnsen had requested) were those contained in the Tenon Memorandum and the Data Pack.

a)

As far as 2008/9 is concerned, the forecast in the Financial Overview was £ 1.496 million. The equivalent figure in the Tenon Memorandum was nearly £ 200,000 higher at £ 1.694 million. The Data Pack contained a higher figure of £ 2.479 million accompanied by statements that the management expected to outperform the budgeted figure of £ 1.717 million and explanations as to why that expectation was held.

b)

As far as 2009/10 is concerned, the current forecast was a figure which could be rounded up to £ 6.071 million (Tenon Memorandum) or rounded down £ 6.070 million (Data Pack). This was based upon the

March Weighted Budget: see Section B above. It was many millions of

pounds higher than the figures given in the Financial Overview for the management’s “middle” case (£ 1.393 million) and “best” case (£ 3.348 million).

207.

Secondly, the figures in the Financial Overview did not represent the UK management’s genuine forecast of Updata UK’s financial position, at the time that it was given to Mr. Johnsen. By that time, Updata UK’s management, in particular Mr. Mantell, had taken a very careful look at the figures in order to decide what numbers could properly be given to prospective investors in order to persuade them to offer to purchase the business. The March Weighted budget, which had been preceded by a number of iterations and eventually gave the figures seen in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack, did contain the figures in which the management believed and which represented their genuine forecasts at that time. (In the following Section E, I describe in more detail the process which led to the March Weighted Budget). That was why those figures were given to a large number of potential investors in the market. In so far as the Defendants gave evidence that they did not believe in the figures which were given to the market via the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack, I regard that evidence as unreliable and reject it. (I deal in more detail below, in Section F, with my assessment of the evidence given by the Defendants). It involves the proposition that Mr. Johnsen was the only party to whom the Defendants gave their genuine opinion as to the prospects for Updata UK, and that neither Tenon nor the other market participants were given the management team’s genuine opinion. This is in my view the converse of the factual position.

208.

I note in this context that the much higher figures (i.e. higher than the Financial Overview) contained in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack were not an aberration, but are consistent with figures which can be seen in various documents produced in the course of the following months in 2009. These included:

a)

A document entitled “Gross Profit Breakdown v7” prepared by Mr. Mantell on 17 June 2009 for the purposes of meetings with LMS on around that date. This showed EBITDA of £ 5.55 million based only on contracts which were regarded as “in the bag”; i.e. without weighting for those contracts which did not merit this characterisation.

b)

A budget e-mailed by Mr. Mantell to Tenon on 3 July 2009, again based on “in the bag” contracts. This showed EBITDA of £ 6.2 million.

c)

Documents e-mailed by Mr. Mantell to Nathalie Simpson of Tenon on 9 July 2009, and which contain similar figures for EBITDA: £ 5.5 million for “in the bag” contracts, and £ 6.2 million if commissions are excluded.

209.

Perhaps the most striking such document is the Tenon Due Diligence report. This was dated 10 July 2009, and was prepared by Tenon as part of LMS’s due diligence after

LMS had been granted exclusivity. It contains various figures whose source was “Management and management analysis, statutory accounts”. This included figures for 2008/9: £ 2.103 million (normalized) and £ 3.089 million (run rate). The figure for 2009/10 was £ 7.46 million on a weighted basis. Most significantly, this Tenon Due Diligence report was one of the “Reports” in relation to which the Defendants gave warranties to LMS in a “Subscription and Shareholders’ Agreement” dated 11 July 2009 in the following terms:

REPORTS AND INFORMATION

1.1 Each of the Warrantors has read and considered the Reports and

1.1.1

none of the Warrantors materially disagrees with any opinions or expectations expressed in the Reports or considers any such opinion or expectation to be unreasonable or not based on all relevant assumptions;

1.1.2

so far as the Warrantors are aware, the factual information contained in each of the Reports is materially true and accurate; and

1.1.3

so far as the Warrantors are aware, there is no other matter, fact or circumstance which renders any of the factual information or the opinions and expectations in any of the Reports materially misleading.

1.2 All factual information which has been given by or on behalf of the Managers to the Investor or to the solicitors, accountants, consultants, advisors or agents of the Investor in the course of the negotiations leading to this agreement, as set out in the Disclosure Letter and the SPA Disclosure Letter was when given and is at the date of this agreement materially true, accurate and not misleading.

210.

Accordingly, it is not the projections contained in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack which are an aberration, but rather those contained in the Financial Overview. Since the Defendants were prepared (as they were) to warrant the figures at around the level set out in the Tenon Due Diligence report, the only reasonable conclusion is that such figures (and not the much lower figures in the Financial Overview) represented their genuine views as to the forecast results of Updata UK at the time of sale.

211.

Third, since the figures in the Financial Overview did not represent the UK management’s genuine and current forecast of Updata UK’s financial position, it necessarily follows that the management did not, as at 20 April, believe that facts existed which reasonably justified the figures included in the Financial Overview. The falsity of this representation therefore does not materially add to the falsity of the representation previously discussed.

212.

Fourth, the projections in the Financial Overview had not been provided to LMS by Updata UK’s management. They had been provided to Tenon (as described in Section E) but there was no evidence that the Financial Overview or the projections contained therein had ever been provided to LMS. The figures which had gone to LMS, and indeed the rest of the market, were those contained in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack. The Financial Overview projections had therefore never been considered or evaluated by LMS.

Mr. Bennett’s state of mind

213.

There are two separate questions which arise when fraud is alleged: whether the representor intended to make representations in the terms alleged, and whether he made a false statement knowingly, without belief in the truth of the statement made or recklessly in the sense of not caring whether it was true or false. I am satisfied that the Claimants have proved their case in relation to both matters.

214.

Given the terms of the e-mail request, and Mr. Bennett’s response, it is obvious in my view that Mr. Bennett intended to make the representations to Mr. Johnsen. Those representations are, in my view the ordinary objective interpretation of the words used in the e-mail; i.e. the way in which the words would be understood by a reasonable recipient in Mr. Johnsen’s position. I have addressed and rejected the various different interpretations of the words used which have been advanced in the course of argument on behalf of the Defendants. I do not believe that any of those different interpretations would have occurred to Mr. Bennett at the time. It is certainly possible, at least in theory, for a person to make a written representation without intending the representation to be understood in the manner in which the words would be ordinarily be interpreted. However, the court would then need to be persuaded by credible evidence that the representor did understand the words used in a different sense. There was in my view no such evidence in this case, and indeed the thrust of Mr. Bennett’s evidence was not that he had some peculiar interpretation of the words which he was using in his 20 April e-mail, but rather that he genuinely believed in the figures being put forward; or at least genuinely believed in the “best case” figures (because he accepted that the “middle case” figures were particularly pessimistic). I deal with this issue below. But as far as intention to represent is concerned, I have no doubt that Mr. Bennett did intend Mr. Johnsen to understand that the figures provided in the Financial Overview were the management’s current figures, and that these were the figures which had been given to LMS and used by them in considering what offer to make. If a senior executive such as Mr. Bennett gives a set of figures to the founder of the business, and a representative of the majority shareholder, he will also know that the figures would be understood to represent the management’s genuine views and that there was a proper basis for those figures.

215.

Mr. Bennett’s evidence was that he sent his e-mail response without giving it “that much thought. I’ve got a three-line e-mail. I gave a three-line e-mail back. I – you know, it wasn’t something I sat and -- sat and agitated over”. I do not accept this evidence. The e-mail from Mr. Johnsen was clearly an important request for information, coming as it did only a few working days after the LMS offer and at a time when Mr. Johnsen was known by Mr. Bennett to be seeking outside investment. It was also unusual, in that the documents referred to at trial did not indicate that Mr. Johnsen was regularly making requests for documentation. Mr. Bennett gave careful thought to how he should respond, because he took the trouble to obtain the management accounts and then to remove certain pages from them.

216.

I also have no doubt that Mr. Bennett knew that he was making deliberately false statements to Mr. Johnsen. The reason that he wanted to do this was straightforward. He wanted the LMS bid to succeed, because he perceived this to be in the best interests of himself and the other members of the Updata UK management team. His hope, and the hope of LMS, had been for a sale to be effected at around the level of what they understood to be Updata Europe’s debt. It was in fact Mr. Bennett who had drafted the relevant section of the Tenon Memorandum which described the “opportunity” by reference to the debt, and the possibility of acquiring the company for less than the par value of that debt. He knew that LMS had put forward an offer which reflected a valuation multiple of 6.1 applied to EBITDA of £ 1.5 million. There had been disappointment on the very morning of 20 April when Mr. Holm’s letter had come in, and the strategy developed that morning was to make contact with the Bank’s lawyers in the hope that the Bank would see the full benefits of the offer made which would result in substantial repayment to the Bank. I have no doubt that Mr. Bennett did not want to reveal to Mr. Johnsen the very much more positive outlook (compared to the Financial Overview), both for the current year and for 2009/10. To do so would have potentially very undesirable consequences for the success of the LMS bid. If the management’s expectation of EBITDA for 2009/10 of £ 6.070 million were revealed, it would naturally indicate that the price offered by LMS as set out in the LMS letter was an undervalue. That offer reflected an EBITDA of only £ 1.5 million. In addition, the better the expected results, the more likely it would be that the company would attract other investors and higher offers, including from Mr. Nielsen whom was regarded by the Defendants as a most undesirable purchaser. Mr. Bennett knew that Mr. Johnsen was coming to the UK in order to try to raise additional investment, as contemplated by the “Project Eagle” proposal on which Mr. Bennett had commented (and rejected) on the morning of 20 April. Mr. Bennett wanted to do nothing which would encourage a successful result to Mr. Johnsen’s efforts. (I return to the evidence relating to the Defendants’ motive in Section F below).

217.

In addition, if Updata Europe were given to understand that the budget for the current financial year (which ended around 6 weeks after the 20 April e-mail) would likely be outperformed, and that the forecast EBITDA for the following year would be in the region of £ 6 million, this might have impacted on Updata Europe’s willingness or need to sell at all; since it would raise the possibility that Updata UK would be sufficiently cash-generative in the near future to enable dividends to be paid and thereby monies repaid to the Bank. The issue of whether Updata UK could or should pay a dividend had been an issue considered in the period prior to the 20 April e-mail, with the Defendants strongly opposed to such payment. Mr. Bennett would have been aware of this potential impact of a good set of forecasts at the time that he sent the 20 April e-mail. Indeed, on 29 April 2009 he sent an e-mail to Mr. Kidson, referring to a statement in Updata Europe’s accounts about a dividend payment from Updata UK, and expressing the view that non-payment of the dividend might mean that the Bank “deem this a breach and call in its security”. The e-mail as a whole reflects Mr. Bennett’s desire that the Bank should make life difficult for Updata Europe. He noted that if a dividend was declared, Updata UK would no longer be a going concern, and

“I doubt very much that Spar Lolland would be delighted to see its primary asset declared as “not a going concern”. I wonder if that may help them take action.” Mr. Castledine’s response on 1 May referred to the need to “tread carefully but we are all aware of the good news to come”; a reference to the very positive expected performance of Updata UK.

218.

It would have been very easy indeed for Mr. Bennett to give a straightforward and honest answer to Mr. Johnsen’s request for the latest budget. The figures were readily available, since they had been prepared by Updata UK’s management (in particular Mr. Mantell) and had been given to Tenon and used in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack. So there was no difficulty in Mr. Bennett identifying what the figures were. But he decided to give the different figures set out in the Financial Overview. He knew that the management’s current expectation was for much higher figures, both for 2008/9 and 2009/10. He knew that the management expected the results for 2009/10 to exceed by some considerable margin all of the figures shown in the Financial Overview for that year. He knew that the “middle case” was a very long way from the management’s forecasted results. Indeed, he accepted in evidence that the “middle case” figures were “extraordinarily pessimistic”, whilst maintaining that at the time that he sent the Financial Overview he was not actually aware of the assumptions on which those figures were based. He had in my view no reason at all to think that LMS had been given the Financial Overview, since he knew that the figures given to all potential investors were much higher. I consider that the response which Mr. Bennett gave was dishonest, in the sense in which dishonesty is required for the purposes of a claim in deceit.

219.

A great deal of the Defendants’ argument in this case has depended upon the proposition that the figures which management had given to Tenon were not the figures of Updata UK (the company) but were personal to the management because they had been prepared for the purposes of Tenon’s work and hence for the MBO. Hence, it was submitted that there was a valid rationale for not providing the latest figures which had been given to Tenon, and that there can have been no dishonesty on the part of Mr. Bennett or the other Defendants. I reject this argument. I do not consider that this rationale occurred to Mr. Bennett at the time. He was asked:

Q. Right. So just so I can be clear about this, are you saying that it was specifically in your mind at the time you were replying to Mr Johnsen that you couldn’t give him a budget because the latest budget was a budget that belonged to you and the management team and did not belong to the company?

A. That wasn’t in my mind. The only thing in my mind was about giving budget, it was to try and answer the question.

220.

Mr. Baldorino was also asked whether, as at 20 April 2009, the thought had “already crystallised within your head and within the heads of your colleagues, namely that you weren’t going to give the weighted budget because it was your document”. He said that he could not recall whether this is what he was thinking at that stage. There is no contemporaneous evidence which suggests that he was. Indeed, his evidence was that he knew nothing about Mr. Bennett’s exchange on 20 April, and Mr. Bennett’s response was not discussed with him.

221.

I address this line of argument in more detail in Section F. However, even if (which I do not accept) there had been some belief at that stage that the figures given to Tenon were the management’s figures and therefore did not have to be disclosed, it was still necessary for Mr. Bennett to give an answer to the questions which Mr. Johnsen had raised, and to do so honestly. I accept the Claimants’ submission that Mr. Johnsen’s request for the latest budget presented Mr. Bennett with a choice. He could provide the latest budget figures, which were those which had been given to Tenon. He could provide something else (as he did), but with an explanation that there was a budget prepared for the MBO that was not being provided, and explaining his position in that regard. Or he could provide something else without any explanation that information was being withheld. The first option risked derailing the MBO, since it would cast doubt on the price which LMS was offering to pay, would potentially assist Mr. Johnsen in raising alternative investment, and potentially have the other impacts described above. The second option risked the latest figures, including the March Weighted Budget, being flushed out by direct requests for its disclosure. Indeed, it is difficult to see how the management could realistically have maintained a position that they were not prepared to provide the latest budgets to the board of Updata UK (where the Danish representatives were in the majority) or to the majority shareholder. Ultimately, the board could have insisted that the management should provide up-to-date figures. The last option involved lying to Mr. Johnsen but improving the prospects of the MBO succeeding. This is the option that Mr. Bennett chose.

222.

It will be apparent from the foregoing, and from my introductory comments in Section A, that I do not consider that Mr. Bennett was a witness upon whose evidence I could place any reliance, certainly unless corroborated by contemporary documentation or other independent evidence or unless clearly consistent with the inherent probabilities. I formed the same opinion as to the evidence of Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell. I expand upon my reasons for this reaching this conclusion in Section F below.

Express oral representation

223. Paragraph 40 of the Re-amended Particulars of Claim alleges that at around the time of the 20 April e-mail, both Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino warned Mr. Johnsen orally that Updata UK was failing to make significant sales and would not meet the 2009 budget. Neither the Claimants’ opening or closing contained any reference to any evidence from Mr. Johnsen on this point, and Mr. Bennett could not recall saying this. Mr. Baldorino denied saying this. I do not think that the evidence as to this representation is sufficiently strong to enable me to come to any conclusion, on the balance of probabilities, as to what was said. It seems to me that, in any event, the oral representation adds nothing to the representation made by virtue of the Financial

Overview. This showed, contrary to the Defendants’ actual expectation, that Updata UK’s results would indeed fail to reach its budgeted results for the 2008/9.

Intention to induce and Inducement

224.

The Defendants have called into question whether there was any intention on the part of Mr. Bennett, or the Defendants, to induce the EVs to act in any relevant way. This issue is best addressed after considering the evidence relating to the 3 June e-mail, and I address it in Section E below,

225.

The Claimants contended that representations in the 20 April e-mail were an inducing cause of Updata Europe’s decision ultimately to enter into the contract on the terms that they did, and relied upon the presumption of inducement. The Defendants contended that this was not the case, and that they had successfully rebutted the presumption of inducement by showing that the 20 April e-mail was not a real and substantial inducing cause. It is again appropriate to address this issue after considering the developments following 20 April, and in conjunction with figures in the Updated Kelso Presentation which were provided on 3 June, not least because the Defendants’ argument drew heavily upon those events as negating inducement (Section G below). There are also issues as to whether Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell, who were not copied into the e-mail exchange on 20 April, can be held liable for Mr. Bennett’s deceit. I deal with this issue in Section F, in the context of my further consideration of the Defendants’ evidence.

E: The 3 June e-mail

226.

In order to understand the shape of the arguments in relation to the 3 June e-mail – in particular as to the nature of the representations made, their alleged falsity, and the Defendants’ state of mind – it is necessary to explain in more detail two areas of factual background.

227.

The first area relates to the Tenon Memorandum and the interaction of the management team with Tenon which led to that Memorandum. This is important for a number of reasons, including the description in the 3 June e-mail of the dealings with Tenon, which were in the following terms:

“The information we provided to Tenon began with the PowerPoint presentation attached, which was followed by a number of meetings in which they asked specific questions which we answered. From the information supplied they wrote an investment memorandum. ”

228.

This is also of importance because of the Defendants’ case that there was no fraudulent intent because they genuinely believed that the March Weighted Budget was a document which was proprietary to the management team, and therefore did not have to be disclosed to Updata Europe. To some extent this point was advanced in the context of the 20 April e-mail. But there was no positive evidence from the Defendants that, in the context of the 20 April e-mail, this point was something which motivated the response: see Section D above. However the case that the March Weighted Budget was proprietary to the Defendants featured significantly in the evidence which was given in relation to the 3 June e-mail and indeed generally. Indeed, in his oral evidence, Mr. Mantell went even further, suggesting that the Weighted Budget contained “Tenon’s numbers”. Thus, when asked about the figures which were included in the Tenon Memorandum, there was the following exchange with Mr. Mantell:

“No, I helped provide the figures to – to Tenon, but these were Tenon’s – Tenon’s numbers. They were – Tenon were employed by – by the four of us to create an IM for the business and that’s what they did. You’re making it sound like I

– I created it and did it and that’s – that’s only partly true.”

229.

The second area relates to the background to the 3 June e-mail itself, because of the importance of reading it in the context of the issues which it was addressing, and what the parties had been discussing.

E1: The preparation of the Weighted Budget and the information provided to Tenon and LMS.

230.

The provision of figures by the management team to Tenon appears to have started by the time of the meeting between Mr. Bennett and Tenon on 25 February 2009. Mr. Bennett’s e-mail sent prior to that meeting indicated that he hoped to provide some “accurate forecasts for Lee [Castledine] and his team”. It is not clear what figures were actually provided, but this is not material. What is clear, as Mr. Mantell accepted in evidence, is that the “provision of financial information and answer of information by Tenon had already started by 16 March [2009].” On that day, Mr. Castledine of Tenon e-mailed Mr. Bennett setting out his “analysis of revenue and cash flows by project based on the budget pack”. The attachment to the e-mail showed that Tenon were working on a weighted case for sales of £ 16.24 million, and EBITDA of £ 3.799 million.

231.

Tenon were formally engaged on 18 March 2009. Their terms of engagement included the following:

Scope of work

Our role in the initial phase of this project will be to prepare the necessary information and evaluate the financial information in order to approach potential purchasers and consider a refinancing of the bank debt. Potentially (depending on progress with your discussions with Sparekassen Lolland) this role may extend to the structuring of a transaction.

Our role will be as follows:-

1.

Prepare an information Memorandum with which to approach potential acquirers.

2.

Research, identify and approach potential equity purchasers

3.

Attend meetings with management and prepare any relevant information required by potential purchasers

4.

Identify and approach potential funding banks for a refinancing exercise

5.

Undertake a review of the financial information

6.

Negotiate terms with potential debt and equity providers and approach Sparekassen Lolland on agreeing a transaction.”

232.

The terms of engagement therefore contemplate that Tenon’s role would include the evaluation of the financial information to be provided by the management, and reviewing it, rather than preparing it in the first instance. This is hardly surprising: it

is the management who know the business, with Tenon being financial advisers who have played no previous part in that business. One therefore would expect that it would be the management which would provide the financial information and that it would be considered by Tenon, who would no doubt wish to be comfortable with the management figures which were going to the market in whatever documentation Tenon produced. In due course, it seems to me that this is what happened, as I shall describe. Ultimately, in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack, figures were put forward as reflecting the management’s expectation. Clause 3.1 of Tenon’s terms and conditions indicated that the management remained responsible for the financial information which they provided:

“You accept that any model or related documentation supplied by us as part of the provision of Services (“Model”) is prepared by us, wholly or in part, in reliance on the assumptions and other information provided by you. You accept and agree that any such Model and its related output do not to any extent substitute for the exercise of professional and business judgment on your part and that of your employees”.

233.

On 17 and 18 March 2009, Mr. Bennett provided information for the purpose of the information memorandum (“IM”) which in due course became the Tenon Memorandum. He provided a body of text, including a section in which he summarised the “opportunity” as one to acquire Updata Europe’s shares for the level of the Bank debt, which, for reasons already given, required repayment of monies loaned by Vald Nielsen. He also provided a graphic showing Updata UK’s contracts for the purpose of the IM.

234.

Tenon were due to go to Updata UK’s offices on Monday 23 March 2009. Mr. Castledine e-mailed Mr. Bennett on Friday 20 March, copied to Mr. Baldorino. He said that he had spoken to Tony Nash, who worked for Lloyd’s Development Group, one of the prospective partners in the MBO.

“He asked for certain information in terms of financials which is something to pick up with Julian on Monday no doubt:

cash flow historically

- what is the management case projections – what do you think you will really do

p&l and cash flow projections

balance sheet analysis” (Emphasis supplied)

235.

At 3.56 pm on 23 March 2009 Mr. Helman of Tenon e-mailed Mr. Mantell to request a breakdown of some of the financial information that had been given to Tenon. He asked Mr. Mantell to give a breakdown of the “weighted prospects for 09/10 for each customer so I am able to illustrate where the £ 8.7m is coming from”. The figure of £ 8.7 million in weighted prospects for 2009/10 was taken from figures which were attached to the e-mail, and which were materially identical to those attached to Mr. Castledine’s e-mail of 16 March. So at that point, Tenon were working from “weighted” figures for FY10 of £ 16.24 million in turnover and £ 3.77 million in EBITDA. At 4.25pm Mr. Helman e-mailed Mr. Mantell to ask him for a summary of the 2005 – 2010 figures. He required “Revenue, Cost of Sales, Overheads and EBIT”. At 4.53pm Mr. Mantell replied attaching the “Financial Overview”. The “Best case” figure of £ 3.348 million set out in that document was about 10% lower than the EBITDA figure of £ 3.77 million which Tenon had used in their e-mails of 16 and 23 March.

236.

At 5.27pm Mr. Helman replied to Mr. Mantell attaching a table which he needed completing of the key financial information for 2005 – 2010 (which would form part of the Tenon Memorandum). The table, which had no figures included, had the following headings and proposed financial information:

Actual

Year

Ended 30

June 2005

Actual

Year

Ended 30

June 2006

Actual

Year

Ended 30

June 2007

Actual

Year

Ended 30

June 2008

Actual

Year

Ended 30

June 2009

Actual

Year

Ended 30

June 2010

Revenue

Expenses:

Cost of

Sales

Overheads

EBIT

EBIT %

237.

Thus, it is true to say that Tenon were provided with the figures in the Financial

Overview. Equally, however, it is clear that the figures for the 2009/10 year in that Financial Overview were not included in the Tenon Memorandum, or indeed any draft of the Tenon Memorandum. Instead, at around this time or very shortly afterwards, detailed work was beginning on what became the March Weighted Budget, in order to have up-to-date figures for 2009/10 for inclusion in the IM. Whilst the key historic figures in the Tenon Memorandum for the years ending June 2006, June 2007 and June 2008 are materially identical to those in the Financial Overview, the forecast for the years ended 30 June 2009 and 30 June 2010 were materially different. (By way of reminder: for 2009, the EBITDA was £ 1.694 million in the Tenon Memorandum as compared to £ 1.496 million in the Financial Overview. For 2010, the respective figures were £ 1.393 million (middle case) and £ 3.348 million (best case) compared to £ 6.071 million.)

238.

In cross-examination, Mr. Mantell eventually accepted (after an initial reluctance to do so), based on the documents that he was shown, that he knew at the time that

Tenon’s work on the figures did not start with the Financial Overview. He was right

to do so. He also agreed that it could “well have been” that the intention was to update the figures in the Financial Overview in order to populate the blank table that Tenon had provided. He agreed that it was therefore not simply a question of transposing the figures from the Financial Overview into the blank table. Indeed, I note that even after receiving the Financial Overview on 23 March, Mr. Helman e-mailed Mr. Mantell at 18.28 on 23 March 2009 saying that he would “require historical and forecast figures for IM as we discussed …”. Mr. Mantell also agreed “that whatever figures you are going to put in here are figures that you would regard as reasonably reliable”. He accepted that this was because he knew that “what Tenon wanted is what you really thought would happen”. Again, I consider that this must have been the case.

239.

In the following days, work was carried out on the March Weighted Budget. On 25 March 2009, at 8.50 pm, the “Budget 2009-2010 (weighted case) (v2)” was circulated to both Mr. Bennett and Tenon, under cover of an e-mail from Mr. Mantell. The EBITDA figure which could be calculated from the figures in the Profit and Loss account in that budget was £ 6.039 million (if based upon “Profit before exceptional items”) or marginally in excess of £ 6.070 million (if based upon “Profit before bank expenses”). The figure eventually included in the Tenon Memorandum was the latter figure, rounded up to £ 6.071 million.

240.

Earlier in that day, other figures had been produced. At 11.57am on that day, Mr. Mantell circulated a version of the budget which showed turnover of £ 22.2 million and EBITDA of just in excess of £ 8 million. At 13.49 he circulated a further version which showed the same figures. Then, Mr. Mantell received Mr. Baldorino’s detailed analysis of the pipeline, which listed and assigned probabilities to each contract (either 100%, 70%, 50%, 30% or 10%). He then created the March Weighted Budget, incorporating and using the substance of Mr. Baldorino’s contract information which had been provided that afternoon to both Mr. Mantell and Tenon.

241.

Upon receipt of the March Weighted Budget, Mr. Bennett e-mailed Mr. Castledine that evening (at 9.19 pm) to say that he could not open the attachment, but “sales are circa 19m, ebit £ 4.9m ebitda £ 6m which seems more like it”. He was therefore in my view endorsing the figures in the March Weighted Budget. His reference to “seems more like it” may have been a reference to the fact that the higher figures sent earlier that day were (as he said in evidence) not sustainable, or may have been referable to the lower figures which had been contained in the Financial Overview. But what is clear is that Mr. Bennett was comfortable with the reasonableness of the figures contained in the March Weighted Budget. Indeed, I consider that all members of the management team must have been comfortable with those figures, or they could not properly have allowed them to be presented to the market. On 8 April, Mr. Bennett responded to some points of detail made by one potential investor (Lloyd’s

Development Corporation), saying that: “In summary therefore I do not feel uncomfortable with the figures presented when viewed in their entirety”.

242.

There is no documentary evidence indicating that Tenon played any role in the production of the figures in the March Weighted Budget. The e-mail correspondence on 25 March does indicate that Mr. Castledine was, at lunchtime, heading to Updata’s offices in Reigate. No witness from Tenon gave evidence in support of the case that the March Weighted Budget was in substance a joint management/ Tenon document. On the afternoon of 25 March 2009, Mr. Castledine raised one particular point, saying that he would “await Julian’s figures to confirm”. This confirms that the figures being produced were regarded by Tenon as those of Mr. Mantell (i.e. “Julian’s figures”) rather than their own. Since Tenon were financial advisers, it is possible that Mr. Mantell may, as he carried out his work which culminated in the March Weighted

Budget, have raised some issues with Mr. Castledine, or bounced some ideas off him. However, I see no reason why this would necessarily have happened, given that the UK management knew the business and knew how to prepare budgets with appropriate weighting. But even if there were some interaction between Mr. Mantell and Tenon as Mr. Mantell carried out his work, it would not mean that the March Weighted Budget was in any sense a joint document, as opposed to a document prepared by management and which Tenon would evaluate and review. Indeed, when Mr. Mantell did circulate the March Weighted Budget, he did so under cover of an email sent to Mr. Bennett, and copied to Mr. Castledine and Mr. Helman, saying: “Please find enclosed draft numbers for your review”. This is consistent with the March Weighted Budget being a document prepared by Updata UK’s management, with Tenon having a review function. Mr. Mantell suggested that Tenon were at times sitting alongside him as he filled in the spreadsheets, but there is no documentary or other corroborative evidence to support this, and for reasons which appear in this judgment I do not consider Mr. Mantell to be a reliable witness.

243.

On the following morning (26 March) a number of meetings had been scheduled with some private equity houses: Epic, Endless, Octopus and Hamilton Bradshaw. The first meeting was due to start at 10.30 am. The Tenon Memorandum had obviously not been completed at this point, and Mr. Bennett and Mr. Mantell corresponded early that morning in relation to a Powerpoint presentation. Although Mr. Baldorino said that he couldn’t remember whether this Powerpoint had been used on a “roadshow”, I consider it likely that this was the document used in the discussions with the potential investors that morning. At 8.22 am, Mr. Bennett e-mailed the original Kelso Presentation to Mr. Mantell. At 8.30 am Mr. Mantell replied, using the subject-line: “Done again”. The final slide was headed “Financial Projections”. It had a column headed “Forecast 2010”, and the figures were revised by Mr. Mantell so as to reflect those contained in the March Weighted Budget which had been sent out on the previous night. The “Forecast 2010” was therefore EBITDA of £ 6.039 million based on turnover of £ 19.039 million and Net Profit of £ 4.981 million. In light of subsequent events and the 3 June e-mail, it is important to note that this figure was presented as the “Forecast”, not as the “Best Case”.

244.

It would appear that Tenon had no substantial issues with the March Weighted Budget which had been sent on the previous evening. There is no documentary record showing any review or comments received. It does appear, however, that there may have been some discussion between Mr. Mantell and Ms. Nathalie Simpson of Tenon on the morning of 27 March. At 10.14 am, Mr. Mantell sent her, copied to Mr. Bennett, a revised budget: “Budget 2009-2010 (weighted case) (v4) xlsx”. No changes were made to the relevant figures from which EBITDA is to be calculated.

Although it was a “weighted” budget, the projections were based primarily on contracts which had already been won, with only 6 contracts included on a weighted basis.

245.

In due course, it was the EBITDA figure of £ 6.071 million, and other material figures from the March Weighted Budget, which were incorporated into relevant part of the table in the Tenon Memorandum.

246.

The Claimants submitted, based upon these documents as explained in the oral evidence at trial, that the March Weighted Budget circulated at 8.50 pm on 25 March 2009: (i) was a company document based on company information; (ii) represented the Defendants’ genuine and accurate views of the prospects of the company; (iii) was not an “optimistic sales case”; (iv) was not a Tenon document; and (v) was not based on any particular purchaser coming in, or getting rid of Updata Europe. It seemed to me that all of these submissions were well-founded in the evidence.

247.

Company document. The March Weighted Budget was created using a pre-existing company spreadsheet. It was prepared by Updata UK’s head of finance, Mr. Mantell, during company time, on a company computer. It was based on company information, in respect of which the Defendants owed confidentiality obligations to the company, about company contracts, company expenses and company pipeline opportunities. It was based on information provided by company directors and employees. In particular, the information about the “in the bag” and “weighted” contracts (including their value and duration) was based on the pipeline circulated by Mr. Baldorino to management and then to Tenon on 25 March. Mr. Bennett accepted in evidence that this pipeline information was part of the company’s business and part of the information that it needed to run that business.

248.

Genuine views and not an optimistic sales case. I have no doubt that the March Weighted Budget did contain the management’s genuine view as to the results for 2009/10. It was a document which was carefully prepared because Tenon and the market needed to know what the management really thought; i.e. what they thought that they would “really do”. As Mr. Mantell agreed, whatever figures were going to be included in the blank table in the Tenon memorandum were figures that he would regard as reasonably reliable. It was put to Mr. Baldorino in cross-examination that, in relation to the figures in the Tenon Data Pack, the figures represented the realistic view of management. He agreed.

249.

In so far as the Defendants (particularly Mr. Mantell) sought to suggest that the figures were excessively optimistic, indefensibly high, or pie in the sky, I have no hesitation in rejecting that evidence. The figure of EBITDA in excess of £ 6 million was included in the revised Kelso Presentation Powerpoint prepared on the morning of 26 March as a “forecast”, and in my view represented the management’s view as to the most likely result for 2009/10; i.e. what they really thought. This is consistent with the fact that the figures which were in this region, or higher, were contained in other documents produced in the course of the summer, and those contained in the Tenon Due Diligence report were ultimately warranted by the Defendants: see Section D above.

250.

Not a Tenon document. As previously indicated, and for the reasons given, I do not accept that the March Weighted Budget was in any sense a Tenon document. There is nothing in the documents which indicates that Tenon considered this to be their document. Indeed, as discussed below, there came a time in early June when Tenon were asked what documents had to be provided to the Data Room. Their response was to say: all documents, other than the Tenon Memorandum itself. I reject Mr. Mantell’s evidence that the March Weighted Budget numbers were Tenon’s figures. I accept that Tenon were likely to have reviewed the figures provided, since that would be an important part of their role as a financial adviser. But there is no evidence that they changed anything. This is perhaps not surprising in view of the fact that the people

who really knew about the business were the management, not Tenon. The contemporaneous e-mails, described above, show Tenon asking management for the figures, not the other way round.

251.

Not based on a new owner. There was in my view nothing to indicate that the March Weighted Budget was prepared on the basis of changes which might be made by a hypothetical new owner. Mr. Baldorino agreed that his pipeline projections and percentages were based on the existing position. The Defendants did not identify any assumption or figures which were premised upon new ownership.

252.

The Claimants contend that one of the respects in which the representation made in the 3 June e-mail (“The factual data available to both Tenon at the time and LMS subsequently, does not differ …”) was false, at the time of that e-mail, because the March Weighted Budget was provided to Tenon, and was not in the Data Room. It was never deliberately put into the Data Room. But the Claimants also pointed out, correctly, that there were other documents which were supplied to Tenon or LMS in the period before that representation was made, and which also were never put into the Data Room. Mr. Baldorino’s pipeline document, circulated on the afternoon of 25 March, was one such document. In addition, on 13 May 2009, Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino met with LMS. Following that meeting, Mr. Mantell e-mailed Mr. Hooft on 15 May with information “as requested”. The documents attached to his e-mail contained breakdowns on turnover, installation and rental revenue and margins in respect of the company’s FY10 contracts. Mr. Bennett agreed that this was company information and that, if requested, it was “part of all the information you’d expect to provide as part of due diligence to a potential purchaser.” Neither the pipeline document, nor the information given to LMS on 15 May, was given to the EVs or included in the Data Room.

E2: The background to the 3 June e-mail

253.

The key feature of the background to the 3 June e-mail is, in my view, the need – recognised by all involved in the transaction – for both potential bidders, LMS and Mr. Nielsen, to be treated equally in terms of the information provided to them; a matter of which the Defendants, as well as the EVs, Mr. Nielsen and the Bank, were fully aware.

254.

Between 13 May 2009 and 3 June 2009 Mr. Nielsen emphasised the need for him to have access to the same information as the rival bidder, and complained to EVs and the Bank that LMS had access to more information than he did.

255.

These complaints were taken seriously by both the EVs and the Bank. On 20 May

2009, Mr. Jorgensen wrote to Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Homann, stating that it was “essential that all interested buyers (management at Up-Data and Jens Nielsen via their equity funds respectively) are ensured equal conditions for the transaction”.

256.

Mr. Nielsen’s e-mail of 24 May to Mr. Birkeland gives a sufficient flavour of his position:

“Further to our telephone conversation, I confirm my request for information to be included in the due diligence material; answers to our questions to the UK management, copy of all contracts, pipeline information for UK, copy all information, written and oral, given to LMS Capital (together with confirmation from UK management that this is the exact information handed over in writing or orally), and a full Due Diligence information package for Updata Denmark and

Change Networks, Updata Germany and Spain.”

257.

The request was repeated in a subsequent e-mail, which Mr. Birkeland clearly took seriously. On 28 May, he e-mailed Mr. Holm, setting out the requests made, and stating that “we should follow up on this, and explicitly make sure that this is also complied with”. The requests made were in the following terms:

In order to provide us with a proper basis for the next stages, I request from the company a full “Business Plan”, covering the following:

Adequate information on the historical and current financial information from all operations

The business plans for the next 3 to 5 years for Updata UK, and the combined business of Change and Updata DK.

What is Updata’s current infrastructure and assets,

Management’s opinion on its competitive landscape

Strength, risk and opportunity,

Management commitment to the company

Capex (investments), rollout timeline/ commitments/ requirements

I also refer to my email to you, dated 24th May 2009, and repeat my request for information to be included in the due diligence material; answers to our questions to the UK management, copy of all contracts, pipeline information, written and oral, given to LMS capital, including (if any) a copy of UK business plan, (together with confirmation from UK management that this is the exact information handed over in writing or orally), and a full Due Diligence information package for Updata Denmark and Change Networks, Updata German and Spain.

By phone Jens has asked me for:

A description of the market

Competitors

Pipeline (we have said that if he were to have a copy, this would be anonymised)

Investments in networks

Up to date numbers (the ones we have are as at February)

258.

The Defendants too were alive to the importance of the Data Room containing equal information for both sides. On 22 May 2009, Mr. Birkeland spoke to Mr. Bennett about establishing a data room. Mr. Birkeland’s evidence, which I accept, was that Mr. Bennett said that he would co-operate with that process. Mr. Birkeland then emailed Mr. Bennett with a list of documents to include in the Data Room. The list included “any current budget, forecast or business plan (prepared by or for the company or the management)” as well as “All other relevant financial information”. Mr. Bennett forwarded Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail on to Mr. Mantell on 22 May, commenting that it was quite a lot of work to put together, but that it was “important to get the process under way and we will need this information irrespective of who comes in”. Mr. Baldorino said that he was aware that what was required by the list was supposed to go into the Data Room, including the current budgets, forecasts or business plans.

259.

Mr. Bennett’s evidence was that there was no discussion between the Defendants, at least at this stage, about the approach to take in relation to the Data Room. In contrast, however, Mr. Nyegaard’s evidence was that Mr. Bennett told him “in no uncertain terms that he would ensure that the minimum possible information would be put in the

Data Room to reduce the chances of a successful bid by a competing bidder”. Mr. Nyegaard said that this conversation took place on 6 May 2009, in the context of a discussion about the likely procedures in relation to the upcoming due diligence process by Mr. Nielsen and what information would be provided to him and his associates. His oral evidence was that he and Mr. Bennett would both have been anticipating a data room process, even though this may not yet have been specified by the Bank. It may be that, ten years on, Mr. Nyegaard is mistaken about the timing of this conversation and that it took place after Mr. Jorgensen’s email of 20 May 2009. But I have no hesitation in accepting his evidence that the conversation took place. It is consistent not only with Mr. Bennett’s response to the 20 April e-mail, but with what subsequently transpired on 3 June and the Defendants’ unwillingness to put key information into the Data Room.

260.

On 29 May 2009, Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Bennett met at Updata UK’s offices. Although there was some dispute as to exactly what was said at the meeting, I do not think that any disputes are of any materiality when it comes to considering the ordinary interpretation of the 3 June e-mail or the other issues relating to deceit. It was common ground that, at this meeting, the EVs were told for the first time about the Tenon Memorandum. Mr. Birkeland’s evidence, which in this respect was not significantly challenged and I accept, was that the meeting was intended as a discussion regarding how the UK management would populate the Data Room. The parties discussed the need for a business plan and financial information to be included. Mr. Birkeland also mentioned the requests for information which Mr. Nielsen had made, in particular for financial projections, in e-mails that Mr. Nielsen had sent on 24 and 28 May. Mr. Birkeland stressed that the requests had to be addressed as a matter of urgency because Mr. Nielsen had been waiting for this information for some two months by this point. Mr. Bennett accepted, in his third witness statement, that Mr. Birkeland made the point that both bidding parties,

namely LMS and Mr. Nielsen’s consortium, should have access to the same information from Updata UK.

261.

Mr. Birkeland’s evidence was that Mr. Bennett initially claimed that no such business plan or financial projections existed. Mr. Birkeland told Mr. Bennett that he could not imagine that, if UK management had been meeting potential buyers, they had done so without some kind of information memorandum or business plan setting out the financial projections and other financial information about the company. Mr. Bennett then said that they did, in fact, have an information memorandum that had been produced by Tenon, but that it belonged to UK management and had been paid for by them. Again, this aspect of Mr. Birkeland’s evidence was not challenged, and I accept it. It was therefore common ground that the Defendants made it clear, at the meeting, that the Tenon Memorandum itself would not be provided.

262.

There was, however, as Mr. Bennett accepted in evidence, no reference to any refusal to provide documents other than the Tenon Memorandum. He agreed that he did not say that “he was not going to give certain information which had been given to Tenon”. His evidence was that he did not remember referring to the “Tenon suite of documents” at the meeting, and in my judgment he did not. Had he done so, that would have provoked questions as to what comprised this “suite” of documents; a question to which the Defendants gave somewhat different answers in the course of their evidence. Moreover, I do not consider that Mr. Bennett by this time (or by the time that he sent the 3 June e-mail) had in mind any concept of a “Tenon suite of documents”. This phrase seems to have first emerged well into the litigation, and was used in Mr. Bennett’s third witness statement (paragraph 119) for, as far as I can see, the first time. There is no contemporaneous reference in the documents reference to this concept. Nor do I consider that the other Defendants had this concept in mind in May or June 2009.

263.

After the existence of the Tenon Memorandum had emerged in the parties’ discussions, and Mr. Bennett had said that he would not provide it, the parties discussed what would be provided. Mr. Birkeland’s evidence (which again in this respect was not challenged) was that there was then some discussion about the Kelso Presentation, which Mr. Birkeland knew about and recalled. This was in the nature of a business plan (as Mr. Bennett’s 3 June e-mail recognises) and there was some discussion about how this could be updated. Mr. Birkeland’s evidence was that he suggested to Mr. Bennett that they should update the Kelso Presentation so as to have the same financial highlights, projections and conclusions as the Tenon Memorandum. He went on to say, in his witness statement, that Mr. Bennett gave an assurance that he would do that, but (as the Defendants fairly pointed out in their written closing) his oral evidence was more equivocal as to whether there was such an assurance. I do not think that this particular dispute, as to whether there was an assurance, is of any consequence. The subsequent correspondence, including the 3 June e-mail itself, indicates that Mr. Bennett did indeed update the Kelso Presentation. It is reasonable to conclude that the idea of doing so was discussed at the 29 May meeting, albeit that it is not possible – particularly given the passage of time – for me to conclude that there was any particular assurance as to exactly how this updating would occur.

264.

Mr. Bennett accepted that his understanding as a result of the conversation was “that both parties needed to have equal access to Updata UK’s documents and that the information (i.e. Updata UK’s documents) provided to Tenon, which had assisted in the preparation of the Tenon Memorandum, should be in the data room”. He said that he agreed to Mr. Birkeland’s request on the “basis of this understanding”. He said that this was also consistent “with Tenon’s advice … that whilst the Tenon Memorandum itself did not have to be provided, all information supplied to Tenon in the course of them preparing the Tenon Memorandum should go in the data room”. He went to say, in paragraph 119 of his witness statement, that he believed that it was “well understood at the time that both parties should have access in the data room to the same information belonging to Updata UK, that this did not include the Tenon Memorandum itself but did include information of Updata UK’s which had been used to prepare the Tenon Memorandum”. It was in this paragraph, however, that he asserted that the same analysis which led to there being no obligation to disclose the Tenon Memorandum also applied both to the March Weighted Budget and the Tenon

Data Pack “because these documents also comprised the Tenon suite of documents prepared for the Defendants and George Cowan (as opposed to Updata UK) for the purposes of the management buyout”. He accepted however that this was not something which had been discussed with Mr. Birkeland.

265.

Following the meeting, on the evening of 29 May, Mr. Birkeland e-mailed Mr. Bennett. The e-mail was cc’d to Mr. Mantell, Mr. Holm and Ms. Rana, who was dealing with the administrative aspects of the Data Room. Mr. Birkeland set out Mr. Nielsen’s bullet point requests for information. He also indicated that he would be asking for written confirmation that there had been equality of provision of “factual information etc.”. This was done, as Mr. Birkeland said in evidence, to put the Defendants under pressure and to make it clear how serious it was that there should be equality of information. The e-mail was in the following terms:

“Thank you for a constructive meeting this afternoon. I will of course inform you and Julian as soon as I know more about when JN’s team will arrive. Hopefully, we will not have to meet up at your offices before Monday morning to get the last preparations in place.

As mentioned LMS is expected to arrive Thursday and Friday next week.

As discussed we need to include a business plan in the room. Please find below as agreed an extracted list of the content requested to be included in this business plan:

Concise statement with adequate appendices (or notes) supporting on information on the historical and current financial information for all operations;

Concise statement of business plans for the next 3 years, with long term (to 5 years) prospects for Updata DK, Change and Updata UK;

Concise overview of Updata’s current infrastructure and assets;

Concise statement on management’s opinion on its competitive landscape; description of major competitors.

SWOT analysis, strength, risk and opportunity and threats,

Overview of capex rollout timeline/ commitment/ requirements to meet 1 to 3 year operations.

As agreed you will contact Flemming tomorrow to discuss in further details the content of the business plan.

We also look forward to receiving you responses to the already put forward by JN’s team. I understand that you have the questions. Please let me know if it is otherwise. I suggest that you send your responses to Flemming and I as soon as possible. We will then prepare an appropriate statement from Management Team confirming that LMS Capital has not in writing/orally been provided with any factual information etc. Which is different from the information included in the data room, hereunder in the business plan, or the responses.”

266.

Mr. Bennett immediately forwarded Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail to Mr. Hooft, with the comment “A little too much information don’t you think”.

267.

On the following day (30 May 2009), and as contemplated by Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail, Mr. Holm spoke to Mr. Bennett. Mr. Holm had been following the prior correspondence concerning the need for equality of information and Mr. Nielsen’s complaints. Mr. Holm’s evidence about that conversation in his witness statement was as follows:

“In my conversation with Mr Bennett on Saturday, 30 May 2009, Mr Bennett explained that he did not possess a business plan for Updata UK and did not intend to include the Tenon Memorandum within the documents in the Data Room. We therefore discussed how a business plan could be put together given the time restraints. I told Mr Bennett to include a definition of market segment, sales pipeline, contracts won, imminent contract wins as well as a 3-5 year budget, with key indicators as turnover, installation, rentals and EBITDA. I reiterated the fundamental importance of this information being correct and identical to the information given to LMS, in order that there could be a fair bidding process. ”

Counsel confirmed, during Mr. Holm’s cross-examination, that there was no challenge to the substance of that evidence.

268.

On the Sunday evening, 31 May 2009, Mr. Bennett sent to Mr. Hooft a draft of his proposed response, and asked for his comments. The draft response reproduced Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail, with Mr. Bennett’s responses interposed in red. In relation to the request for a concise statement of business plans for the next 3 years, with long term prospects for Change and Updata UK, Mr. Bennett wrote:

“There is no formal business plan business plan (sic) in place for Updata UK. The document which most closely resembles a business plan is a presentation to Kelso Asset Management which RB & VB presented in October 2008. This can be updated but is a PowerPoint presentation and not a descriptive document.”

269.

At this point, Mr. Bennett had not actually updated the Kelso Presentation, or at least he did not send it to Mr. Hooft. On the following morning (1 June), Mr. Bennett circulated his proposed responses to Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Mantell and Mr. Cowan. This was obviously done with a view to seeing if they had any comments on those responses. The e-mail attached “JNDD 1”. This contained Mr. Bennett’s proposed responses, again by interposing his responses into the text, to Mr. Nielsen’s earlier outstanding questions. (“JNDD” denoted Jens Nielsen Due Diligence.)

270.

In the afternoon of 1 June 2009, when Mr. Bennett was out of the office, Mr. Mantell on behalf of Mr. Bennett forwarded Mr. Bennett’s responses to Mr. Holm. There were no material changes to the draft which Mr. Bennett had circulated to his colleagues that morning, from which I conclude that those colleagues were content with the proposed response. Mr. Holm was therefore told that there was no business plan, but that the presentation to Kelso “can be updated”.

271.

On the following day, 1 June 2009, Mr. Hooft reported to Tenon that Mr. Birkeland’s request for a statement that both sides had equal information was “worrying them”. This may explain why, in the draft response sent to Mr. Hooft on the Sunday evening, and the actual response sent by Mr. Mantell on the Monday afternoon (1 June), there was no red text responding to this part of Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail. At all events, Mr. Hooft suggested that the Defendants take legal advice on the point by having a word with a friendly lawyer. He asked Tenon whether they had any materials “to make them aware of their rights and responsibilities”.

272.

Mr. Kidson of Tenon then advised on this issue. He was a senior person at Tenon: his job title was “Director of Corporate Finance”. His advice as to the management team’s responsibilities was in my view unequivocal. Mr. Kidson’s e-mail, sent on 2 June, was in the following terms:

“Richard/ Vic

I know there has been a lot of discussion on what should and should not be provided in the data room and therefore to Jens et al. Our advice is that ALL information which you as directors have supplied to Lee/Tenon in the course of them preparing a report for you (including any pipeline info) should go in the data room. The report by Tenon since it was commissioned by you and is for your benefit does not haver [sic] to be shown to anyone else however.

Our view is that a breach of the above would expose you to potential problems/even litigation.”

The word “ALL” was capitalised in this e-mail.

273.

Early on the morning of 3 June, Mr. Baldorino raised a specific question with Mr. Kidson, in an e-mail copied to Mr. Bennett. It related to the materials to be provided in the Data Room. The specific question arose from Mr. Baldorino’s concern that Mr. Nielsen might have been acting on behalf of a trade buyer, and Updata UK did not know who that trade buyer was. He therefore asked whether the “detailed pipeline information” (emphasis in original) needed to be divulged, because there was a possibility that it could be used “against us in a detrimental way”. Mr. Baldorino asked for advice because Mr. Kidson was far more experienced “than we are and we don’t want to be accused of withholding vital information and taken to court for failing in our duties”.

274.

The initial response to Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino came from Mr. Castledine, whose job title was Director of Transaction Services at Tenon. Mr. Castledine indicated that he had had a discussion with Mr. Bennett, and indicated that “really confidential information” might be provided only at a later stage, when exclusivity had been granted to the bidder, but that he had seen such information provided earlier “but only on a confidential basis (e.g. Customer 1, Customer 2 etc etc)”. The possibility of anonymising this information was therefore mooted. I accept the Claimants’ submission that, on the evidence, there was no discussion with Tenon of withholding the March Weighted Budget, nor any discussion of the concept of a “Tenon suite of documents” which could be withheld from disclosure.

275.

On the following morning, 4 June, Mr. Kidson himself responded to Mr. Baldorino’s e-mail of 3 June. The advice was again unequivocal:

“Our view is that all information given to one bidder (i.e. the MBO team) has to be given to all bidders to provide a level playing field. I don’t think there is any way around this. The non-disclosure point is not helpful but is a separate issue”.

276.

In the meantime, on 3 June, there had been further important correspondence. Early in the morning, Mr. Nielsen wrote to Mr. Birkeland asking for news “concerning getting the requested material and information regarding Updata UK?” The e-mail shows, in my view, that Mr. Nielsen was particularly interested in the position of Updata UK. In full, it read:

“Further to your data room preparation, I am writing to ask whether you have any news concerning getting the requested material and information regarding Updata UK? Specifically, but not only, it is vital to get the requested information on pipeline, 3-5 year budgets, and answers to the questions sent to the UK management in connection with the initial due diligence in April.

It goes without saying, that getting this information is required in order for us to conduct a proper due diligence in preparation for a binding offer, and it also defies any logic that we are bidding against UK MBO, where this information is clearly at hand to the management and LMS Capital. This is not only prohibitive to our efforts, but also against the interest of the existing shareholders.”

277.

On 3 June 2009 at 10:41am Mr. Birkeland e-mailed Mr. Bennett and Mr. Holm to emphasise again that both parties should have the same information available. He was concerned to ensure that the business plan should be put into the Data Room on the following day, before a planned visit by LMS. Mr. Birkeland said that he was trying his hardest to “ensure, that we avoid at a later date, to what extent did both parties have the same information available”. The e-mail was written in Danish, and Mr. Bennett translated it and forwarded it to Mr. Mantell, Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Cowan as well as Mr. Hooft. Mr. Bennett said in evidence that he was aware that “both the bank and the process that was being set up was supposed to ensure equal conditions for all bidders for the business”. Mr. Mantell too said that he appreciated the significance of the request for “any current budget, forecast or business plan”, and also that the purpose of the Data Room was that there should be an equal exercise so that the bidders had access to the same documentation and information.

278.

By this time (i.e. the morning of 3 June) there were two significant matters which had not yet been addressed. First, the e-mail sent on 1 June had indicated that the Kelso Presentation, which had been used in October 2008, could be updated. But no update had yet been provided. Secondly, there had been no response to the part of Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail where he indicated that he would be preparing an “appropriate statement” from the UK management confirming, in effect, equality of information. Mr. Birkeland himself had not yet prepared such a statement.

279.

Both of these matters were then, in my view, addressed in the e-mail sent on 3 June. At 1.06pm Mr. Bennett e-mailed Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm. The e-mail was copied to Mr. Mantell, and bcc’d to Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Cowan and Mr. Hooft. The e-mail reattached JNDD1 with Mr. Bennett’s interposed answers. It also interposed Mr. Bennett’s answers to Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail. It also attached the Updated Kelso Presentation. The text of one of the interposed answers was changed to reflect the fact that this updating had occurred, in contrast to the earlier e-mail which indicated that it “can be updated”, Mr. Bennett stated:

“There is no formal or informal business plan in place for Updata UK. The document which most closely resembles a business plan is a presentation to Kelso Asset Management which RB and VB presented in October 2008. Jens and Helge Homann were given this presentation when they came to the UK in Feb/March. We have updated this (please see attached) to reflect new business won but please bear in mind that this is a PowerPoint presentation and not a descriptive document”.

280.

In addition to incorporating in red his responses to Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail, and to JNDD 1, the e-mail had the following substantive text:

“Hi Mads and Flemming

I apologise for not getting this to you sooner. I came in on Sunday to complete and was convinced I had sent everything, except the presentation, off to you.

Please find attached answers to JN’s and HH’s questions from the round off meeting we had in the UK. Where further detail is required please refer to Julian as he has all the detailed paperwork.

In response to Mads’ e-mail earlier today and my subsequent conversation with Flemming, I would like to confirm that there is no business plan, nor has there been for a long time (years). The information we provided to Tenon began with the PowerPoint presentation attached, which was followed by a number of meetings in which they asked specific questions which we answered. From the information supplied they wrote an investment memorandum.

The factual data available to both Tenon at the time and LMS subsequently, does not differ from that information currently in the data room. In fact there is now far more factual data in the Data Room than has ever been supplied to Tenon or LMS in the past. We, as a management team will be available to answer questions, from either party, up until the 19th June when we understand that firm offers have to be tabled by both teams. We would of course require some notice, although this is to some extent catered for in the Data Room rules.

If either of you have any questions, concerns or suggestions, please revert back to me or Julian.”

281.

I agree with the Claimants that this e-mail was clearly intended to be a substitute for the fuller confirmatory statement from all the management that Mr. Birkeland had suggested. But, even if that were wrong, it was clearly intended to provide assurances in response to “Mads e-mail earlier today”, where Mr. Birkeland had emphasised the need for equality of information. The importance of that point had been emphasised by Mr. Holm in the conversation between Mr. Bennett and Mr. Holm following Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail of 29 May. Mr. Holm thought that this conversation had taken place on Saturday 30 May, and this was not disputed. It appears that there may have been a further conversation on 3 June as well (Mr. Bennett’s e-mail refers to “my subsequent conversation with Flemming”), where no doubt the same point was made.

282.

On any view, given the history which I have described, this was an important e-mail. I have no doubt that all of the Defendants knew this. Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail of 29 May, and the repeated references both in meetings and correspondence to the need for equality of information, had caused concern within the UK management team and had led to the advice given by Tenon. In so far as Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell sought to distance themselves from the figures contained in the Updated Kelso Presentation, I do not accept their evidence. I consider it inherently probable that they would have discussed with Mr. Bennett and agreed exactly what figures were to be given. They knew from the draft e-mail sent to them on the morning of 1 June 2009 that the Kelso Presentation was to be updated, and they knew from the 3 June e-mail itself and its attachment that the figures had been updated and what those figures were.

E3: The allegation of deceit in relation to the 3 June email

283.

Against this background, I turn to consider the ingredients of the tort of deceit in the context of this e-mail.

What, if any, factual representations were made in the 3 June e-mail?

284.

Again, since this is a case of express representations, it is appropriate to focus on the language of what was said, and construe what was said objectively according to the impact on a reasonable representee in the position of Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm, to whom the e-mail was sent. The Claimants’ pleaded case relies upon the representations in paragraph 48 of their pleading (see Section D above) and three further representations set out in Paragraph 52 as follows:

“By including the Updated Kelso Presentation and the Opportunities Presentation in the Data Room, and by making the statements in Mr. Bennett’s e-mail of 3 June 2009 (set out at paragraph 46 above), the UK management represented and/or implicitly represented to the European Vendors that:

(1)

UK management has a reasonable basis for believing the figures in the Updated Kelso Presentation to be correct;

(2)

That no other more accurate financial information, other than the information including the Updated Kelso Presentation, was available;

(3)

The UK management had not provided LMS and/or Tenon any information over and above the information contained in the Data Room.”

285.

Again, the Claimants’ pleading, in paragraphs 48 and 52, can be fairly criticised as being somewhat over-elaborate. But in my view it is possible to cut through the language of the pleading in order to identify the critical representations. I consider that there are two categories of representation which are material to the case, and which the Claimants have sought to translate into their various pleaded representations. The first relates to the projections that were presented in the Updated Kelso Presentation. The second relates to the express representation concerning equality of information (“The factual data available to both Tenon at the time and LMS subsequently, does not differ from that information currently in the data room. In fact there is now far more factual data in the Data Room than has ever been supplied to Tenon or LMS in the past”).

286.

As far as the projections are concerned, the 3 June e-mail stated in terms that the original Kelso Presentation had been updated to reflect new business won. The attachment contains Financial Projections. The material financial projection is the “Best Case Forecast” for 2010 with Turnover £ 15.183 million, Net Profit £ 2.195 million and EBITDA £ 3.348 million. These were, of course, identical to the figures which had been given in the Financial Overview. For essentially the same reasons as set out in the context of the 20 April e-mail, I consider that Mr. Bennett thereby made factual representations that:

i)

This forecast in the Updated Kelso Memorandum represented the UK management’s genuine (and current) forecast of Updata UK’s financial position; and

ii)

The UK management believed that facts existed which reasonably justified the figures included in the Updated Kelso Presentation.

287.

These projections contained only one “case”: i.e. the best case. Since it was identical to the figures given some 6 weeks earlier, it was implicit in this representation that there had been no change to the management’s expectations since the time that the

Financial Overview had been given. Nothing was therefore done to “correct” the prior representations as to management’s “middle case”.

288.

As far as equality of information is concerned, the representation was as to the “factual data” that had been provided to both LMS and Tenon. There are two pleaded implied representations which come close to reflecting this representation, namely that set out in paragraph 48 (6) (“that the UK management had not provided to LMS and/or Tenon any information which the European Vendors did not also have”) and paragraph 52 (3) (“the UK management had not provided LMS and/or Tenon any information over and above the information contained in the Data Room”). These formulations rightly focus on the information provided by UK management, rather than the information which Tenon may, as a result of work they carried out, have provided to potential investors. The only difficulty with accepting that these implied representations were made is the width of the word “information”, bearing in mind that the e-mail itself uses the words “factual data”. In theory at least, there might be a distinction between the two concepts, although there is clearly a very considerable degree of overlap.

289.

It seems to me that the real issue here is not how to formulate an implied representation, but simply how to construe what was said in that sentence, against the relevant context. Mr. Choo Choy argued for a narrow interpretation of the words “factual data”. His submission was that understood in context, the specific reference to “factual data” meant (and was intended to mean) the raw factual data from the company – not the assumptions and forecasts which the Defendants had prepared with and for Tenon as part of the MBO. He submitted that this was obvious from the fact that it was neither intended nor understood to extend to the Tenon Memorandum, the Weighted Budget, or the Data Pack. As a matter of ordinary construction, the term “factual data” did not cover forecasts or assumptions underlying forecasts as to the future. A forecast is an expression of opinion, not a statement of fact or factual data. The words “factual data” would therefore refer, for example, to the facts surrounding whether a contract had been concluded, what negotiations had taken place, and what stage of the tendering process had been reached. Documents recording judgment calls as to what probability existed of concluding a contract did not contain “raw” factual data.

290.

By contrast, Mr. Booth argued for a wider interpretation. He submitted that there was no reasonable distinction to be drawn between factual and opinion data. He drew attention to evidence given by all of the Defendants that the March Weighted Budget was or contained factual data. Data can come in different forms, but remains data. Management opinions are matters of fact, and a budget prepared by management is a factual document and would have been understood as such. The same is true of a document setting out the pipeline.

291.

I do not consider that, in context, a reasonable representee would have understood the representation made in the limited sense for which Mr. Choo Choy contended. The context of that representation was of course the need, emphasised to Mr. Bennett both by Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm, for there to be equality of information. If a budget is prepared by the management, setting out their views and understanding of what contracts there are, how much and when income is going to be received, what expenditure will be incurred in fulfilling those contracts, it would in my view be understood that this budget and the information that it contained was “factual data”, even if that data contained an element of prediction as to what would happen in the future.

292.

All of the Defendants in their evidence accepted that the March Weighted Budget was or contained “factual data”, and in my view they were right to do so. Mr. Mantell agreed that the March Weighted Budget was “factual data available to Tenon”. Mr. Bennett agreed that this weighted budget was “factual information”, albeit that it was factual information “which I’ve already said I wouldn’t have provided”. Mr. Baldorino agreed that both the March Weighted Budget and his pipeline document “included factual data” and that this was factual data that was not in the Data Room.

293.

I do not consider that any reasonable recipient would have considered that the confirmation that all “factual data” had been made available would have been understood to exclude the budgets or other projections, expressing the management’s analysis and views, which had been made available to Tenon. Mr. Bennett agreed that since the March Weighted Budget was not included in the Data Room, the words which he used in his e-mail were a “bit clumsy and incomplete, but not as a lie with an attempt to mislead”. He agreed that he should have said that there was information which had been sent to Tenon and to LMS, but which he regarded as private information that shouldn’t be disclosed. To my mind, these answers reinforce my conclusion as to how a reasonable recipient would have understood what Mr. Bennett was saying.

294.

It is true, of course, that Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm knew that they were not going to be given the Tenon Memorandum. But it does not follow at all, in my view, that because the Tenon Memorandum would almost certainly contain some projections, that the reference to the provision of “factual data” in Mr. Bennett’s e-mail should be understood to exclude any data which had an element of futurity about it, such as budgets or projections provided by the management. There is a distinction between: (i) the Tenon Memorandum, which would have been understood to be a Tenon document containing Tenon’s views, and (ii) the materials had been provided by management to Tenon so as to enable them to form those views and write their memorandum. The discussions which led to this e-mail had focused on the need for equality of the information given by management to both bidders. There was nothing in Mr. Bennett’s e-mail which suggested that equality of information did not extend to materials provided by management which had an element of futurity, such as a recent budget. On the contrary, the prior two sentences of the e-mail (“The information … investment memorandum”) conveyed how management had given relatively little by way of written materials to Tenon, with the Tenon Memorandum being based on the PowerPoint and subsequent questions and answers at meetings. This was reinforced by the subsequent statement that there was far more factual data in the Data Room than had ever been supplied to Tenon or LMS in the past.

Falsity

295. Again, I have no hesitation in saying that the representations were false. The representations as to the projections were false for the same reasons that the representations in the 20 April 2009 e-mail were false. The representation as to factual data was false because there was important factual data, as described above, which had been provided to Tenon or LMS and which was not included in the Data Room; specifically, the March Weighted Budget, Mr. Baldorino’s pipeline document, and the other information provided to LMS in May 2009.

The Defendants’ state of mind

296.

I deal with the state of mind of the Defendants collectively, having already held that Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell both knew about what Mr. Bennett proposed to say in his e-mail and what financial information he intended to provide in the Updated Kelso Presentation.

297.

I consider that the Defendants intended to make representations in the terms alleged. The representations concerning the projections follow naturally from the words used in the 3 June e-mail, and the provision of the projections. The representation as to “factual data” is an express representation. None of the Defendants gave any credible alternative explanation to the effect that the e-mail and its attachment were intended to be understood in a different way.

298.

I also have no doubt that the Defendants knew that deliberately false statements were being made to Mr. Holm and Mr. Birkeland. They were made because telling the truth was unpalatable and too risky as far as they were concerned. Revealing the true expectation at that time would put at severe risk any willingness on the part of Updata Europe to contemplate accepting the LMS offer as well as risking offers from Mr. Nielsen which were well in excess of the LMS offer. It seemed to me that (as with the 20 April e-mail) there were a number of dishonest statements in the 3 June e-mail, as described in the following paragraphs. In Section F, I deal with some other points which bear on my unwillingness to accept the Defendants’ evidence.

299.

I start with the terms of the description which was given by Mr. Bennett of the process which led to the Tenon memorandum, viz:

“The information we provided to Tenon began with the PowerPoint presentation attached, which was followed by a number of meetings in which they asked specific questions which we answered. From the information supplied they wrote an investment memorandum.”

300.

In my judgment, even bearing in mind that this was a summary of what happened leading to the Tenon Memorandum, this was thoroughly misleading. There was no evidence that the Kelso Presentation (which was the PowerPoint attached) had ever in fact been given to Tenon. The Defendants suggested that Mr. Bennett must have intended to refer to the Financial Overview, rather than the Kelso Presentation, and that his response was therefore somewhat confused. But even if Mr. Bennett was intending to refer to Financial Overview, the factual position (as set out in detail above) was that the management had provided Tenon with financial information in

the days indeed weeks before the Financial Overview was given to them. More importantly, however, the description in the 3 June e-mail omits completely the critical part of the process leading to the figures in the Tenon Memorandum: i.e. the careful preparation, by management, of budgets and ultimately the March Weighted Budget which was given to Tenon on the evening of 25 March 2009. The e-mail seeks to convey the impression that the Tenon Memorandum was the result of Tenon’s work in considering the PowerPoint and then asking questions of management in meetings. This is not what happened.

301.

Next, I turn to the projection for 2009/10 contained in the Updated Kelso Presentation. The figure of EBITDA £ 3.348 million did not represent management’s genuine and current views of the “Best Case” for 2010. There had been no sudden downward shift in management’s expectation of EBITDA in excess of £ 6 million, as set out in the March Weighted Budget and subsequently used by Tenon in the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack. This figure in the March Weighted Budget was, in my view, management’s view of the most likely result (i.e. their forecast for the year), and was not a “Best case” forecast.

302.

The manner in which the Kelso presentation came to be updated is also significant in the context of dishonesty. The original Kelso Presentation had in fact already been updated, as described above, on the morning of 26 March 2009. It was updated by Mr. Mantell, so that the final page containing financial projections included the £ 19 million turnover and £ 6 million EBITDA figures from the March Weighted Budget. The reason that it was updated that morning was in order for Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino to make presentations to a number of private equity houses that the management was planning to meet. They therefore knew about the updated figures, as did Mr. Mantell who had done the work.

303.

Accordingly, there was already in existence, in early June 2009, an updated version of the Kelso Presentation which was available to the Defendants. When Mr. Bennett came to do his separate updating prior to sending his e-mail on 3 June, he deliberately and in my view dishonestly altered the existing Kelso Presentation so as to reduce the 2010 figures, and in particular the EBITDA figure of £ 3.348 million EBITDA. He also changed the heading to the column, so that a figure of £ 6 million which was said to be the “Forecast” (i.e. not a “Best Case” forecast) was changed so as to be a “Best Case” forecast of £ 3.348 million.

304.

In cross-examination, Mr. Bennett sought to justify the £ 3.348 million “best case” in the Updated Kelso Presentation. His evidence was that he had performed some sort of calculation in his head by which he took the £ 6.070 million EBITDA in the March Weighted Budget; accounted for the loss of the Hampshire and Dorset Upgrades contracts; determined that the loss of those contracts would result in reduced EBTDA; and then chose to take the “best case” figure from the Financial Overview as being a “fair” figure in the circumstances. I agree with the Claimants that this evidence should be rejected. Indeed, in his closing submissions, Mr. Choo Choy realistically did not seek to support this explanation, acknowledging that Mr. Bennett had simply used the Financial Overview figures, whilst maintaining that Mr. Bennett had been doing his best to assist the court.

305.

In my view, this was a classic case of a witness who, when confronted with a difficult document in the witness box, simply invents an answer which he thinks may support

his case and justify his conduct. If this happens, the witness should not be surprised if a judge concludes, as I do in the case of Mr. Bennett (for this and many other reasons apparent from this judgment), that he is not a witness upon whose evidence reliance can be placed. Indeed, in his witness statement for the strike-out application, Mr. Bennett’s evidence was very different. In his second witness statement, Mr. Bennett’s evidence was that he did not update the figures, and that he did not represent that the figures were the most recent projections, because it would have been “obvious to [EVs] that the projections contained within the Updated Kelso presentation were essentially the same as the projections they had previously received”. In his third witness statement, he says he was not willing to provide the March Weighted Budget so he updated the Kelso Presentation by taking the “best case” from the Financial Overview. Mr. Bennett’s evidence at trial is also inconsistent with the fact that, two weeks later, the Defendants produced “in the bag” FY10 EBITDA projections of £ 5.55 million.

306.

Overall, I reached the same conclusion as in relation to the 20 April e-mail. The Defendants had a choice. They could refuse to provide any projections, and give an explanation as to why. Or they could provide the projections which contained the management’s current expectation. Or they could lie, which is what Mr. Bennett did.

307.

The representation as to factual data was also deliberately false. Tenon had been given the various weighted budgets as well as Mr. Baldorino’s pipeline document. These were crucial documents which led to the Tenon Memorandum. Further financial information had been given to LMS in the course of May 2009, as described above. None of this information was in the Data Room, and the Defendants knew it. They also knew, because Tenon told them in clear terms in early June, that they needed to provide “ALL” the information which had been supplied to Tenon. The Defendants decided to ignore that advice, because it did not suit their commercial interests which lay in ensuring that the LMS bid succeeded, that Updata Europe accepted it, and that Mr. Nielsen and his consortium failed.

Intention to induce

308.

I deal here with intention to induce in relation both to the 20 April e-mail and the 3 June e-mail. The relevant legal requirement for intention to induce is that the representor should intend that the representee should act upon the representation. I do not consider that there can be any doubt that this is what the Defendants did intend. The 20 April e-mail was an important e-mail sent in response to a request for the latest information, and it was sent in the context of the offer sent by LMS on 16 April. The 3 June e-mail was an important e-mail sent to both Mr. Holm and Mr. Birkeland. It arose from a chain of correspondence and discussion as to what should go into the

Data Room. It followed the Bank’s recommendation that there should be a data room, and the complaints and requests made by Mr. Nielsen. I cannot see any basis for a contention that there was no intention that the representee should act on the representations.

309.

The Defendants submitted that it needed to be proved that there was a subjective intention that “Updata Europe would rely on these representations to enter the SPA”. I do not consider that, legally, it is necessary for this specific action to be intended: see Section C above. But in any event, these representations were made to Updata

Europe for the very reason that a sale of its shares was in the offing, that an offer for

the shares had been made (at the time of the 20 April e-mail), and that (by the time of 3 June e-mail) there was a bidding process which would lead to a sale and purchase agreement. It is irrelevant, in my view (if this is what the Defendants are suggesting) that at this stage there was no draft SPA in existence, or that LMS had yet to be chosen by Updata Europe as the preferred bidder. A false representation made in the course of discussions for a possible contract is actionable even if made at an early stage of the discussions.

310.

The Defendants’ real point on intention to induce, as it seemed to me, was that the figures in the Updated Kelso Presentation were directed at Mr. Nielsen and that therefore there was no intention to induce Updata Europe to act. I did not consider that this argument could have any application to the 20 April e-mail, which was sent to Mr. Johnsen prior to the bidding timetable coming into existence. In the context of the 3 June e-mail, however, Mr. Choo Choy’s submission was that the Updated Kelso Presentation was really directed at Mr. Nielsen. It was updated in the way that it was because the Defendants did not want to “spoon-feed” Mr. Nielsen. It was for him to do his own work. This argument was also, as I understood it, advanced as a reason why the Defendants had no dishonest intent.

311.

In whatever way the argument is advanced, in my view it is a bad one. I do not accept that any distinction can be drawn, either in relation to the e-mail itself (which was sent to Mr. Holm and Mr. Birkeland), or more generally, between an intention to mislead Mr. Nielsen rather than Updata Europe. There was no practical way in which Updata UK could give up-to-date information and its current forecasts to Updata Europe, without these also becoming available to Mr. Nielsen as well. Similarly, if they were given to Mr. Nielsen, Updata Europe would necessarily see them. Therefore the desire not to “spoon-feed” Mr. Nielsen, and to “make him do his own work”, was by definition a desire not to “spoon-feed” Updata Europe as well. If the Defendants were to achieve the sale that they wanted, they needed to direct statements as much to the seller (Updata Europe) as to the bidder with whom they were in competition.

312.

More importantly, it seems to me that in the present context, the use of the word “spoon-feed” is really a euphemism for “mislead”. It would been open to the Defendants to say to Mr. Nielsen that they were simply not willing to give him any figures, and that it was for him to do his own work on the data that had been given, and that they were not prepared to give any confirmation to the effect that the bidders had been treated equally. But this is not what the Defendants did. Instead, as part of their reluctance to “spoon-feed” Mr. Nielsen, the Defendants positively gave misleading projections to Updata Europe in the Updated Kelso Presentation. Those projections did not represent the UK management’s genuine (and current) forecast of Updata UK’s financial position. Nor did the management believe that facts existed which reasonably justified the figures included in the Updated Kelso Presentation. Quite simply, that is fraud and it is no answer to say that this was borne of a desire not to “spoon-feed” another party. A desire not to spoon-feed could lead to a person refusing to give any information and making this clear. But it cannot justify positive false statements.

Inducement

313.

I deal separately with inducement in Section H below, where I conclude that the requirement of inducement is satisfied.

F: The Defendants’ case and evidence: further considerations and conclusions.

314.

This section addresses a number of further matters which are relevant to my conclusions as to deceit set out above, and to the Defendants’ responsibility for that deceit. I identify other reasons which have led me to conclude that the Defendants’ evidence is unreliable. I return to the question of motive, in the context of the evidence of Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett as to whether it was their intention to obtain the highest price on the sale to LMS. I deal with Defendants’ case and evidence for the strike-out hearing before Sir Richard Field, where the Claimants’ contend that the Defendants sought to mislead the court. I also address a number of other points which were advanced by the Defendants as to why there was no fraudulent intent. Finally, I consider the question of whether Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell – neither of whom sent the 20 April or 3 June e-mails – can be held responsible for Mr. Bennett’s misrepresentations, either in deceit or for the tort of conspiracy. I consider these matters in the context of the Defendants’ case as to why neither Mr. Bennett, nor the other Defendants, had any fraudulent intent, and I start by identifying the principal points advanced.

F1: The Defendants’ case as to fraudulent intent.

315.

The Defendants’ case was that even if false representations were made or intended to be made, there was no intention to deceive. Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell denied any knowledge of the 20 April e-mail from Mr. Bennett: this was Mr. Bennett’s document alone. As for the 3 June e-mail, which had been copied to Mr. Mantell and bcc’d to Mr. Baldorino, this was again Mr. Bennett’s document. The substance of Mr. Baldorino’s evidence was that he had paid little or no attention to the figures in the Updated Kelso Presentation. Mr. Mantell did not seek to distance himself from those figures in the same way. Indeed, it was Mr. Mantell who placed the Updated Kelso Presentation in the Data Room.

316.

The Defendants accepted that, with hindsight, the Defendants (and Mr. Bennett in particular) might have done things differently or phrased things more precisely. The updating of the Kelso Presentation for Mr Nielsen should probably have been given more thought. But, standing back, the inherent probabilities were irreconcilable with fraudulent intent as opposed (at most) to unreasonableness or incompetence or a view that Mr Nielsen should be doing his own work in assessing the prospects of the company and not be spoon fed the product of the Defendants’ work with Tenon for the purposes of their MBO bid. In that context, the Defendants emphasised that:

a)

They had not set out to do an MBO or oust Updata Europe. On the contrary, it was Mr Nielsen who, with assistance from the Bank, had set matters in motion in January 2009 and it was in response to that that the Defendants started work on an MBO.

b)

The Claimants were unable to identify any credible dishonest motive for the Ds to have committed fraud in circumstances where LMS would be the principal beneficiary and not them.

c)

It could not be right to assume that a desire on the Defendants’ part to succeed in their MBO bid intrinsically meant that they intended to mislead. It is true that the Defendants no longer wished to have Updata

Europe as majority shareholder, but this was because of a desire to ensure that the business was properly capitalised going forward and no longer controlled by Updata Europe. There was no desire to remove Updata Europe completely.

d)

The suggestion that the Defendants desired to get rid of the European Vendors, and deliberately to withhold information from the Data Room, should be rejected. It was common ground that Updata Europe’s representatives never visited the Data Room and that the purpose of the Data Room was for the use of prospective bidders, not for the seller. In any event, this suggested desire was inconsistent with the facts that (a) both European Vendors were offered a roll-over of their investment in Updata UK and (b) Mr. Bennett went out of his way in Spring 2009 to seek to explore a structure whereby Updata Europe would retain 45% of its shares. Those were not the actions of fraudsters desperate to oust the European Vendors.

e)

If the Defendants were fraudsters, then the very last thing they would want was for the European Vendors to remain in the business as significant shareholders, with the ability to discover the “true” performance in FY10. Nevertheless, Newwatch was allowed to roll over its participation in Updata UK into the newco, and in due course Mr. Johnsen came to learn the successful results of the business.

f)

The Financial Overview document was not a dishonest document prepared to deceive. It was prepared in the ordinary course of business of Updata UK. It had been given to Tenon as well as Mr Nielsen and Mr Homann on the same day. If it were a dishonest document, or thought to be incorrect and out of date, why would Mr. Mantell have sent it to Mr. Helman of Tenon on 23 March 2009 in response to a request for 2005-2010 EBIT figures? The Claimants’ case theory did not stack up with the inherent probabilities. What is more, Mr. Mantell provided the assumptions underlying each of the FY10 scenarios described in the Financial Overview. These are not the actions of an individual who intends to deceive.

317.

As regards the 3 June e-mail and the Updated Kelso Presentation, the Defendants submitted that the Claimants’ case theory again was beset with difficulties:

a)

In advance of sending it, Mr. Bennett specifically asked Tenon for advice. Mr. Kidson said (copying in Mr. Hooft) that the Defendants should provide:

“ALL information which you as directors have supplied to Lee/Tenon in the course of them preparing a report for you (including pipeline info) should go in the data room. The report by Tenon since it was commissioned by you and is for your benefit does not have to be shown to anyone else however”

b)

The Defendants understood the Weighted Budget and the Tenon Data Pack to have been essentially the same as the Tenon Memorandum. These were the core of the MBO sales case they had paid Tenon to help them prepare. Tenon’s advice was not inconsistent with that, and the Defendants put the most detailed pipeline information in the Data Room in the form of the April “Opportunities” document. Tenon and LMS obviously knew that the March Weighted Budget was not put in the Data Room, since they visited the Data Room a number of times.

c)

There was no good reason why Mr. Bennett would ask Tenon for advice on 2 June if he had already been conspiring with Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell to deceive Updata Europe back in March/April, or why he would do so if he was on the verge of sending his 3 June e-mail in implementation of such a conspiracy. Again, the case theory was highly implausible and improbable.

d)

The same point arose in relation to LMS. Mr. Bennett specifically asked Mr. Hooft for advice on his response to Mr. Birkeland’s queries on Mr. Nielsen’s behalf. Moreover, he copied Mr. Hooft into his e-mail to Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm. So, the Court should infer, Mr. Hooft did not think there was anything fraudulent with what Mr. Bennett was saying in his e-mail, or with the Updated Kelso Presentation being sent and then put in the Data Room (but not the March Weighted Budget). Mr. Hooft was a plainly honest witness, with an impressive recollection of events. He was clear in his witness statement that he was entirely unaware of any alleged deceit or fraud occurring at the time, and no case of fraud was made against him. It is not realistic to suppose that the Defendants were part of a conspiracy to deceive, but Mr. Hooft was not. That is an incoherent case bearing in mind what Mr. Hooft knew and saw at the time.

318.

More generally, the fact that the Claimants do not allege that either Mr. Cowan or LMS were party to the alleged fraud, despite their integral roles in the MBO, is also significant. It is inherently implausible that the Defendants could have perpetrated a fraud without the involvement or knowledge of Mr. Cowan or LMS.

319.

Although there was a great deal of cross-examination of the Defendants directed at the proposition that the March Weighted Budget was Updata UK’s document, rather than the document of the management team, the precise legal position in that respect was not what mattered. The real issue, in terms of deceit, was the genuineness of the

Defendants’ belief that the three documents (the Tenon Memorandum, the Tenon Data Pack and the March Weighted Budget) were essentially part of the same type or in the same category; namely documents that the management team had been preparing for the purposes of the MBO. Mr. Choo Choy therefore submitted that it “made complete sense that they would have treated those documents as being for their use”. It would therefore have been natural for Mr. Bennett and the other members of the management team to think of the March Weighted Budget as their document, not the company’s document or budget; because it was the working document that provided the financial metrics for the Tenon Memorandum and the Data Pack for the purposes of the MBO. It was therefore very easy to see how, from the management’s perspective, the March Weighted Budget was honestly thought by them to be their work product. Therefore when Mr. Bennett received Mr. Johnsen’s request for the latest budgets, it is not realistic to think that he would have interpreted this as a request for the March Weighted Budget. He treated the request as being a request for the latest company budget, not for the budget prepared for the MBO.

320.

Mr. Choo Choy’s written and oral submissions recognised that the Updated Kelso Presentation was a somewhat difficult document to defend. His oral submissions addressed this document in detail. He submitted that if there had been an intention to deceive, it was very strange that Mr. Bennett used exactly the same numbers as had been given to Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homan in March. One would have expected him to use slightly different numbers, perhaps slightly higher. Moreover, the same numbers were used for the best case figures in circumstances where the assumptions underlying the original financial overview in March had been fully disclosed. The best case assumptions as to the pipeline in those assumptions did not reflect the additional 2009 contracts identified on the earlier page of the Updated Kelso Presentation. If there had been an intention to deceive, one would not have expected Mr. Bennett to identify the further contracts which had been obtained in 2009. A careful recipient of the document could not have failed to notice the similarity between the figures in the Financial Overview and those in the Updated Kelso Presentation. At the heart of the submission was the proposition that Mr. Bennett’s repetition of the best case FY 2010 figures was reflective or consistent with an intention on his part not to give Mr. Nielsen the benefit of the UK management’s MBO work and therefore not to “spoonfeed him and do his work for him”.

F2: Motive and the Defendants’ evidence as to their desire to obtain the maximum price

321.

I have already set out (see Section B) the backdrop to the events in early 2009, including how Mr. Johnsen came to be regarded as “the enemy” by the UK management team, and the UK management’s lack of trust in Updata Europe. I have also considered the question of motive in Sections D and E above. I accept Mr.

Nyegaard’s evidence that, during 2008, the situation between Updata UK and Updata Europe was strained and that Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino lacked confidence in Updata Europe; that they thought that the Danish companies were a potential drain on Updata UK; and that there was a need to replace or dilute Updata Europe as majority shareholder.

322.

I have no doubt that the Defendants’ preference was for replacement rather than dilution, if that were achievable. This is reflected in an e-mail sent by Mr. Baldorino in July 2009 after the sale: “It is now done with the Danes kicked into touch”. In late 2008, Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino had contemplated putting Updata UK into administration as a means of taking control of the company through a pre-pack admininstration. In the event, this idea came to nothing. But the need for positive action was lent a degree of urgency when the Defendants was learned that Mr. Nielsen was making an unwelcome approach to buy the company in early 2009. I consider it clear that, thereafter, the last thing that the UK management wanted was for Mr. Nielsen’s bid to succeed. None of the Defendants wanted to work with Mr. Nielsen. Their response was therefore to try to put together an MBO. They spent time and money doing so, and chose an investor (LMS) with whom they could work in the future. It is obvious that the Defendants would have been highly motivated for the MBO to succeed. The Defendants were optimistic as to the future of the business, as reflected in the text of the Tenon Memorandum and the forecasts which were given to

Tenon. They wanted to enjoy its future prosperity. The argument (which I have already addressed) that Mr. Bennett did not want to “spoon feed” Mr. Nielsen, and that Mr. Nielsen had to do his own work, also demonstrates the Defendants motive for their bid to succeed, and for Mr. Nielsen to fail. The Defendants therefore had an obvious motive for misleading both Updata Europe and Mr. Nielsen as to the prospects of the business.

323.

Throughout their evidence, both Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino, but in particular the latter, sought to maintain that in 2009 they wanted to obtain the highest price for the shares in Updata UK. They said that they were shareholders and stood to benefit from a sale, just as Updata Europe did. I was sceptical of this evidence at the time it was given, and after closing submissions I was helpfully provided by the parties with an agreed list of their evidence on this topic. I have reviewed it bearing in mind (as Mr. Choo Choy correctly submitted) the importance of reading a witness’s evidence as a whole, and in the context of the question asked. It does seem to me that, fairly read, both Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino did give evidence that they were seeking to maximise the price on the sale.

324.

Thus, Mr. Bennett said that, when preparing the figures for the weighted case, he discussed with Mr. Cowan the need to “get the number as high as possible, we’re trying to get investors on board quickly. We’re trying to get them to pay the best price and therefore we’re going to create an optimistic sales document”. When referring to his early discussions with LMS in early April 2009, in the context of a question that the pricing was always intended to be referable to the monies owed to the Bank, he said: “We are the management team wanting the highest price”. When asked about the position in mid-April, when the LMS offer was made, there was the following exchange:

“Q. So in terms of the position as it now stood, as I understand your evidence you’re saying that you are trying to get the highest value possible for the purchase price?

A. That’s exactly what we were trying to do”.

325.

Mr. Baldorino’s evidence was to the same effect, indeed more emphatic. He said that he wanted to maximise his 15% share in the business. So it wasn’t “selling the shares at a lower price or anything like that”. He disputed the suggestion that since he did not want to work for Mr. Nielsen, it was even more important for him to ensure that his bid did not succeed:

“Not really, because I – if his bid would have been very high or higher, much higher, I would have benefited from it.

326.

When asked about the 20 April e-mail, he denied that this had been sent after discussion with him and Mr. Mantell. He was then asked:

“Q: And it reflected the fact that you did not want Updata Europe to have any real opportunity to try and make the most of its opportunity to sell its shares for the highest possible price?”

A: I would have wanted the highest price for those shares, absolutely.

Q: Well, what I suggest to you is you didn’t want that but you knew Mr Johnsen wanted that?

A: No, I wanted – I wanted the price to be as high as possible.”

327.

When asked questions in the context of the Claimants’ fiduciary duty case, he said that it was:

“in my interests to get the highest price possible obtained ….

….

My interest was probably in line with the European Vendors to sell my share of the business at a highest possible price.

I think that we all wanted the highest possible price.”

328.

Finally, in response to questions from me, he confirmed that his evidence was that he was seeking to maximise the price that could be paid for the Updata shares in the interests of both the management team and the majority shareholder; and that his colleagues in the management team were seeking to do that as well.

329.

In my view, all of the evidence of Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino, directed towards the proposition that they wanted to maximise the price, was contrary to the documents and the inherent probabilities. It was unreliable and I reject it. I am inclined to think that it was deliberately untruthful as well, since it is difficult to see how these witnesses could, having seen the documents, have persuaded themselves that they wanted and sought to obtain the highest possible price. But it is not necessary to reach a positive conclusion in that regard. It is possible that these witnesses were to some extent on auto-pilot when answering these questions, responding by reference to what they knew their case was and what their answers ought to be, giving insufficient thought to the answers given. This evidence and my rejection of it is relevant to my overall assessment of the Defendants as witnesses, albeit that I agree with Mr. Choo Choy that one should not draw a general conclusion from just one area where the evidence of a witness is rejected.

330.

In relation to the question of whether the Defendants were seeking to maximise the price paid for the shares, the true factual position was in my view as follows. The Defendants, together with Tenon, were certainly seeking to maximise the amount of interest in the opportunity from the private equity houses whom they approached. A considerable amount of work and thought went into the figures which were contained in the March Weighted Budget. There was a considerable degree of optimism amongst the management as to the future results of the business, and this optimism was therefore fairly reflected in the figures which were then given to Tenon and ultimately to the market. This was certainly a way of interesting potential investors. However, when approaching the market, the Defendants were not seeking to maximise the price. Instead, the relevant section of the Tenon Memorandum, which was drafted by Mr. Bennett, described the opportunity as one to acquire the shares at or below the level of the debt. Similarly, the original approach to Tenon, as reflected in Mr. Castledine’s e-mail of 26 February 2009, was to identify funders prepared to invest £ 4-5 million to facilitate an acquisition from Updata Europe.

331.

It is therefore no surprise that when the bids came in from the private equity houses, they were all at or around the level of the debt identified in the Tenon Memorandum. There was no evidence that the Defendants’ selection of LMS was thereafter made on the basis of seeking to maximise the price that LMS would pay for the shares, rather than by reference to the private equity house with whom the Defendants preferred to work. Neither Mr. Bennett nor Mr. Baldorino could identify any positive steps that they had taken, apart from approaching a number of private equity houses in the first instance in order to create “competitive tension”, to maximise the price. I do not accept that there was any real attempt to create competitive tension. The opportunity was presented as one to acquire the shares at the level of the debt. The hope, no doubt, would be that a number of houses would be attracted by such an opportunity, and would be willing to pitch at that level. The Defendants would then be in the position of being able to pick and choose their preferred investor. That is what in fact happened. There is no evidence that, after the bids came in, the Defendants tried to create competitive tension by encouraging the private equity houses to increase their offers, for example by playing one house off against another.

332.

On 2 April 2009, LMS gave the presentation which I have already described. This noted that the company was “set to gain significant scale: from recent £ 1 million rental [Gross Profit] to £ 4-5 million in near future”. The presentation referred to the possibility of using “Historical, LTM [Last 12 months] and YTD underperformance compared with budget [to] give ammunition for lower valuation.” There is no evidence of the Defendants challenging LMS as to their proposed use of “ammunition” for a lower valuation. Indeed, following this presentation, it was LMS that was selected as the Defendants’ preferred bidder. After LMS had been selected, there is nothing in the documents which evidences attempts by the management to maximise the price payable by LMS. Instead, there are some internal documents showing the management’s very real interest in their personal position, including a ratchet mechanism which would increase their shareholding.

333.

On 14 April 2009, there was a meeting at the Bank in Denmark attended by Mr. Jorgensen, the Bank’s lawyer Mr. Sorensen, Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino, and representatives of LMS (including Mr. Hooft) and Tenon. The purpose of the meeting was to inform the Bank of the intention of LMS and the UK Management team to buy the shares held by Updata Europe. Mr. Baldorino’s contemporary notes of the meeting record: “offer holding co. 60% stake amount same as credit facility”: i.e. to offer the same as the outstanding debt. Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino were content with this approach, which was consistent with the opportunity set out in the Tenon Memorandum. Mr. Nyegaard’s evidence was that the deal proposed by LMS and the UK Management was deliberately structured so that it exactly covered Updata

Europe’s debt to the Bank. He said that everyone in the room knew this. I accept that evidence. Mr. Bennett said that he couldn’t remember the meeting but it “wouldn’t surprise” him if the discussion before the meeting was that the level of the offer was to be pitched by reference to the bank debt. I therefore do not accept Mr Hooft’s evidence in so far he suggested that LMS’s first offer was not calculated by reference to the debt, and that his valuation coincidentally matched the debt figure.

334.

On 16 April 2009, LMS made its offer. Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino would have appreciated that, based on the figures which they had given Tenon, there was a very strong argument (to put it at its lowest) that an offer based on EBITDA of only £ 1.5 million would substantially undervalue the company. There is no evidence of any attempt by them to point this out either to LMS or to Mr. Johnsen or anyone else on the Updata side. Instead, as previously discussed, the e-mail traffic on the morning of 20 April was aimed at trying to ensure the success of the LMS bid and explaining its benefits to the Bank.

335.

There is also an obvious point that can be made against the case that the management were seeking to maximise the price, as Mr. Baldorino accepted at the end of his evidence. Had this been the case, Mr. Nielsen would have been given the same figures as had been given to Tenon. Indeed, there would have been every reason to disclose the Tenon Memorandum and the Data Pack (leaving aside the Weighted Budget) both to Mr. Nielsen and Updata Europe in order to ensure that any buyer paid the highest possible price.

336.

The evidence given by Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino on this important issue is one reason why I regard them as unreliable witnesses. But this is not the only reason, and I bear in mind Mr. Mantell did not give evidence along the lines discussed. I therefore now turn to a number of other points of significance.

F3: The strike out application

The March Weighted Budget

337.

The Claimants contend that the Defendants deliberately sought to mislead Sir Richard Field on the strike-out application. This was a heavy and important application which, if successful, would have resulted in the dismissal of the claim. The background to this argument is as follows.

338.

On 15 February 2016, the Defendants applied to strike out the proceedings in their entirety. The application was supported by the first witness statement of Mr. Bennett (“RB1”). Mr. Bennett was authorised by the other Defendants to tender RB1 on their behalves, and he accepted in evidence that he must have discussed the events of 6- 10 July 2009 (described in more detail below) with them before it was finalised. Following reply evidence from the Claimants, Mr. Bennett submitted a further witness statement (“RB2”) in support of the strike out application, and this was also authorised by Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell.

339.

A principal focus of RB1 and RB2, and the argument that in due course took place before Sir Richard Field, was the provision of the CD in July 2009 which contained the March Weighted Budget. The essential facts here are that on 1 July 2009, Ms Rana of Coren Troen asked Mr. Mantell for a copy of the CD which had already been provided to Nabarros, who were acting for LMS. On or about 3 July 2009, Mr. Mantell posted the CD (described on his ‘to do’ list as “Data Room Files”). On 6 July 2009, Corren Troen received the CD. It included a version of the March Weighted

Budget. On 8 July 2009, Mr Dempsey of Rosenblatt (acting for the Defendants) asked

Ms Rana to check the draft disclosure letter and also check whether the “‘data room materials’ are different to the CD of docs the other side have received”. On 10 July 2009 at 00:07am, Ms Rana produced an amended index to the disclosure letter which referred, amongst other things, to the “2009-10 budget”.

340.

The Claimants rely upon what they contend to be significant differences between the evidence given by the Defendants on the strike-out application in relation to the CD, and the evidence now given at trial. The Defendants’ case at the present trial has been, in summary: (i) that they had never intended to provide the March Weighted Budget to Ms. Rana, because it was regarded as part of the “Tenon suite of documents” which were proprietary to them, and (ii) the reason that it was provided to Ms. Rana in July 2009 was because of a mistake by Mr. Mantell. Mr. Mantell’s evidence in both his witness statement and his oral evidence was that he did not appreciate, in July 2009, that he had made this mistake. In Mr. Bennett’s third witness statement (served in December 2016), he states that he was not, at the time, aware that Mr. Mantell had provided a copy of the March Weighted Budget to Corren Troen. In his oral evidence, he was unclear as to whether he knew of this mistake prior to completion of the sale transaction in July 2009, saying that when he did discover that it had been included he remembered “being quite surprised”.

341.

Mr. Booth submitted that one possibility was that the disclosure in July 2009 had been deliberate, because the Defendants could see no way out of providing Corren Troen with the same documents as Nabarro. But this was not at the forefront of his submissions, and I consider it far more likely that the Defendants’ evidence on this issue is true; namely that a mistake was made by Mr. Mantell in the final days leading to the close of the transaction, at a time when there was a considerable amount to do. I think that this is far more probable, given the efforts previously made (on 20 April and again 3 June) not to give the EVs the March Weighted Budget. Indeed, the metadata shows that Mr. Mantell printed the March Weighted Budget on 2 June 2009, and I agree with the Claimants that this is likely to have been in anticipation of putting it in the Data Room. A decision must then have been made not to do so. Mr. Mantell in his evidence could not provide any alternative explanation of why he had printed this document on that day.

342.

The Claimants’ key point was that, in their evidence for the strike out hearing, the Defendants had given no indication at all that the March Weighted Budget had been disclosed by mistake. Instead, whilst RB1 did not expressly say that there had been deliberate disclosure, that was the clear implication of the case that was advanced both in the witness statement and, based upon that evidence, in counsel’s submissions to Sir Richard Field. It was also the way in which Sir Richard Field had understood the case that was being presented to him.

343.

On behalf of the Defendants, Mr. Choo Choy (who, unlike Mr. Booth, had appeared before Sir Richard Field) did not suggest that, fairly read, either RB1 or RB2, or his submissions on that occasion, indicated that the March Weighted Budget had been disclosed by mistake. He submitted, however, that there had been no intention to seek to mislead at all. Mr. Bennett’s first statement did not address why the Weighted Budget had been included on the 6 July CD. It made the point that the CD had in fact gone across to Corren Troen. It addressed the case that the Claimants were advancing, namely that the March Weighted Budget had been concealed, and that this was a very unlikely case of deceit. When the draft judgment had become available, the Defendants’ counsel had written to the judge, in a Note, to question the inclusion of a conclusion, in the draft judgment, that it “implicit in Mr. Choo Choy’s submissions is an acceptance that the Defendants were aware from 6 July 2009 onwards that the Weighted Budget should be disclosed to the European sellers”. Overall, it was submitted that this particular aspect of the strike out hearing could and should have been addressed more clearly. But Mr. Bennett did not seek to mislead, and the matter was raised with Sir Richard Field in the Note.

344.

I consider that the evidential case that was put forward by Mr. Bennett in RB1, and which was supported by Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell, was indeed misleading, as the Claimants submitted. All of the Defendants knew (at least if their evidence on this issue at trial is to be accepted) that the March Weighted Budget had been disclosed by mistake. But neither Mr. Bennett, nor any of the other Defendants, explained this to the court. RB1 clearly implied that there had been deliberate disclosure.

345.

For example, paragraphs 10, 12, and 62 of RB1 all suggest that there was deliberate disclosure:

“10. What is, I believe, so very remarkable about the Claimants’ case is that it is common ground that we did disclose the 2009/2010 Weighted Budget (which contained the allegedly relevant information) to the European Vendors (through their solicitors). It is common ground that we provided this information to the European Vendors’ solicitors, alongside the few remaining contracts which had not previously been disclosed because they had not been available, and that we did so nearly a week (on 6 July 2009) before the European Vendors (along with all the other parties) signed the sale agreement on 11 July 2009 (the “SPA”) (pages 41 to 98) – and in circumstances in which Updata Europe say they were under no time pressure to execute the SPA” (Emphasis in

original)

12. We believe we therefore face a completely fanciful claim. We (three honest individuals with unblemished careers) are alleged to have deliberately and fraudulently concealed the information contained in the 2009/10 Weighted Budget and Tenon Memorandum despite the fact that it is common ground that we in fact did disclose that very information to the European Vendors prior to the sale, and the 2009/10 Weighted Budget was then deliberately included in in the list of disclosed documents under the SPA by the European Vendors’ own solicitors. Not only does that make the Claimants’ case legally untenable, but I believe it is factually fanciful. It beggars belief that – had we been fraudulent – we would have provided this information to the European Vendors (and the Claimants have never explained how a case of Fraud is consistent with our actions).

62. But whatever may be the true position on reliance and inducement, it is my understanding and belief that in circumstances where the information which forms the basis of the Claimants’ allegations of non-disclosure and misrepresentation was in fact disclosed to the European Vendors and their legal advisers well in advance of the execution of the SPA, there cannot be sustainable case of nondisclosure or misrepresentation or of any intention on the Defendants’ part to conceal or mislead the European Vendors. The claims of fraud and conspiracy set out at paragraphs 83, 87 and 88 of the PoC should therefore be struck out; alternatively Summary Judgment should be entered in the Defendants’ favour in relation to those claims.

346.

So too does paragraph 49, where Mr. Bennett stated that “we naturally assumed that they kept their clients informed of all developments”. In the context of a witness statement relying upon the disclosure of the March Weighted Budget, this obviously implied that the Defendants assumed at the time that the contents of the March Weighted Budget would be brought to the attention of Updata Europe by Corren Troen. There were other passages, which I need not set out in full, which similarly suggested that the Defendants actively relied upon and considered that Corren Troen would check the documents and bring them to the EVs’ attention: see paragraphs 11, 57-58 and 60-61 of RB1.

347.

It seems to me that the proposition that there had been deliberate disclosure was central to the case that was advanced on the strike out application, and that this was how the judge understood the case. At [42] of his judgment, Sir Richard Field summarised Mr. Choo Choy’s argument as follows:

“Mr. Choo Choy QC for the Defendants submitted that the provision to the European Sellers’ solicitors, Corren Troen, of the 6 July CD, containing as it did a copy of the Weighted Budget, irrefutably demonstrated that the Defendants were not acting dishonestly at the relevant time in withholding the information it is alleged they fraudulently concealed and accordingly the fraud claim was bound to fail”

348.

Similarly, at [43], the judge records a further submission on behalf of the Defendants that they “would have been in no doubt that Corren Troen would become aware of the Weighted Budget before completion of the SPA”.

349.

This summary of the argument reflected submissions made at the hearing. Thus, at the end of the first day of the hearing, Mr. Choo Choy submitted:

“The idea that all of that was happening whilst we were simultaneously setting out to deceive them is extraordinary. Their case essentially boils down to this, that we have been fraudulently motivated all along, right until early July, then suddenly we’re asked for the CD that will reveal the we’ve been lying and acting fraudulently, and we readily provide it and what’s more, we tell their solicitors to check it, and they do check it. So we say that’s just fanciful.”

350.

Following this submission, Sir Richard Field had an important exchange with the Mr Choo Choy in which he asked directly for an explanation of why the March Weighted Budget was produced on 6 July CD but not before. He pointed out that this had not been explained in the Defendants’ evidence. Mr. Choo Choy responded to say that he would bear that in mind overnight.

351.

On the second day of the hearing, Sir Richard Field again pressed Mr. Choo Choy on why the March Weighted Budget was only disclosed on the 6 July CD and why its relevance was not highlighted when it was put on the CD. He was not told that the March Weighted Budget had only been disclosed by mistake. I emphasise that this is no criticism of Mr. Choo Choy, because he could only base his submissions on the evidence given by the Defendants, and this evidence was only consistent with deliberate disclosure. Towards the end of Mr. Choo Choy’s submissions, the judge indicated (and counsel accepted) that there were two points being advanced.

352.

The first point was whether the provision of the March Weighted Budget meant there was no misrepresentation, because any such misrepresentation had been corrected on 6 July. The first point was submitted to be an objective question. Counsel accepted that he had not emphasised that particular point in his submissions that morning. In due course the judge rightly rejected it because (see e.g. Peekay v ANZ Banking Group) the authorities say that any correction of a false representation must be made fairly and openly.

353.

The second point, however, was whether the provision of the March Weighted Budget meant that it was fanciful to say that the Defendants were dishonest. Counsel submitted that the question of dishonest intent was a subjective issue relating to the Defendants’ state of mind. It was therefore crucially important, in dealing with that second point, for the court to consider the Defendants’ intentions in providing the March Weighted Budget on the 6 July CD. Counsel submitted (at pages 66-67 of the transcript of Day 2):

“The importance of the distinction between those two points is that in relation to the question of intent it is relevant in my submission that, in the light of the objective communications that took place, it is very hard to see how it could realistically be said that we had reason to believe and did believe that the contents would not in fact be reviewed and appreciated, because unless you can establish that, how will my learned friend credibly challenge the defendants when they say, well, true we had refused to provide the information until then because we thought that that was part of our presentation to the potential investors, but when we were asked for the CD of all that had been provided to LMS we were prepared to give it, and we certainly didn’t intend to mislead? How will he credibly challenge that assertion if he is not able to say credibly that we had reason to believe either that the contents would not be reviewed incompetently, and that the point would simply be missed? We say that is at the very least a powerful point.”

354.

It seems to me that counsel’s submission on the second point clearly suggested both deliberate provision of the document and a belief on the part of the Defendants that

the document would be reviewed (as was suggested in the evidence which I have summarised above). It was this submission that was reflected in paragraphs [42] and [43] of the judge’s judgment as set out above.

355.

I agree with the Claimants that if the court had been told that the provision of the March Weighted Budget had been a mistake, the complexion of the Defendants’ application would have changed completely. Indeed, it is impossible to see how the accidental disclosure of this document could possibly be said to demonstrate irrefutably that the Defendants were not acting dishonestly at the relevant time. Accidental disclosure would be entirely consistent with fraud, and the case which was advanced to Sir Richard Field could not realistically have been made.

356.

I also agree with the Claimants that the Defendants’ failure to explain the true position as to accidental disclosure of the March Weighted Budget in their evidence, and their putting forward a case of deliberate disclosure, is a serious matter. It was in my judgment an attempt by the Defendants to mislead the court, and to obtain the ultimate remedy of striking out a claim in consequence. And even if it were too draconian a conclusion to say that there was an attempt to mislead the court, I would nevertheless conclude that the episode indicates that the Defendants are not witnesses on whose evidence the court can rely.

357.

I do not think that the Note sent to Sir Richard Field after the hearing is of any assistance to the Defendants. The Note did not explain that the March Weighted Budget had been disclosed by mistake: this is unsurprising, because there was nothing in the evidence to support such a proposition. The Note simply queried whether Sir Richard Field was correct to regard Mr. Choo Choy’s submissions as containing an implicit acceptance of the need to disclose the March Weighted Budget. Given that the case advanced was that there had been deliberate disclosure, with reliance being placed on the Defendants’ expectation that the material disclosed would be reviewed, one can well understand the judge’s conclusion in the first sentence of [45]: a sentence that he declined to change. But what matters for present purposes, in my view, is not what was implicit in the submissions, but rather what said in the witness evidence and explicitly in the submissions as summarised above.

Unblemished career of Mr. Mantell

358. In the evidence on the strike out application, Mr. Bennett stated in RB1 that the Defendants had “unblemished careers” (paragraph 12) and “unblemished professional business careers” (paragraph 26). Although neither Mr. Bennett nor Mr. Baldorino knew this, Mr. Mantell’s business career was not unblemished. In fact, Mr. Mantell had been disqualified as a director in 2014 for a period of four years for conduct which included preparing and signing false VAT returns. This related to a business concerning a bar/restaurant which had nothing to do with Updata UK. Although it was a separate business, Mr. Mantell knew that his career was not unblemished. Nevertheless, Mr. Mantell approved Mr. Bennett’s witness statement, which was served around 2 years from the time when the disqualification order was made, and during the time that it was current. Again, I consider that it is a serious matter for the court wrongly to be told on a strike-out application that a person has an unblemished professional career, when that is not the case. Again, it is a matter which I take into account in rejecting the integrity and reliability of Mr. Mantell.

F4: Other relevant conduct at the material time

359.

It will be apparent from my conclusions in Section D and E above that I consider that important statements made in both the 20 April and 3 June e-mails were not consistent with honest responses to the questions and issues raised. There is other evidence that, at that time, the Defendants did not want Updata Europe to know the picture of success in the UK and behaved with a lack of integrity towards Updata Europe.

360.

On 16 February 2009, Mr. Mantell sent an e-mail setting out recent “wins” and forecast “wins”. The e-mail was sent to Mr. Forsyth at Lloyd’s Bank, who were Updata Europe’s bankers. He did not, however, copy the e-mail to Mr. Holm, despite copying Mr. Holm into another e-mail sent to Lloyd’s the same day. Mr. Baldorino was also cross-examined, effectively in my view, on documents showing that contract wins in 2009 were reported internally at Updata UK, but not externally to Updata Europe.

361.

On 18 March 2009, very shortly after Tenon had been formally engaged, Mr. Mantell sent them a cash flow statement which had been sent to Lloyd’s bank (Updata UK’s bankers), showing a positive £425,000 year-end balance. The e-mail was copied to Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino. Mr. Mantell e-mailed Mr. Holm on the following day to say that due to the diligence work being carried out that week, “unfortunately I have not had time to produce the weekly cash flow forecast”. Again, the e-mail was copied to Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino. I agree with the Claimants that this was transparently dishonest conduct towards Mr. Holm, who was chairman of Updata UK and Updata Europe. Mr. Mantell had no explanation for this conduct in his evidence. To my mind, the obvious explanation is that none of the Defendants wanted Mr. Holm and Updata Europe to know about the very positive cash flow figures which had just been sent to Lloyd’s. Mr. Mantell, and the other defendants who saw both e-mails, were happy to mislead Mr. Holm in that regard.

F5: Specific arguments advanced by the Defendants

362.

In the course of this judgment I have already addressed many of the specific arguments raised by the Defendants, including my conclusions as to motive, the Defendants’ attitude to Updata Europe, the figures in the Updated Kelso Presentation and the “spoon-feeding” of Mr. Nielsen, and the general reliability of the Defendants. I have reviewed the Defendants’ arguments as summarised in Section F1 above, and in the light of the evidence as a whole I do not find any of the points made persuasive. I comment briefly on the principal points in so far as they have not already been addressed.

363.

Roll-over. It is true that offers were made by LMS to permit the EVs to roll over, to some extent, their shares. The first such offer was made after the 20 April representations were made. But it is right that the 3 June representations were made after LMS had proposed a roll-over. I do not think that the proposed roll-over is inconsistent with dishonest intent. The Defendants wanted the LMS offer to succeed, and their focus was on kicking the Danes into touch. Given that focus, I do not think that they gave any thought to the possible consequences of a roll-over in terms of information that might subsequently become available which might cast doubt on the statements that they were making. It would have required a degree of lateral thinking for the Defendants to apply their minds to a possible chain of events whereby the roll-

over would in due course enable Newwatch (and hence Mr. Johnsen) to obtain financial information about the later performance of the business, and that this would then lead to allegations in relation to statements made in the course of the negotiations leading to sale. I do not think that the Defendants thought this through.

364.

Spring 2009 structure. Mr. Bennett gave evidence about a possible structure that he explored, which would result in Updata Europe being left with 45 % of the shares.

Whilst I accept that this did happen, I do not consider that it assists. Mr. Bennett’s idea was in fact unworkable because, as he said, the “debt markets were basically shut”. Moreover, I do not consider that this was structure represented what the Defendants hoped and wanted to achieve, which was a successful MBO.

365.

Financial Overview not originally a dishonest document. I do not consider that this argument assists. The relevant questions in this case concern how matters stood at the time when the relevant representations were made. The fact that there may have been a projection, prepared some time earlier, which represented the UK management’s genuine views at that earlier time, does not in my view address the case advanced.

366.

Nor do I attach any significance to the fact that the evidence indicates that the assumptions or “backing sheets” underlying the Financial Overview appear to have been given to Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann. This was a point emphasised in the Defendants’ post-hearing brief written submissions, and was relied upon as negating dishonesty. Mr. Bennett’s evidence, however, was that he did not know how the

“worst”, “middle” and “best” case had been compiled or the assumptions on which those three cases were based. The point that the backing sheets had been provided was one which, as it seemed to me, emerged as a result of careful scrutiny of the documents in the course of the trial. But it was not something which played any part in the thinking of Mr. Bennett, nor any of the other Defendants, at the time. I therefore cannot see that it assists in negating the evidence of dishonesty.

367.

March Weighted Budget was believed to be essentially the same as the Tenon Memorandum. For reasons already given, I do not believe that the Defendants – either on 20 April or on 3 June – rationalised their approach by reference to the concept of a “Tenon suite of documents” which included the March Weighted Budget. In so far as the Defendants gave evidence to that effect (and there was no such evidence in relation to the 20 April 2009 e-mail), I regard that evidence as unreliable and do not accept it. The Tenon advice was clear cut. The Defendants’ rationale for nonproduction of the Weighted Budget (which Mr. Mantell had printed on 2 June in anticipation of including it in the Data Room) was quite simply that they did not want the EVs or Mr. Nielsen to know the real figures.

368.

Advice sought from Tenon. I did not see how this assisted the Defendants. Advice was sought from Tenon, but not in relation to the March Weighted Budget or in relation to the concept of a Tenon “suite of documents”. The advice received was clear. The Defendants decided to disregard it. The fact that advice was sought is, to my mind, beside the point in these circumstances.

369.

Mr. Hooft. Mr. Hooft did not see the 20 April e-mail. He did see the 3 June e-mail, which attached the Updated Kelso Presentation. No allegation of fraud was made against Mr. Hooft. Mr. Booth said in opening that the Claimants did not have the material to assert that LMS was party to the fraud. I did not think that this was surprising. Mr. Hooft’s evidence was that by the time of the 3 June e-mail he was focusing on LMS’s own analysis rather than the numbers in the Updated Kelso Presentation. Mr. Hooft was not sent, in draft, the proposed wording of the first part of the 3 June e-mail (“Hi Mads and Flemming …. Kind regards, Richard”). Nor was he sent, in advance, the Updated Kelso Presentation. He was not asked to advise on what should be said. He had become aware of the matters which were “worrying” the UK management, and specifically asked Tenon to advise as to the management’s responsibilities. Tenon’s advice, that ALL information should go into the data room, apart from the “report by Tenon”, was copied to Mr. Hooft.

370.

Against this background, I did not consider that the absence of an allegation of dishonesty against Mr. Hooft was of any assistance in deciding the state of mind of the Defendants. As Mr. Booth submitted in opening, Mr. Hooft was on the outside, and what he was told or made of the information that he was given was a matter for him. But that could not affect the question of what the Defendants were doing, what they understood and what they intended. I agree that knowledge or participation, or the lack thereof, by any other party does not impact on the key issues in the case.

371.

For the same reasons, I do not attach any significance to the absence of an allegation of fraud against Mr. Cowan or Tenon.

F6: Legal responsibility for the deceit

372. The two critical e-mails were sent by Mr. Bennett. There was no dispute that Mr. Bennett would, if deceit be proved, be legally responsible for the deceit. There was, however, an issue as to whether or not Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell could be held responsible for what Mr. Bennett said.

The Claimants’ case

373.

The Claimants’ case in their written opening submissions was that the representations were made by and on behalf of all of the Defendants. This case was cross-referenced to their case on unlawful means conspiracy, where the same facts were relied upon. The Claimants contended that the Defendants plainly acted in concert in pursuing the MBO; seeking to dispense with control by the Danish shareholders; and deciding what information was to be provided and what representations made. If any one of the three Defendants had not been party to the conspiracy, the campaign of nondisclosure and misrepresentation would have collapsed. Any one of them could have said “here is the accurate information you have asked for”; any one of them could have said “I’m afraid the figures in the Financial Overview and Updated Kelso Presentation are not accurate”; any one of them could have said “LMS and Tenon have received a lot more information than we have provided to you or to Mr Nielsen”; and any one of them could have sent an e-mail to EVs to notify them of the contract wins in early 2009. They did not do so because they were acting in concert to fraudulently withhold this information from EVs.

374.

In the course of his oral opening submissions, Mr. Booth explained that there was little distinction between the case of deceit and unlawful means conspiracy. His primary case was that the Defendants were “operating in tandem and they’re operating together and it’s inconceivable that a representation is put other than with the agreement and on behalf of the others because they are acting as a trio”. The only situation in which the unlawful means conspiracy argument potentially had an independent life was if, for some reason, there was an issue as regards authority for a particular representation. If that arose, then there would be a more relaxed test for unlawful means conspiracy; since the relevant question would be whether the Defendants were party to a conspiracy to use false information, and it would not be necessary to show who joined at which point. The essential case, however, was that Mr. Bennett was acting on behalf of all of them.

375.

In closing submissions, the Claimants put the case in the same way. As far as the 20 April e-mail was concerned, the Claimants contended that it was more likely than not that all of the Defendants discussed the information to send to Mr. Johnsen in response to his request. If Mr. Johnsen was going to be given information, it was important to all three Defendants that it was not the accurate information from the March Weighted Budget (because that would improve Mr. Johnsen’s chances of raising investment and may lead him to think the LMS offer was too low). And Mr. Bennett could not act alone without the significant risk that one of the other Defendants might give Mr. Johnsen the March Weighted Budget. Once they had decided to pursue the MBO, they were acting in concert, and had to do so. Hence, they stuck to the same position in the subsequent litigation. They were jointly represented because there is no actual/ potential conflict: they all acted together to pursue their desired MBO and the removal of Updata Europe.

376.

As far as concerns the 3 June e-mail, the Claimants submitted that the draft e-mail circulated on 1 June, and then sent later that day, must have been agreed by all the Defendants. This too must have been the case with the 3 June e-mail, which was copied to both Mr. Mantell and Mr. Baldorino. Indeed, the Claimants submitted (in the context of conspiracy) that by the time that the Defendants were preparing the information to give to Tenon, they must have agreed that they were going to use such up to date and true information for their own purposes and exclude the EVs from it. That is what they in fact did. The Claimants relied upon the failure of Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell to disassociate themselves from the 3 June e-mail, and the failure to act upon the clear advice of Tenon regarding disclosure.

377.

It was submitted that it was therefore fanciful to suggest that had Mr. Johnsen only contacted Mr. Baldorino or Mr. Mantell rather than Mr. Bennett, that on 20 April 2009 he would have received truthful information: the whole scheme would never have worked unless they had agreed to restrict that information, and the Defendants had all adhered faithfully to this.

The Defendants’ case

378.

The Defendants submitted (correctly) that in a multi-defendant case, it was necessary to establish the tort of deceit against all of the Defendants. A person could only be liable in deceit if he himself was fraudulent. They submitted that the only representor was Mr. Bennett. They accepted, based upon Cartwright paragraph 5-07, that a person could be treated as having made a representation “if he manifestly approves and adopts a representation made by a third party”. But they submitted in closing that there was no plea that Mr. Mantell or Mr. Baldorino manifestly approved or adopted

Mr. Bennett’s e-mails either, or what manifest matters were relied upon to support any such allegation of approval or adoption.

379.

As for the 20 April e-mail, the Defendants submitted that there was no evidence that either Mr. Mantell or Mr. Baldorino ever manifestly approved or adopted any representation made in the 20 April e-mail. The Defendants relied upon their evidence that they had not done so. They said that there was no evidence to suggest that the Defendants had conspiratorially got their heads together before Mr. Bennett replied to Mr. Johnsen the same day, or that they had involvement in the e-mail exchange.

380.

In relation to the 3 June e-mail, the Defendants submitted that Mr. Mantell and Mr. Baldorino cannot be said to have approved or adopted either the e-mail itself or the Updated Kelso Presentation. Neither of them considered or agreed it (or any drafts of it) in advance. They relied upon their evidence that they had not paid it much attention at the time, and submitted that there was no contemporaneous evidence that they did any of these things.

Analysis and conclusions

381.

I did not consider that there was any substance in the Defendants’ pleading point. This point was not taken, or at least not taken clearly, in the Defendants’ written or oral opening, notwithstanding that Mr. Booth had clearly explained the nature of the case that was being advanced. In any event, paragraphs 48 and 52 of the Re-Amended Particulars of Claim, and indeed the pleading as a whole, make it plain that the representations were alleged to have been made by each of the Defendants or on their behalf.

382.

There was, however, no dispute that the relevant question was whether Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell had manifestly approved and adopted the representation. This expression comes from the judgment of Viscount Maugham in Bradford Third Equitable Benefit Building Society v Borders [1941] 2 All ER 205, 211. I do not consider that there is any special significance to the word “manifestly”: it was used in that case to distinguish “mere silence, however morally wrong”. If I am satisfied that the relevant representations were made by Mr. Bennett with the agreement of the other Defendants, then this would be a case of manifest approval and adoption.

383.

I am satisfied that this is the case in relation to both the 20 April and 3 June e-mails, essentially for the reasons given by Mr. Booth as summarised above. The evidence in the case shows that, even before the 20 April e-mail, the Defendants were withholding information from Updata Europe, and that Mr. Mantell was willing positively to mislead Mr. Holm as to existence of a cash-flow statement: see Section F4 above. When Mr. Johnsen’s request for information came in on 20 April 2009, it is inherently probable that the response would have been discussed and agreed by Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell with Mr. Bennett. It was an important request, at a very sensitive time; i.e. around the time when the LMS offer had come in, Mr. Holm had indicated that Mr. Nielsen had been given exclusivity, and Mr. Johnsen was seeking outside investment. It was also somewhat unusual for Mr. Johnsen to ask for information. I consider it improbable that Mr. Bennett would not have told the other Defendants about the request, or that he would acted alone in deciding how to respond. This would indeed run the risk that a request might be made by another route (for example, Mr. Holm had a channel of communication with Mr. Mantell), and different information might be provided.

384.

I also have no doubt that both Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell were comfortable with Mr. Bennett providing figures, on 20 April, which were out of date and which did not represent their genuine and current views as to the prospects of the company. This is what Mr. Bennett did, again, when he sent the Updated Kelso Presentation on 3 June. Neither Mr. Baldorino or Mr. Mantell sought to disassociate themselves from this. This was so, notwithstanding that Mr. Mantell had printed a copy of the March Weighted Budget on 2 June, and notwithstanding the advice from Tenon. The provision of out-of-date and low figures on 3 June was therefore of a piece with the provision of out-of-date and low figures on 20 April. Indeed, the figures provided on 3 June were the “Best Case” figures taken from the Financial Overview provided on 20 April.

385.

Furthermore, the e-mail traffic (see Section E above) which had started with Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail on Friday 29 May, and which ended with the e-mail of 3 June, involved both Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Mantell – and the 3 June e-mail was copied to both of them. Mr. Baldorino was clearly interested in, indeed worried by, what Mr. Birkeland was asking for. Mr. Mantell had sent out the first response on 1 June. It is overwhelmingly likely that all aspects of Mr. Bennett’s response on 3 June were agreed by all of the Defendants.

386.

Accordingly, in my judgment all of the Defendants are responsible in law for the deceit arising from the representations in the 20 April and 3 June e-mails.

F7: Conspiracy

387.

These conclusions also mean that the claim in conspiracy also succeeds, although (as the Defendants’ written opening submissions contemplated) it adds nothing to the successful claim in deceit.

388.

The requirements of a claim for unlawful means conspiracy are:

i)

A combination or understanding between two or more people;

ii)

An intention to injure the claimant (albeit without the need for it to be the sole or predominant intention); iii) Unlawful acts carried out pursuant to the combination or understanding; and

iv) Loss to the claimant suffered as a consequence of those unlawful acts. (see Kuwait Oil Tanker v Al Bader [2000] 2 All ER (Comm) 271 at [108]).

389.

Subject to the question of causation of loss (see Section H below), it follows from my previous findings that these requirements are satisfied. The Defendants conspired together to make fraudulent representations to the EVs. Those were unlawful acts carried out pursuant to their combination or understanding. They did so for the ultimate purpose of enriching themselves and removing, if possible, Updata Europe as a shareholder.

390.

It was common ground, however, that issues as to causation and the measure of damages did not differ as between the claims in deceit and unlawful means conspiracy.

G: Inducement

The parties’ arguments in relation to the forecasts

391.

The Claimants relied upon the evidence of Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt in support of their case that the representations made in the 20 April e-mail, and the Updated Kelso Presentation, had induced them to sell to LMS on the terms which they did.

392.

The Defendants argued that these representations played no real or substantial part in inducing the EVs to sell. In his oral closing submissions, Mr. Choo Choy emphasised a number of points. There was no contemporaneous evidence of any reliance being placed either on the 20 April e-mail or on the 3 June e-mail or its attachments. It was not as if the EVs were actively considering the contents of those documents in terms of valuing their shares. There was no analysis of what the figures implied or meant in terms of what was offered. There was no evidence that Mr. Johnsen used the figures which he was given in any tangible way, to try to either assess the acceptability of the LMS offer or try to influence it. That explained why no-one on the Updata Europe side picked up the oddity about the contents of the Updated Kelso Presentation; specifically the fact that one of the slides indicated that new contracts had been won in 2009, but the “best case” figures were nevertheless exactly the same as those in the Financial Overview.

393.

The Defendants submitted that even if the lower figures being shown to Mr. Nielsen in the Updated Kelso Presentation had a causal impact, because higher figures might have led to a higher price being offered, that was not the same thing as the EVs relying on and being induced in any relevant legal way by the representations. This was a case where a sale process was already in train, and the only causal impact of the representations was on the course of the bidding process and the resulting price being offered. But it played no real and substantial part in the decision of the EVs as to whether to transact. Although Mr. Johnsen and others on the Updata Europe Board may have wanted to understand the basis of the offer being made by LMS, that did not mean that they were themselves relying on the information when deciding whether or not to sell; because the decision to sell was “essentially predetermined”, and the level of offer ultimately came through the bidding process. At best, therefore, the figures may have been given a cursory glance. The evidence as to what happened to the 3 June e-mail was consistent with this proposition: it was not forwarded either by Mr. Birkeland or Mr. Holm to the other members of the Board, and that is why there was no evidence of any Updata Europe Board discussion or consideration of the contents of the Updated Kelso Presentation.

394.

Ultimately, therefore, there was no real inducement by the forecasts themselves in terms of the ultimate sale, certainly in terms of the decision to sell, which had been essentially preordained or predetermined by the Bank’s course of action, or as to the price level.

Analysis and conclusions

395.

In my judgment, the representations made in the 20 April 2009 e-mail, and those in the Updated Kelso Presentation, were an inducing cause of Updata Europe entering into the transaction with LMS on the terms that it did. In so far as this is a necessary

legal requirement, I consider that they played a real and substantial part in Updata Europe’s decision. In this respect, the Claimants have the benefit of an evidential presumption which is difficult to rebut, and none of the points made by the Defendants has persuaded me to hold that it has been rebutted.

396.

In reaching these conclusions, I have taken into account the contemporaneous documents and the inherent probabilities, as well as the evidence of Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt. I start with the former.

The contemporaneous documents and inherent probabilities

397.

The starting point in my view is the 20 April e-mail itself. Mr. Johnsen was seeking out information a matter of days after the LMS offer: the offer had been made on Thursday 16 April and Mr. Johnsen asked for the information on the following Monday morning. The Defendants accepted the obvious fact that Mr. Johnsen was doing this in order to evaluate the LMS proposal. He was clearly doing this because the information requested was highly material within the context of what was happening at that time. Decisions as to whether to sell, and if so at what price, were going to be required by Updata Europe as matters moved forward, within an overall context where Mr. Nielsen was also on the scene and Mr. Johnsen was himself looking for outside investors. Accordingly, this is not a case where a representee is relying upon a chance remark made to him spontaneously in the course of discussions. It is a case where the representee has deliberately sought important information.

398.

For reasons already given, Mr. Bennett appreciated the materiality of the information that had been requested. He answered Mr. Johnsen’s e-mail dishonestly because he wanted, and perceived that he needed to, influence the course of the subsequent decision-making by Updata Europe in favour of the MBO. There is therefore nothing inherently improbable in Updata Europe contending that the 20 April e-mail materially influenced their subsequent and ultimate decision-making. That is exactly what Mr. Bennett understood would be the likely impact of providing the false information which he provided.

399.

It is true that there is no documentation showing an internal analysis of the figures by Updata Europe in the context of its subsequent decision-making. But the figures in the Financial Overview were not complex, and they could easily be compared to the figures which were set out in the LMS letter. It is inherently probable, in my view, that having asked specifically for the figures, Mr. Johnsen would have carefully considered what was provided, and discussed them with one or more of his colleagues at Updata Europe, and that this would have happened without internal analyses being prepared. As to the ease of comparison between the figures contained in the LMS offer and the Financial Overview: the LMS offer letter used an EBITDA figure of £ 1.5 million (derived from the February 2009 YTD figures), and this was in the same ballpark as the forecast for 2009 (£ 1,496,000), and rather better than the “Middle Case” forecast for 2009/10 (£ 1,393,000). I have no doubt that this is the conclusion that Mr. Bennett wanted Mr. Johnsen to draw. I shall come to Mr. Johnsen’s evidence in that regard in due course.

400.

Furthermore, there is other contemporaneous evidence that, consistent with the inherent probabilities, Updata Europe were indeed considering the financial information provided, and evaluating proposals from LMS in that context. On 20 May

2009, Mr. Birkeland sent an e-mail to Mr. Jorgensen, attaching a copy of the improved offer which LMS had made on 15 May 2009. The letter identified various objectives which Updata Europe was working to achieve including redeeming the current loan facilities with the Bank, redeeming the loan made by Vald. Nielsen, and achieving “maximum upside from the investment in England”. The e-mail also stated:

“We want to ensure that we are fully familiarized with the material upon which LMS has based their valuation. We would therefore ask to receive a copy of it, in order to evaluate their assumptions before we risk closing the door to other offers”.

401.

When this e-mail was sent, and as the chronology described above indicates, it was Mr. Nielsen who by this time (20 May 2009) was concerned to obtain relevant financial and other information and to be put on an equal footing with his competitor bidder. And it was on that day that Mr. Jorgensen wrote to Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Homann stating that it was “crucial that all interested buyers (the management at Updata UK and Jens Nielsen via their respective capital funds) are ensured equal conditions for the transaction”. He went on to recommend that “the data room be opened for both interested parties on the same conditions applicable from Tuesday 26 May 2009”. These matters then formed the backdrop to the meeting of 29 May, the 3 June e-mail and the Updated Kelso Presentation.

402.

The documentary evidence demonstrates that the Updated Kelso Presentation was emailed in the first instance to Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm, as an attachment to the 3 June e-mail. The attachment was then forwarded by Mr. Birkeland to Mr. Hildebrandt under cover of an e-mail dated 9 June 2009 in which he said that the “Business Presentation is attached, as agreed, that was updated last in May by UK Management”. It is in my view inherently probable that Mr. Hildebrandt would have considered this presentation, and indeed he was cross-examined on the basis that he did. The words of Mr. Birkeland’s e-mail “as agreed” suggest that there had been some discussion about it, prior to its being sent to Mr. Hildebrandt. It is also inherently probable that, if Mr. Hildebrandt had seen it, Mr. Johnsen would also have seen it at the same time.

403.

As described in Section E above, Mr. Bennett had not sent the Kelso Presentation in the form in which it existed, already amended, as at 3 June; i.e. the form in which it had been updated on 26 March 2009, prior to the meetings on that morning. He went to the trouble of reducing the figure shown for “Best Case” to the same figure as had been shown in the Financial Overview, even though management’s expectation at this time was that the results would be some millions of pounds higher. The reason that he did this was for the same reason that he had given false figures on 20 April. He again wanted, and perceived that he needed to, influence the course of the subsequent decision-making by Updata Europe in favour of the MBO. No doubt he also wanted to give false information, as to the management’s expectations, to Mr. Nielsen as well. But again, there is therefore nothing inherently improbable in Updata Europe contending that the projections in the Updated Kelso Presentation, which showed that there had been no change in the management’s “Best Case”, materially influenced their subsequent and ultimate decision-making. Again, that is exactly what Mr. Bennett understood would be the likely impact of providing the false information which he provided.

The witness evidence

404.

It is against this background that I come to consider the Claimants’ witness evidence on this issue. This evidence is relevant to the question of inducement, and the related question as to how Updata Europe understood the representations made.

405.

In his first witness statement (served in March 2016 in the context of the strike-out application), Mr. Johnsen referred to the 20 April e-mail, expresses the view that it was “simply false”, and states:

“At that time, I had no reason to doubt Richard or to think he would have lied to me; or that he would be providing different information to the buy-out team of which he was a member from the information he was providing to Mr. Nielsen. I took the Financial Overview to be UK Management’s most accurate projections of Updata UK’s future prospects”.

He then went on to describe his dealings with the Bank, saying that if he had had:

“different numbers to show the Bank, the decisions which were made would, I am certain, have been different

We were having weekly conversations with the Bank about how to address the situation, but we could only deal with things in light of the information which we had at the time, and that information was not optimistic.

With the information that Updata Europe was given by Updata UK, it had no option but to sell its shares, as it was not able to negotiate with the Bank for more time of for another solution… There were two potential bidders interested in the company, and from the information that we had about Updata UK there was no reason to delay its sale as on the forecasts we had it did not appear that a few months would make any difference”

406.

When addressing the work on the sale, he said that at the time that he received the offers from LMS and Mr. Nielsen, he thought that “Updata UK must have been very unsuccessful in winning contracts, and that we had simply been unfortunate in not being able to hold onto the company for long enough.”

407.

Mr. Johnsen was cross-examined on the issue of his understanding of what he was told, and more generally as to inducement: see in particular Day 4, pages 26-31, and 51-69. In relation to the 20 April e-mail, his evidence was that he thought that Mr. Bennett was giving “the fullest answer he could give me … I thought he was giving me the best information he had at that moment”. Mr. Johnsen said that when he sold, he was not happy but it was the best price that he could get in the circumstances:

“We had asked for the newest, most up-to-date forecast and budget … from management. We’ve asked them to show us on what basis the LMS bid was offered. And to the best of our knowledge at the time this was the most correct picture of the business’ performance both then and for the future”.

408.

He said that, looking at the forecasts, he didn’t see a “chance of persuading the Bank to wait longer”. He had hoped that the business was worth more, but “we were not able to show it”. They were looking at the “middle-case scenario at the time, which we thought would be the management’s best guess as to what would happen”. He did not attach significance to the figures for the best case, because a best case is not the basis on which anyone would be able to sell a company. In his “humble opinion, a best case scenario is not the starting point of a negotiation with anyone”. He had no reason to challenge the LMS valuation. He might have hoped for a multiple of 10, but Mr. Nielsen had mentioned a multiple of 5 and LMS had mentioned 6.1. He had no reason to:

“argue with that since, when we looked at the 2010 budget, it actually went down, so if we would have argued that we would rather look at the 2010 numbers, then we were asking for a lower bidding price”.

409.

His evidence was that although he had not been sent the Updated Kelso Presentation directly in an e-mail, he was shown a hard copy of it. He did not ask any questions because “we went to the financial projections and saw no change, so we did not see that there should be anything of big significance in what is mentioned on the other page”. (He was referring to the page where a number of 2009 contracts were shown). There had been no significant change, except that the middle case and worst case had been taken out. He agreed that Updata Europe had not visited the data room. But he said:

“If, my Lord, we had been told that there would be information that we did not already have, I can assure the court that we would have been there with as many people as we could send”.

410.

In re-examination, Mr. Johnsen was asked again about the 20 April e-mail, and said that his understanding was that “these numbers were the best available at the time and these were given to LMS”. He understood from the e-mail that Mr. Nielsen had used the projections as well as LMS. He thought that they represented the “up-to-date” numbers, the “true position of the company”.

411.

My assessment of Mr. Johnsen’s evidence is as follows, as already outlined in Section A. Generally speaking, Mr. Johnsen gave fair and short answers to the questions which he was asked, and his answers were generally consistent with the documentary evidence and the inherent probabilities. As will be apparent below, I have a significant reservation as to one aspect of his evidence in relation to the assignment. I also bear in mind that Mr. Johnsen is the central person behind the present litigation, which in one form or another has been in his mind since 2010, and that his evidence will inevitably be coloured by that. It is also important that some considerable time has passed since the events on which the witnesses were being questioned, with some of the cross-examination taking place on the 10th anniversary of the documents in question. But these matters do not cause me to reject the evidence, as summarised above, as to how Mr. Johnsen understood the information that he was given and how he reacted to it in terms of his decision-making. It seems to me that his evidence in that regard was consistent with the documentary evidence and the inherent probabilities, and I accept it. Indeed, it seems to me Mr. Johnsen was reacting to the statements made to him and information supplied by Mr. Bennett in exactly the way

that Mr. Bennett wanted him to react, so as to accomplish the goal of obtaining Updata Europe’s acceptance of the terms offered by LMS. In those circumstances, it would be a surprising conclusion to say that there was no inducement.

412.

Mr. Johnsen’s evidence was in material respects corroborated by Mr. Hildebrandt. His evidence in his first witness statement did not specifically address the 20 April e-mail and Financial Overview, or the Updated Kelso Presentation. He explained that he was reluctant to sell Updata UK, and that his preferred solution was to get a new investor for Updata Europe. He expressed the view that if Updata Europe had known the true financial position of Updata UK, he had no doubt that Mr. Jorgensen would have been prepared to extend the terms of Updata Europe’s loan. He was convinced that if he had been able to provide the information in the March Weighted Budget to Mr. Jorgensen, “it would not have been necessary to sell Updata UK”.

413.

His evidence in cross-examination and re-examination was focused more directly on the 20 April e-mail, the Financial Overview, and the Updated Kelso Presentation. His evidence in cross-examination was that he had seen the 20 April e-mail and the Financial Overview, which he described as containing a “profit warning” for 2009; in that the forecast was £ 1,496 million against a budget of £ 1,695 million. He said in the following year, “suddenly the EBITDA was down to £ 1.39 something”, and that therefore there was no point trying to rely upon that figure in a negotiation:

“you don’t want to go and tell the bidder and say to them, “Please can you look into the year .. to the next year because the figures are lower

I’m not totally unhappy with the multiple that was put on, that was 6.1. But if you put it on EBITDA that was less than expected, then of course you get a lower price”.

414.

He confirmed (indeed accepted) in cross-examination that he had seen the Updated Kelso Presentation in June 2009, because it was sent to him under cover of an e-mail from Mr. Birkeland. He agreed that he would have read that presentation at the time. After it was put to him that he did not think that the Updated Kelso Presentation was “a big issue at the time”, there was the following evidence and exchange:

“A. No, because there didn’t seem to be any change in the value of the company which is what the board was looking at at the time. We were only looking at the overall figures to see is there any chance we can change the EBITDA to get a better price on the company? That is what you use – you use a multiple on the EBITDA and if the EBITDA stays the same, you don’t have any argument to go out and get a higher price.

Q. Am I right also, Mr Hildebrant, that at that point in time you never approached UK management to try to develop and EBITDA case with them as you had done when – in late 2008 when you were trying to impress Rudersdal and also seeking outside investment?

A. My Lord, sorry – no, my Lord, I did not do that. In the case in 2008 that was for a specific municipal. In June 2009, I believed of course that we would get the right figures from the UK management. I would not believe that they were holding back information from us. They got their salary and we’re on – of course I trusted them.”

415.

He was asked about the Updated Kelso Presentation in re-examination. His evidence was that “we typically look at the EBITDA figures”, and that it is typical to apply a multiple to multiply EBITDA with a factor to give an indication of the value of the company. He saw the best case figure of £ 3.348 million in the Updated Kelso Presentation, and this:

“led me to say that there had been no change since we saw the financial review in – on 20 April where it was exactly the same figure in that document and what they just have left out here is the middle case and the lower case scenario.

… I could not see any changes based on these figures. I would expect it would be exactly as we were told on 20 April. There was no other indication, my Lord.”

416.

Again, I accept the oral evidence that Mr. Hildebrandt gave on these issues. Mr. Hildebrandt in my view throughout his evidence sought to give careful and honest answers to the questions raised. This was demonstrated when, in the course of crossexamination on Day 6, he explained the very real difficulties that there would have been in finding any other bank prepared to refinance the Bank; an answer which, in my view, made one aspect of the Claimants’ case on causation untenable. I appreciate that he too is a major protagonist in this litigation, and that his evidence must therefore be viewed carefully with close regard to his motives. Again, however, it seems to me that his evidence, as to how he understood and reacted to the statements and figures provided by Mr. Bennett and Updata UK, was consistent with the inherent probabilities and the documentary evidence. (I say nothing at this stage on the causation question addressed in Mr. Hildebrandt’s witness statement as to how Mr. Jorgensen would have reacted to different information).

417.

I therefore accept that Mr. Hildebrandt trusted the figures which he was given, believing that he would “get the right figures”. I accept that the figures provided on 20 April, and then in the Updated Kelso Presentation, were considered by Updata Europe when evaluating the offers made by LMS and in their decision as to what to do. I accept that the Updated Kelso Presentation was understood to be showing that there was no improvement on the figures previously provided, and have no doubt that this is precisely what Mr. Bennett wanted Updata Europe to understand. Overall, in the light of the evidence of Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt, I accept that Updata Europe understood from the figures that there was no basis for doing anything other than accepting the LMS offer. They also recognised that they could not realistically challenge it as being at an undervalue, since Updata Europe had no material to indicate that a valuation based on EBITDA of £ 1.5 million (with a multiplier of 6.1 which was reasonable) was inappropriate. I do not accept that there was no inducement because the course of events was in some way predetermined or preordained. The process leading to sale was a dynamic one, with Updata Europe ultimately having to decide whether or not to accept the LMS offer. The representations were designed to influence Updata Europe’s decision-making in that process and ultimately did so.

418.

My conclusions as to inducement are reinforced by the fact that the evidence indicates that as soon as Mr. Johnsen started to receive a reasonable amount of information as to the performance of Updata UK in 2010, his reaction was that he had been misled. Advice was taken from counsel in the Spring of 2010, and steps were then taken in 2010 in connection with the proposed assignment which contemplated the issue of proceedings of the present kind. This is not therefore a case where Mr. Johnsen or Mr. Hildebrandt were reacting with remorse when they learned of the very successful sale to Capita in 2014.

419.

A considerable amount of cross-examination of the Claimants’ witnesses, in particular Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt, was directed towards the proposition that they should have asked further questions in the light of the information that had been received. This essential point was relied upon by the Defendants in various different ways and contexts, for example:

a)

Reliance was placed upon an inference that Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann had been given, in March 2009, the assumptions on which the various 2009/10 figures in the Financial Overview had been based. I agree that this reference is consistent with later evidence concerning questions which Mr. Iversen asked when he visited the Data Room. It was submitted that it would have been apparent from those assumptions that the “worst case” numbers were extremely pessimistic, as indeed were the “middle case” numbers, and that Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Homann would have recognised this.

b)

The 3 June e-mail from Mr. Bennett contained an offer to answer any further questions. No further questions were asked by Mr. Holm, to whom the e-mail was sent.

c)

One of the slides in the Updated Kelso Presentation, which had indeed been updated in this respect, identified a number of contracts concluded in 2009, albeit without giving any financial details of the size of those contracts or the date when they would be fulfilled so as to impact the company’s financial results. Updata Europe asked no questions about those contracts.

d)

It was obvious that the “best case” figure in the Updated Kelso Presentation was the same as the Financial Overview. Questions should have been asked in view of the implausibility of there being no change in the “best case” since the March figures, particularly bearing in mind the new contracts identified earlier in the presentation.

420.

The Defendants therefore suggested that Updata Europe were not really interested in or did not rely upon the information that they were given. Indeed, the point was developed even further, by reference to Mr. Nielsen’s witness statement, where he

said that he did not believe that he had been given the same information as had been given to LMS.

421.

I agree with the Claimants’ submission that none of these ways of putting the case is of any assistance to the Defendants. It is well established that it is no answer to a claim in fraud that the representee could have discovered the falsity of the statement by exercising reasonable care and skill. I also agree that with the Claimants that it does not lie in the Defendants’ mouth to contend that further questions should have been asked in order to elicit the true information in circumstances where: (i) an explicit request for up-to-date information was made on 20 April and Updata Europe was then given false information, and (ii) further false information was given in the Updated Kelso Presentation, which was produced in the context of the Defendants being told of the need for equality of information. Similarly, whilst Mr. Nielsen may well have distrusted the information that he was given by the Defendants, the question is whether or not Updata Europe relied upon the representations that were made. That question is not answered by demonstrating that Mr. Nielsen was suspicious that information was withheld from him, particularly in circumstances where the evidence of both Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt was to the effect that they trusted the UK management to give them the latest figures. Moreover, even if Mr. Nielsen’s view were relevant, Hayward v Zurich demonstrates that a representee may distrust a representation, but nevertheless be induced by it.

422.

Some reliance was placed by the Defendants on evidence from Mr. Holm to the effect that: he could not understand why the figures in the Financial Overview were the same as in the Kelso presentation, which he thought that he had seen in October 2008; that there was something to look into because there were now some new contracts; and that it was left to Mr. Birkeland and others to do this, because Mr. Holm was not in negotiation with LMS at that point and it was not his job to do this. Mr. Holm’s evidence in this regard was somewhat confused. He had clearly not seen the £ 3.348 million figure in any prior Kelso Presentation. Nor had he seen the Financial Overview in October 2008 (as he indicated in re-examination). I think that Mr. Holm’s evidence as to his reaction to the figures is likely to be mistaken. But in any event, there was nothing in this evidence which leads me to reject the evidence of Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt as to inducement. There was no suggestion that Mr. Holm raised the issue of the figures with them. Moreover, I think that the reliance placed by the Defendants on Mr. Holm’s evidence was just another way of putting the argument that the representee could or should have discovered the falsity of the statement by exercising reasonable care and skill. I reject this argument for the reasons already given.

423.

I have hitherto focused on inducement in the context of the representations relating to the figures that were provided. There is a further question of inducement in the context of the representation concerning equality of information. I consider that this too was an inducing cause of Updata Europe entering into the transaction, and (in so far as necessary) that it played a real and substantial part in the decision. The background to this representation is described in Section E. The question of equality of information was a matter of considerable importance to the Bank, Mr. Birkeland and Updata Europe, including in particular Mr. Holm who was personally involved in the discussions at the end of May. It was pursued by Mr. Birkeland with a degree of vigour in late May and early June. His e-mails at the end of May 2009 indicate how important it was to him. Both Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Holm understood, once they had received the 3 June e-mail, that Updata UK’s management had given the confirmation which they required. I accept Mr. Holm’s evidence in his witness statement that he had “no reason to doubt Mr. Bennett’s statement that the information in the Data Room was the same as the information which had been provided to Tenon and LMS, and I proceeded throughout the sale process on the basis that this was correct”. Mr.

Birkeland’s evidence was that when he read the e-mail, he felt that “they would provide all relevant information in the data room. The only thing not being there was of course the information memorandum itself but everything else would be there. That is how I read it”. I accept that evidence, which in my view is confirmed by the fact that, although there had been important correspondence and discussion about equality of information prior to the 3 June e-mail, that correspondence and discussion ceases thereafter. There was nothing, in my view, to rebut the presumption of inducement in relation to this representation.

424.

It follows that the Claimants succeed on the issues as to how the representations were understood, and on the issue of inducement in relation to the 20 April e-mail and the Updated Kelso Presentation.

H: Causation and Loss

H1: The shape of the parties’ arguments

425.

Vald. Nielsen, as Updata Europe’s assignee, sought damages on alternative bases. Its primary case was that damages should be assessed by reference to the market value of the shares at the date when the sale took place (July 2009). It was at that time that Updata Europe parted with its shares in Updata UK at an undervalue in consequence of the deceit, and applying the principles in Smith New Court Securities Ltd. v Citibank N.A. damages should be assessed as at that date, subject only to a possible later alternative date. The Claimants submitted that in a case where the victim had been deprived of his shares as a result of fraud, the court should assume that the shares could have been sold for their true value.

426.

Alternatively, damages were sought by reference to their higher value in 2014 when the sale to Capita took place. This was on the basis, as the Claimants submitted, that “but for the fraud, Updata Europe would have persuaded the Bank to allow it to retain its shares” and would then have sold them to Capita at the price in fact paid by Capita. There were two legal bases which led to the conclusion that the later date was appropriate.

427.

First, Smith New Court showed that it was open to the court to use a date other than the date of sale, where that was appropriate on the facts in order to reflect the real loss suffered by the victim of deceit. Secondly, the same result was reached by applying an analysis based on “loss of a chance”. The factual reasons for adopting this approach to damages were in essence as follows. Updata Europe did not want to sell its shares in Updata UK in 2009, but was admittedly under some pressure from the Bank to do so in order to reduce its significant indebtedness. If the representations had not been made, Updata Europe would have come to learn of the true success of Updata UK. Updata Europe would then have been able to persuade the Bank that a sale in 2009 was not necessary, or at least there was a real and substantial chance of so doing. This was because of the prospect of obtaining substantial dividends from Updata

UK’s very positive cash-flow, and more generally because the Bank would have been able to see how valuable the company was at that time and that it would become even more valuable over time.

428.

The Defendants submitted that, on a proper analysis of the facts, Updata Europe had suffered no loss. The Bank had decided in early 2009 that the indebtedness had to be eliminated or at least very significantly reduced, and therefore that outside investment needed to be found. Updata Europe was under enormous pressure from the Bank, which was calling the shots in relation to how Updata Europe should act. Thus it was the Bank that compelled Updata Europe to deal with Mr. Nielsen in early 2009, and it was the Bank that set up the bidding process once LMS were on the scene in April 2009. Even if there had been no misrepresentations, that bidding process would have played out in the same way and on the same timescale as it did. Updata Europe had no room for manoeuvre, and even if there had been no misrepresentations they would have been in the same position as they ultimately found themselves; i.e. with the same offer from LMS which was made in June 2009, which was far more certain and beneficial than anything that Mr. Nielsen had come up with. If Updata Europe had not itself been willing to accept that offer, then the Bank would have compelled them to do so. Accordingly, no loss was suffered; because Updata Europe would, even if there had been no misrepresentations, have sold to LMS in July 2009 on the same terms.

429.

The Defendants’ argument on causation, if accepted, therefore disposed of both ways in which Vald. Nielsen advanced its case for damages. But even if this argument were not accepted in its totality, any claim for damages would be minimal. The Defendants contended that the alternative (2014 Capita) case was unsustainable, because there was no way in which the Bank would have allowed Updata Europe to postpone a sale beyond September 2009. The Bank wanted repayment and hard cash, not promises of jam tomorrow. As far as the primary (2009 “market value”) case was concerned, it was not appropriate on the facts of the present case to look at theoretical market value, whatever the experts might have said on that topic. This was a case where the Bank was, in practical terms, forcing a sale; a fact which itself inevitably depresses value. By May 2009, the sale procedures were in place, with two bidders in the frame. There was no real possibility of obtaining a higher price from LMS: Mr Hooft’s evidence was that LMS had reached its limit, with the only possibility being a fractional increase. Mr. Nielsen had not been able to show hard cash, and there were other problems which attended his whole approach. In particular he or his consortium were looking to invest in the parent company (Updata Europe), rather than simply buying Updata UK. Updata Europe had not enabled Mr. Nielsen to carry out proper due diligence in relation to Updata Europe, because no data room had been established in Denmark. Accordingly, Mr. Nielsen and his consortium would never have come up with an acceptable offer. These were the only two realistic purchasers in the frame, and there was therefore no prospect of obtaining further monies from them. It was speculative to think that other purchasers, willing to pay market value or any higher price than LMS, might exist; particularly bearing in mind that Mr. Johnsen had spent some considerable time looking for outside investors, but without success.

430.

As far as the law is concerned, it was common ground that the question of causation was a separate legal question from the issue of inducement. Whilst there might be an overlap on the facts relevant to both questions, a favourable answer to the Claimants on inducement did not enable the Claimants to bypass the question of causation. The Defendants referred to a number of authorities in support of that proposition, including the following passage in Chitty on Contracts 33rd edition, paragraph 7-039:

“It seems to be the normal rule that, where a party has entered a contract after a misrepresentation has been made to him, he will not have a remedy unless he would not have entered the contract (or at least not on the same terms) but for the misrepresentation. Certainly this is the case when the misrepresentee claims damages in tort for negligent misstatement; and it seems also to be required if damages are claimed for fraud.”

431.

The Defendants also cited the analysis of Doyle CJ in an Australian case, Copping v ANZ McCaughan Ltd (1997) 67 SASR 525, 539:

“It is sufficient if the relevant loss can be said to be caused by the representation, and it is not necessary to show that the loss is attributable to that which made the representation wrongful. In that sense the test is a relatively generous one, in that the misrepresenting party may have thrown upon it risks unrelated to the representation. But there is still the requirement that the loss flow from the representation, and it seems to me impossible to conclude that it does so flow if one concludes that quite apart from the representation the appellant would have entered into a transaction bringing with it the very risk which eventuated in the relevant transaction and which can be seen as the cause of the loss which the appellant seeks to recover. There may be an element of impression in all this.”

432.

In the light of these authorities, it appeared to be common ground that one relevant factual question on causation was whether Updata Europe could prove that, but for the misrepresentation, it would not have entered into the contract with LMS on the same terms that it did. Where a question arose as to what Updata Europe would or would not have done, it was also common ground that the question was to be resolved on the balance of probabilities.

433.

There was, however, disagreement as to whether the principles relating to “loss of a chance” played any part in the causation analysis. Mr. Booth submitted that once this factual question was resolved in his clients’ favour, the only remaining question would be the assessment of loss. “Loss of a chance” principles had no role to play in resolving the causation question, which involved looking at the question of whether Updata Europe would, in 2009, have entered into the contract with LMS on the same terms. In the present case, the assessment of loss was straightforward and (subject only to the question of whether loss should be assessed in 2014) simply involved looking at the true or market value of the shareholding at the time of sale. Mr. Booth submitted it was not necessary or appropriate to look beyond the assessment of market value. Cases such as Parabola Investments Ltd. v Browallia Cal Ltd. [2010] EWCA Civ 486 and Vasiliou v Hajigeorgiou [2010] EWCA Civ 1475 showed that once the causation threshold had been passed, the only remaining matter was to assess loss. The only place where loss of chance had any potential role to play was the alternative (2014) case; since Mr. Booth accepted that Updata Europe’s ability to hold

on to their shares after 2009 would have depended upon the Bank’s willingness to allow them to do so, and that this was a claim for loss of opportunity.

434.

Mr. Choo Choy accepted in his oral submissions that the question of “whether or not Updata Europe would have done this, that or the other” was a question to be approached on the balance of probabilities. However, he also submitted that on the facts of the present case, loss of a chance came into the causation analysis; in particular, because the Bank (a third party) played a critical part in the chain of causation. Thus, the question of whether Updata Europe would have entered into the contract with LMS on the same terms involved considering the key question of whether the Bank would have forced them to do so. He submitted that, applying the principles in the seminal decision in Allied Maples v Simmons v Simmons [1995] 1 W.L.R. 1602, this had to be assessed on the basis of loss of a chance. He submitted that the question of whether there would have been a transaction with LMS was essentially dependent on the actions of the Bank. Where the causal chain relied upon by the Claimant “as a matter of fact involves consideration of what a third party would have done, it is not permissible to approach it otherwise than on the basis of a loss of a chance”.

435.

However, on the Defendants’ case it was not simply the position of the Bank that was relevant to the question of causation. Mr. Choo Choy submitted that the causal theory in relation to the 2009 case involved consideration of the actions of multiple third parties: not only what the Bank would have done, but also what LMS might have done, or what Mr. Nielsen might have done or what e-Kong might have done. The court therefore requires consideration of the “substantiality” of the chance in relation to the relevant acts of each of those third parties. Relying upon the recent decision of Bryan J in Assetco PLC v Grant Thornton UK LLP [2019] EWHC 150, Mr. Choo Choy submitted that the court should apply a mathematical approach of multiplying the probabilities. The Defendants’ submission, ultimately, was that there was no real or substantial chance of any offer being made at a higher price than that offered by LMS.

436.

I will now set out my findings as to the factual context in which these arguments arise, before summarising the arguments in greater detail.

H2: The facts relevant to the causation and loss arguments

437.

It is not necessary to trace in detail the history of Updata Europe’s financial difficulties before 2009. That such difficulties existed was clear on the evidence, and was reflected in the need for Mr. Johnsen to approach his grandmother for a loan in early 2008. She mortgaged her house in order to make a loan to Vald. Nielsen, and the funds were then used to repay some monies owed to the Bank and for which the Bank was pressing at that time. In return, Vald. Nielsen was given a priority interest in

Updata Europe’s shares in Updata UK. This interest, however, ranked behind the Bank’s first priority interest in respect of larger debts which were owed by Updata Europe.

438.

By the middle of 2008 Updata Europe owed around DKK 26 million to the Bank and DKK 14 million to Vald. Nielsen. Updata Europe had also guaranteed Updata Denmark’s debts of around DKK 16 million. Mr. Johnsen accepted that Updata

Europe was under serious financial pressure in 2008, and that he had been forced to

reach out to family to secure further funding for the group. There appears to have been a general view in late 2008 that Updata Europe required around DKK 25-35 million as a capital injection.

439.

On 2 January 2009 Mr. Homann wrote a note to Mr. Jorgensen stating that the group’s liquidity need was DKK 10 million. The Bank was not prepared to lend that sum, as Mr. Jorgensen made clear in his evidence. There is no dispute that, by early 2009, Updata Europe had (as Mr. Jorgensen put it) “no money” and did not appear to be able to pay the interest on the Bank’s loans. In that context, the Bank was understandably concerned. But Mr. Jorgensen explained that he had no interest in “bankrupting” Updata, since this was not in the Bank’s interest. Accordingly, notwithstanding the indebtedness, Mr. Jorgensen did not do so, and did not in fact enforce any of the Bank’s rights under its pledges.

440.

The reason that Mr. Homann had written the above note to Mr. Jorgensen on 2 January 2009 was that Mr. Homann was finalising Updata Europe’s accounts for 2007/8, and the issue arose as to whether or not KPMG could certify Updata Europe as being a going concern. For that purpose, Updata Europe needed the Bank to confirm that it would not immediately demand repayment of the outstanding debt. Mr.

Homann also reported Mr. Nielsen’s interest in a possible investment or acquisition: he had been “chasing persistently” and wanted exclusivity for a period.

441.

Discussions followed between Mr. Homann and Mr. Jorgensen, and an agreement was reached on a way forward, enabling Mr. Homann to sign off on the accounts. This was recorded in an exchange of e-mails on 6 January 2009. Mr. Jorgensen agreed that the Bank’s engagement to both Updata Denmark and Updata Europe could be terminated at the earliest on 30 September 2009. But the latter engagement was subject to Updata Europe’s obligation to (in translation):

“…withdraw the maximum interim dividend in the English subsidiary, so the accrued interest from the bank is paid as a minimum, that transport of these dividends is noted in favour of Sparekassen, plus that the efforts with regards to capital injection are intensified”.

442.

The Bank was to be kept informed of the operation and liquidity of the companies on an ongoing basis, as well as the efforts to supply new capital. Mr. Jorgensen added the following terms to those which Mr. Homann had recorded:

“Termination will however be possible if the engagement with Sparekassen Lolland A/S is in default – see the provisions in relation to this

When it comes to capital supply, Sparekassen reserves the right to have the deciding influence on investor as well as invested amount.”

443.

Accordingly, the Bank was at that stage prepared to give Updata Europe some latitude in that, subject to the agreed other terms, Updata Europe had until September before the Bank carried out an earlier threat (as described in Updata Europe’s internal documents) to “pull the plug”. Accordingly, the Bank did not take an uncompromising or inflexible attitude at that time, consistent with Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence that he did not want to bankrupt Updata. This flexibility became known to Mr. Nyegaard, who reported to Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett on 25 March 2009 that: “from what I understand they have until September before the bank gets serious on them – at least that’s the last thing I heard on the matter”. In due course, the Bank was to prove to be flexible in relation to the requirement to be paid a dividend. In May 2009, by which time no dividend had been declared, an e-mail from Mr. Birkeland to the Board of Updata Europe records Mr. Jorgensen having agreed to have no objections to the board deciding to postpone the decision as to the declaration of an interim dividend, provided that it was reconsidered in a month’s time. By that time, of course, the possibility of a sale of Updata UK or investment in Updata Europe was very much a possibility, with both Mr. Nielsen and LMS on the scene.

444.

I note one other feature of the Bank’s decision in early January 2009. As the Defendants pointed out, the Bank was at that stage given quite optimistic forecasts for Updata UK: the equivalent of EBITDA £ 3.379 million for the 2008/2009, and £7.836 million for 2009/2010. Nevertheless, Mr. Jorgensen was, as he confirmed in his evidence, looking to reduce the debt so that the bank had a lower risk, and was only prepared to give an extension until September.

445.

On 6 January 2009, Mr. Homann was able to sign off Updata Europe’s accounts. It was a going concern, but the auditor’s report noted that there were conditions which governed the company’s ability to continue operating. The company’s continued operations were “dependent on raising additional financing, on distributing dividends from the English subsidiary and on not terminating business with the company’s bankers”.

446.

By this time (early January 2009), Mr. Johnsen had himself been looking for outside investors but without success. One such investor was a Mr. Klobucar of a firm called Moore Capital. Mr. Klobucar was a friend of Mr. Nyegaard, who had introduced Mr. Johnsen to him. A meeting had taken place towards the end of 2008. Mr. Johnsen had apparently valued the business at £ 20 million, but Mr. Klobucar had not been interested. His e-mail to Mr. Nyegaard on 20 November 2008, in the midst of the global financial crisis, said that: “There is ZERO cash out there. He won’t get a penny, at least not at that valuation”.

447.

However, by early January 2009, one potential investor, Mr. Nielsen, was on the scene. Mr. Nielsen sent an expression of interest to Mr. Jorgensen on 16 January 2009. He said that he anticipated placing a bid of £ 5 million for Updata UK, with a possible bid for Updata Europe dependent upon due diligence. He asked Mr. Jorgensen for exclusivity. The bid was addressed to the shareholders of Updata Europe, but was marked for the attention of Mr. Jorgensen at the Bank. It was not actually sent to Updata Europe by Mr. Nielsen; because Mr. Nielsen took the view that the Bank was in a controlling position in relation to the sale, since he understood the shares in Updata UK had been pledged to it. 448. Mr. Jorgensen did not grant exclusivity himself. He passed Mr. Nielsen’s bid to Mr. Holm. Mr. Jorgensen’s letter dated 2 February to Mr. Holm expressed dissatisfaction that he had yet to receive an explanation as to how outstanding interest would be paid, and he asked for clarification as to the progress of certain efforts to increase capital. The letter concluded by Mr. Jorgensen expressing his expectation that the Boards of

Updata Europe and Updata Denmark should “commit to the desires of the private equity fund” whom Mr. Jorgensen understood Mr. Nielsen to represent. Mr. Holm forwarded the letter to the other members of the board of Updata Europe, stating that in his opinion “there’s nothing else to do but take up initial negotiations with Jens

Nielsen”. Mr. Johnsen’s evidence was that if the Bank told them to talk to Mr. Nielsen they could not in practice refuse; because the Bank’s possible next step would be to “require the votes and make it happen anyway”. This was a reference to the potential exercise by the Bank of voting rights under the pledge.

449.

On 6 March 2009, the Bank wrote to Mr. Nielsen, and to Mr. Medhurst (who was a corporate finance consultant assisting Mr. Nielsen). The letter granted Mr. Nielsen a 5-week period to carry out due diligence and then two further working weeks to finalise his bid. The Defendants submitted that it was significant that it was the Bank which demanded and then gave Mr. Nielsen exclusivity, and that this showed that the Bank was intent on and able to control the sales process and force Updata Europe to bend to its wishes. I agree that it is clear that Mr. Jorgensen wanted Updata Europe to co-operate with Mr. Nielsen with a view to a possible deal. It is also clear that Updata Europe recognised that, as Mr. Holm had put it, there was “nothing else to do”. But I do not consider that the correspondence indicates, in so far as this was being suggested, that the Bank was acting unilaterally, or against any express wishes of

Updata Europe. The opening paragraph of Mr. Jorgensen’s letter stated that both the Bank “and the shareholders of Updata Europe A/S have accepted that a due diligence process can be initiated by you”. It would therefore seem that, as one would expect, Mr. Jorgensen had sought and obtained Updata Europe’s agreement prior to sending that letter. I did not consider that there was anything in the documents, relating to the course of the bidding process either at that time or subsequently, which showed the Bank overriding the wishes of Updata Europe at any stage in the events leading to the ultimate sale.

450.

By mid-April 2009, the Bank was aware of the interest of LMS and the 14 April meeting (to which reference has already been made) took place in Denmark. In the present context, the significance of the meeting is that it is the only meeting which LMS attended with the Bank, and there was nothing at all to indicate that it would be the Bank that would decide whether or not LMS’s offer was acceptable. A handwritten note of Mr. Baldorino dated 8 April recorded that: “Bank would push LMS towards the board. Board would then make a yes or no”.

451.

This is what happened. No deal was made with the Bank at that meeting. LMS and the

Defendants understood from that point, if not before, that it was Updata Europe’s decision as to whether it was willing to agree terms with LMS. Apart from the meeting on 14 April 2009, LMS had almost no contact with the Bank. Their offer letters were addressed to Updata Europe. The response to their first offer on 20 April 2009 came from Mr. Holm on behalf of the Updata Europe Board. It was this which led to the flurry of activity on the morning of 20 April 2009: see Section D above.

LMS’s negotiations and discussions were with representatives of Updata Europe (Mr. Johnsen, Mr Holm and Mr. Birkeland), not the Bank. When their first offer was not accepted, they directed their efforts at persuading Updata Europe (and Mr. Johnsen in particular) to look more favourably on their offer. This led to an offer of a “roll-over” for some of the existing shares of Updata Europe and Newwatch, and the offer of cooperation in respect of a product called “Blue” which Mr. Johnsen was keen to promote. LMS’s proposals in those respects were both included in their second offer following discussions with Mr. Johnsen, not with the Bank.

452.

It is also important to note that at no stage did the Bank enforce its pledge over the Updata UK shares. It never in fact exercised voting rights in respect of the Updata UK shares or the Updata Europe shares. Ultimately, if Updata Europe had refused LMS’s offer made on 19 June 2009, the Bank could have tried to enforce its pledge over the Updata UK shares, and then sell those shares as mortgagee in possession. But as Mr. Birkeland explained, based on his experience, this is very much a last resort for a bank; not least because it would then have to consolidate the company into its group accounts.

453.

Once both Mr. Nielsen and LMS were on the scene, the Bank did take an interest in the bidding process, albeit after some delay. On 20 May 2009 (the date appearing on the Danish original rather than the English translation in the hearing bundle), which was around a month after the LMS offer, Mr. Jorgensen wrote his e-mail stating that the Bank wanted to take a “more active role” in the possible transfer/ sale of the Updata Group, and expressing concern about some (unspecified) “rather unprofessional action” by management in relation to the execution of the transaction. It was in this e-mail that Mr. Jorgensen said that it was “essential that all interested buyers (management at Up-Data and Jens Nielsen via their equity funds respectively) are ensured equal conditions for the transactions.” This e-mail appears to have been prompted in part by complaints which Mr. Nielsen had made (in his “Letter of Understanding” dated 13 May 2009, described in more detail below) concerning problems in obtaining information from UK management. It also reflected an e-mail sent on 18 May 2009 by Mr. Homann to Mr. Jorgensen, to which Mr. Homann attached a memorandum and financial statement. The covering e-mail stated that the value of the group was “significantly improved” but that the cash situation was highly critical. It was “highly essential” to maintain the “cadence for completion of a capital injection or sale of the English shares”. The memorandum itself said, similarly:

“The values of the group are now visible but the handling and speed of implementation reveals the weaknesses in the top management. Therefore the recapitalization must be followed up with changes in the board and management”.

454.

It is unsurprising that the Bank was keen to ensure equal access to information, given that Mr Nielsen had made complaints to the effect that information was being withheld from him. Mr Jorgensen’s evidence was that he liked Mr Nielsen, and I think that it is clear that, at the time, he did not want to shut him out on the basis of unequal information.

455.

Mr. Jorgensen also “recommended” in that e-mail that a data room be opened for both interested parties on the same conditions. He then set out a proposed timetable, so that Mr. Nielsen (who still had exclusivity at that point) should have to make a binding offer by 24 May 2009, i.e. 6 days away, if he wanted to make use of his exclusivity. The data room for both parties would then open on 26 May.

456.

On 28 May 2009, after expiry of Mr. Nielsen’s exclusivity period, Mr. Birkeland wrote to the interested parties setting out the bid timetable. This envisaged that the process would run for approximately 6 weeks. The data room would be open from 1

June to 12 June. Further or final offers would be made no later than 19 June. A final board decision would follow by 24 June. Completion would take place on 10 July.

457.

The Defendants submitted that the Bank was trying to push the sale process along as fast as possible in the hope of getting its debts repaid quickly. I consider that this rather overstates the position. It seems to me that by mid-May, Mr. Jorgensen (prompted by Mr. Homann) was concerned to ensure that matters did not drift, and that it was important to introduce a process with deadlines. This would focus the minds of participants and bring matters to a conclusion. Prior to that time, however, the Bank does not seem to have been unduly concerned with the pace of progress. Thus Mr. Nielsen had made his first proposal on 16 January 2009, but was not granted an exclusivity period until 5 March 2009. Furthermore, if the Bank had wanted its debts repaid quickly, it could have tried to do a quick deal with LMS on 14 April 2009, as LMS and the Defendants were hoping would happen, or after the later LMS offer was made in May. It did not do so.

458.

I also agree with the Claimants that the bid timetable laid down at the end of May was not particularly rushed, in circumstances in which both LMS and Mr. Nielsen had already carried out due diligence (LMS referred to their “extensive” due diligence in their letters). As far as the Bank was concerned, there was no need to drag out the timetable. The timetable ensured both parties had equal information and made offers at the same time. It also gave the Board the opportunity to consider rival bids on that basis.

459.

The events following the setting of the bid timetable have been sufficiently described in previous Sections: see Section A and Section E. Ultimately, the two proposals made by LMS and Mr. Nielsen/e-Kong were evaluated by Mr. Birkeland in a “scorecard”. It was Updata Europe (not the Bank) that decided to accept the LMS bid.

460.

During the process leading to acceptance of the offer and the sale transaction, it did not seem to me that Mr. Jorgensen was acting aggressively towards Updata Europe. In so far as he was involved, his focus seems to have been to ensure that matters proceeded smoothly and fairly, and his limited intervention on 20 May 2009 was designed to ensure that that happened.

461.

The picture changed somewhat after the transaction had gone through. On 2 September 2009, the Bank gave notice requiring Updata Denmark’s overdraft to be repaid immediately, and terminating its commitment if there was no repayment. It seems to me that this is consistent with the agreement made back in January, when the agreed extension of the facility was up until September. Shortly before then, on around 21 August, Mr. Jorgensen had spoken to Mr. Johnsen. The latter reported his conversation to Mr. Bigaard and others. Mr. Jorgensen “was very upset. He called us “a bunch of untrustworthy idiots””. By this time, of course, Updata UK had been sold and the amount realised had been insufficient to repay the Bank entirely. Later in 2009, Mr. Jorgensen commenced legal proceedings against both Updata Europe and Updata Denmark to try to force through a sale to Mr. Bigaard, and he told Updata’s shareholders that they should agree to sell to Mr. Bigaard for DKK 1 million or there would be adverse financial consequences.

H3: The parties’ arguments in more detail

462. In the course of their arguments, each side emphasised particular features of this factual background and advanced different conclusions both in relation to causation and loss.

The Claimants’ submissions

463.

The Claimants relied upon the fact that (as I have found) it was Updata Europe which made the decision to accept or reject the LMS offer, not the Bank. The Bank had not enforced its pledge. If Updata Europe had refused to accept an offer that was being made, on the basis that it did not represent the fair value of the business, the Bank would have been entitled to exercise its rights under the pledge. But if the Bank were to do this, it should and would not lead to the proposed sale at an undervalue, because the Bank would have duties in that regard: see Cuckmere Brick Co v Mutual Finance [1971] Ch 949 at 966, 968-9 (per Salmon LJ) 977-978 (per Cairns LJ); Silven Properties v RBS [2003] EWCA Civ 1409 [2004] 1 WLR 997 (CA) at [19] per Lightman J. In particular, a mortgagee in possession would be required to expose the shares reasonably to the market, and must obtain the proper price or the true market price.

464.

In the present case, the sale went ahead with Updata Europe’s agreement, and with Updata Europe being amenable to the sale to LMS. But this was because Updata Europe had been misled as to the figures and had also been given to understand that there had been equality of information in the Data Room process. Had the true picture as to Updata UK’s performance and forecast been known, Updata Europe would not have agreed to the LMS final offer, because it would obviously have undervalued the company. Furthermore, had Updata UK been told that LMS had received different information to that which had been given to Mr. Nielsen, both Updata Europe and the Bank would have appreciated that there had not been a fair sale process. For either or both of these reasons, it was unrealistic to imagine that the Bank would have forced Updata UK to sell at the price offered by LMS in June 2009, even assuming that this was the best offer on the table at that time. However, the Claimants also challenged the premise that, had there been no fraud, matters would have played out in the way that they in fact did, so that the best offer on the table in June 2009 was the LMS offer.

465.

In oral submissions, Mr. Booth emphasised that the question of causation had to be considered in the context of the misrepresentations that were made. It would be a

“bizarre factual approach” to ignore all the consequences of the fraud, and the impact which that had on the key players, and to say that “it would have made no difference”: i.e. that Updata Europe would have sold to LMS at the same price.

466.

The Claimants submitted that if there had been no fraud, Updata Europe would have known in at least April (or earlier) about higher earnings projections. They would therefore come to know about each of the contracts as it was won. There would have been no shortage of interest in Updata UK, including:

a)

Mr Nielsen and e-Kong (who, as Mr Nielsen explained, had the money to pay a higher price for Updata UK);

b)

Trade buyers, including various companies listed in the AMR Report which had been prepared in the context of LMS’s final due diligence in late June and July. Mr. Bennett accepted in his evidence that trade buyers would have been interested in Updata UK. (He also explained why he was not interested in a trade sale at that time. He thought that if Updata UK was put up for sale to the trade, other competitors would use that fact to their advantage by arguing to customers that the proposed sale showed the weak financial position of Updata UK’s parent, and that therefore customers should not do business with the company);

c)

Other private equity houses – since there had been a number of PE houses who had responded positively to the original approach in April 2009, with the UK management ultimately having a choice as to who to select and choosing LMS; and

d)

Other interested investors, had there been proper details and marketing.

467.

Mr. Booth placed much emphasis on the fact that the reason the fraud took place was that the Defendants were not willing to risk the alternative; i.e. giving true responses in the 20 April 2009 and 3 June e-mails. This was because of the impact that disclosure would have on the attitude of the key players, Updata Europe, Mr. Nielsen and at least to some extent the Bank, which wanted an equal playing-field. The effect of the fraud was therefore to choke off other potential purchasers and put LMS in pole position. The fraud resulted in what was essentially a false market “by making sure that this was not tested by the market”.

468.

Evidence as to the Bank’s attitude in the counter-factual world, where misrepresentations had not been made, was given by Mr. Jorgensen. He was a witness called by the Claimants themselves. But the Claimants submitted that his evidence needed to be treated with considerable caution. Some of his answers were contradictory, and he was – certainly by the time that he was being asked questions about the counter-factual world – very confused about the facts. It was therefore important to look not at individual answers, but at his evidence as a whole and also, as indeed with all witnesses, the contemporary documents and inherent probabilities. They acknowledged that Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence was clear, and he repeated a number of times that he did not want to lose LMS as a purchaser: LMS had shown that they had the cash, and he did not want them to walk away. However, they submitted that if it had become known, even at the end of the sale process in July, that the sale process had been unequal and that the shares were undervalued, Mr. Jorgensen’s concern not to lose LMS would not have led him to a sale at the LMS price. To do so would likely have constituted a breach of the Bank’s duties. It would have exposed the Bank to a serious risk of litigation. Mr. Booth submitted that it would be an extraordinary conclusion to reach on causation; i.e. to conclude that the

Bank would have “forced us to sell at that price both as a matter of fact and both having regard to the legal obligations”.

469.

Furthermore, if the Bank were to enforce a sale in those circumstances, it would have been against the Bank’s own commercial interests, given that the LMS proposed price was insufficient to discharge the overall indebtedness of Updata Europe to the Bank, because of its guarantee in favour of Updata Denmark. Obtaining market value was in

the interests both of Updata Europe and the Bank, and there was therefore no reason to suppose that the Bank would have required a sale which would not allow a timescale to obtain a reasonable price. There was no basis for assuming that the Bank would act contrary to its commercial interests and legal duties.

470.

The Claimants emphasised that the Bank was flexible, and was not some far-off faceless institution. Mr. Jorgensen had shown a flexible attitude in January, when it had agreed to extend time (on terms), and again in May, when he agreed to postpone payment of any dividend. Interest had not been paid in 2009, but he did not terminate the facility. The evidence showed that Mr. Jorgensen trusted both Mr. Homann and Mr. Birkeland, relying on them for advice in connection with the sale, and he was also in close contact with Mr. Hildebrandt. If necessary, therefore, the Bank would have given more time, particularly if it had emerged at a late stage that one of the bidders had not been given equal information.

471.

In his oral reply submissions, Mr. Booth submitted that it would contradict all reality to conclude that the figures in the March Weighted Budget, which actually relied on relatively few weighted contracts to reach the EBITDA of just over £ 6 million, would have made no difference to Updata Europe. These figures went to the heart of the company’s value and no vendor would have ignored that information and sold to LMS on the existing price regardless. The figures showed likely high cash generation soon, and substantial value within the company. The Defendants must have recognised this, and this was why they made the fraudulent misrepresentations.

472.

In relation to quantification, the Claimants’ essential submission was that the normal measure of damages would be the difference between the market price or true value of the asset disposed of in consequence of the fraud, and the price obtained as a result of the operative fraud. Mr. Booth submitted that it would be a very strong thing to say that market value should be interfered with. The Court should not be tempted to say that, because of its debts to the Bank and the pressure it was under to achieve some form of repayment, Updata Europe might not have achieved the full market value for its shares. This would result in an arbitrary reduction of the market value by reference to a factor (creditor pressure) which does not affect the market value at all. That was not an appropriate approach to quantum in the case of fraud.

The Defendants’ submissions

473.

The Defendants submitted that it was not appropriate to determine loss by reference to the price that would have been paid by a willing buyer and willing seller. Rather, the price should be based on the true likely facts attending a sale in 2009, which includes pressure from the Bank to sell within a limited timescale.

474.

The Defendants also contended that the principles developed in the context of cases concerning loss of a chance were applicable to the present case. Both causation of loss and proof of loss involved reliance upon the acts of third parties. Relying on the recent decision in Assetco v Grant Thornton [2019] EWHC 592, they submitted that the claimant had to establish a real or substantial chance of a third party acting in accordance with a claimant’s causal theory. Where there were multiple third-party acts in the chain of causation, the claimant needs to establish a real or substantial chance in respect of each third party whose hypothetical actions were necessary in the relevant causal chain. If there are multiple third-party independent actions, each must be given a percentage chance and these are then multiplied together.

475.

In his oral submissions, Mr. Choo Choy submitted that the question of whether there would have been a transaction with LMS, and the Claimants’ overall causal theory, was dependent upon the actions of a number of different third parties. Mr. Choo Choy focused particularly upon the Bank, but also LMS and Mr. Nielsen. Since they were each independent actors, it would be necessary to assess the respective chances of higher bids being received from LMS and Mr. Nielsen, as well as the chance of the Bank allowing an extra period for the sale. The various probabilities would then need to be multiplied together. There were, admittedly, other potential actors: the market was not confined to Mr. Nielsen or LMS. But other potential players could be disregarded, because Mr. Johnsen had previously approached other investors without success.

476.

He also submitted that, in approaching causation, it was necessary to posit what would have happened differently if the deceit had not occurred. In that context, the earliest time that any relevant information would have been available was 20 April. But by that time, the two-horse race was already well on the way. Disclosure of relevant information by 20 April or even late May would not, contrary to the Claimants’ submission, have made a huge difference to the process because the structure of the race between LMS and Mr. Nielsen had pretty much been set. Even if there were a chance, at that stage, of Mr. Nielsen and e-Kong improving on their offer, various other questions would arise. These included: what processes would there have been between Mr. Nielsen and his backers in terms of improving his offer; how long would it have taken to get an improved offer; what would the improvement have been; how would LMS have reacted. The Claimants had to posit a credible factual scenario which would lead to the conclusion that they might have been able to either get a higher price for the shares from one of the two potential bidders, or alternatively retain the shares until 2014. In the Defendants’ submission, there was no such scenario. In that context, it was necessary to look carefully at the evidence of Mr. Nielsen and Mr. Jorgensen. Overall, however, the Defendants submitted that Updata Europe would have acted in the same way that they did even if they had been given different information. Furthermore, there was no real or substantial chance of Updata Europe and the Bank obtaining a materially better offer in a timescale that would have been consistent with what the Bank wanted.

477.

The Defendants then identified and addressed the position of each of the third parties that formed part of the relevant causal chain.

478.

First, there was the Bank. The Defendants submitted that the Bank was never going to be persuaded (let alone was there a real and substantial chance of it being persuaded) to let Updata Europe keep its shares until 2014 simply by seeing higher forecasts, the March Weighted Budget, the Tenon Memorandum or anything of the sort. The Bank’s patience was exhausted, it was under its own pressures, and Updata Europe was in default even of the compromise reached on 6 January 2009. The Bank, having seen higher forecasts at the beginning of 2009, still wanted the Updata Europe debt repaid or substantially reduced immediately. To suppose the Bank might have done otherwise (let alone allowed Updata Europe to keep the shares until 2014 to sell to Capita at the same price) is sheer speculation, when all the evidence is to the contrary.

They had reached the end of the road, and wanted to get repaid immediately

479.

In that regard, the Defendants relied upon evidence given by Mr. Jorgensen and more generally upon the following matters:

a)

The Bank’s relationship with and approach to Updata Europe was a very difficult one, given the size of Updata Europe’s debt and its inability to repay. Over time, the Bank had taken what the Defendants described as an aggressive and interventionist stance. This included demands for payment which had led to Mr. Johnsen obtaining a loan from his grandmother in 2008, and a further demand in late 2008.

b)

Mr. Johnsen had been trying hard in 2008, and failing, to find an external investor in order to placate the Bank. An approach had been made to Kelso in late 2008, and to Mr. Klobucar. But these and other attempts to find an investor had been unsuccessful.

c)

In January 2009, the Bank did receive various forecasts, which showed high EBITDA numbers. But the Bank was not interested in forecasts. Mr. Jorgensen wanted outstanding interest paid, and he wanted the debt reduced or repaid and he wanted that to happen promptly. The Bank also wanted some control over the process of finding an external investor; because (as Mr. Jorgensen agreed in his evidence) the Bank wanted to make sure that, if there was going to be a capital injection, it would have to be an injection which was sufficiently substantial. The reality therefore was that the sale of Updata UK (whether directly or indirectly through shares in Updata Europe) had to happen by the summer of 2009, given Mr. Jorgensen’s stance. A sale was inevitable, and Mr. Jorgensen wanted to exercise control and scrutiny over the process. It was therefore no surprise that Mr. Jorgensen ultimately came down heavily in favour of LMS, which was a cash buyer and ready to complete.

d)

The Bank had taken control of the process and was intent on compelling a sale in 2009, as could be seen from the events at the start of the year.

e)

The Bank was itself under considerable pressure, not least as a result of the 2008 global financial crisis. The Updata Europe debt was the largest single exposure to the Bank. The Danish FSA was looking closely at the Bank in May 2009. There was a meeting between Mr. Jorgensen and the FSA at that time, and Mr. Jorgensen told them that a sale process (in relation to Updata Europe) was underway at that time.

f)

The competitive bidding timetable was laid down for a deliberately short period. At the end of that process, LMS had offered cash, and Mr. Nielsen/e-Kong had not done so. Mr. Jorgensen favoured the LMS bid. Whereas LMS had shown that they could pay, e-Kong had not shown that they could pay and as Mr. Jorgensen said, “then I were afraid for that LMS would run away [sic]”.

g)

In his evidence, Mr. Jorgensen gave certain answers which suggested

(at the Defendants contended) that he was not concerned about the

possible disparity of information given to the two bidders; and also that he did not particularly care whether Updata Europe’s shares might be worth more than the LMS’s bid.

h)

Almost immediately after the sale, in July 2009, the Bank had written to Updata Denmark requiring payment of the outstanding indebtedness within 14 days. The game was then up. Accounts were then blocked in October 2009. This showed the Bank’s attitude very clearly.

480.

Accordingly, the Defendants submitted that the Bank’s stance was always going to be the same, regardless of any causal effect of any alleged deceit. The case based upon the price that a willing buyer or seller would pay was a legal artifice, and was both

“unreal and nonsensical”. Updata Europe’s inability to obtain that price was not caused by any alleged deceit. It was “simply the product of the situation with their history with the Bank” as well as the exceptionally difficult market circumstances in 2009.

481.

Secondly, there was LMS. The Defendants submitted that there was no prospect of negotiating a higher price with LMS. They invited the Court to accept Mr. Hooft’s evidence that he would not have bid significantly higher: at most he might have gone higher by 1 or 2% (around £ 50,000 - £ 100,000). Mr. Hooft had thought that LMS was under competitive pressure at the time of the bidding, since he did not know what bids would come from Mr. Nielsen/ e-Kong. LMS were incentivised to bid competitively, and their bid fairly reflected all the financial information which they had received. That information was the full information; i.e. no information was withheld from LMS. LMS did not bid on the basis of the projected £ 6 million EBITDA, but on the basis of past results. There was no real or substantial chance that Mr. Hooft would bid significantly higher.

482.

Thirdly, there was Mr. Nielsen. He was simply not in a position to bid at all within the Bank’s timeframe. He failed to make any firm bid at all, either at the end of his period of exclusivity, or in June 2009 after the data room period. His difficulties had little or nothing to do with the availability of higher forecasts. They included his insistence on bidding for the shares of Updata Europe (rather than Updata UK); his desire for the Defendants to stay in the business, which they were refusing to do (if he was the buyer); problems of due diligence in Denmark; and his inability to find a backer who was willing to come forward with proof of funds. Mr. Nielsen and e-Kong were never close to tabling a proper cash bid.

483.

In short, EVs had no real and substantial chance of securing a higher price for their shares, whether from LMS, Mr. Nielsen/e-Kong, or any other third party, over and above the SPA price. This was so particularly bearing in mind the actual offer made by LMS, which included the valuable concession of allowing Newwatch to roll over its existing shareholding and subscribe for further shares within a prescribed timescale; effectively an option to buy 17% of the new company.

H4: Analysis and conclusions: legal principles

General approach in cases of damages for deceit

484.

Smith New Court Securities Ltd. v Citibank N.A. [1997] A.C. 254 is the leading case relating to damages for deceit in the context of contracts of purchase. In that case, the Court of Appeal had proceeded on the basis of the law as laid down in a series of cases at the end of the 19th century, namely that:

“where a fraudulent misrepresentation has induced the plaintiff to enter into a contract of purchase, the measure of damages is, in general, the difference between the contract price and the true market value of the property purchased, valued as at the date of the contract of purchase”.

(per Lord Browne Wilkinson at 261, italics in the original)

485.

There was no dispute that this was the general rule, and there is nothing in the decision of the House of Lords which casts doubt upon it. Thus, Lord Steyn said at 284:

“It is right that the normal method of calculating the loss caused by the deceit is the price paid less the real value of the subject matter of the sale”.

486.

The importance of the decision was to make it clear that rule that the relevant date was the date of the contract of purchase was not an inflexible one. A different approach may be required in order to give effect to the general principle that damages should compensate for the loss suffered, and for the generous approach to damages in the case of fraud (in particular as to the recovery of consequential loss) which was stated in Doyle v Olby (Ironmongers) [1969] 2 QB 158 (a decision of the Court of Appeal which was approved in Smith New Court). Accordingly, there were likely to be many cases where the general rule (i.e. assessing damages by reference to the true value on the transaction date) “has to be departed from in order to give adequate compensation for the wrong done to the plaintiff” (see 266F-G).

487.

Smith New Court was a decision involving a claim by a defrauded buyer against the seller. But the same approach should be taken in the less usual case where the buyer has defrauded the seller into selling an asset such as shares. This was, correctly, the approach of Mr David Mackie QC in Platt v Platt [1992] 2 BCLC 746, where the judge had applied Smith New Court in the context of a claim by the seller. Although the case was unsuccessfully appealed, there was no appeal on this aspect of the judge’s decision. It is also the approach taken in an earlier Court of Appeal case Smith Kline & French Laboratories v Long [1989] 1 WLR 1 CA. In that case, which did not involve a share of sales and is somewhat far removed from the present facts, the Court of Appeal looked at the market value of drugs which the plaintiff pharmaceutical manufacturer had been fraudulently induced to sell to a purchaser. In so doing, the court drew upon authority in the context of the tort of conversion and other situations where damages are awarded by reference to market value.

488.

Whilst the starting point and general rule for the assessment of damages is the true value of the asset at the date of the transaction, it is not necessarily the end-point. As Smith New Court shows, it is possible that a later date may, on particular facts, properly reflect the Claimants’ loss more fairly and reasonably than the date of the transaction. In the present case, the Claimants drew upon this principle in support of their alternative claim (a claim also based upon “lost opportunity”) that damages should be assessed by reference to the sale in 2014, rather than the sale in 2009.

Causation and loss of a chance

489.

Although the general approach to the assessment of damages for fraud was not in dispute, the parties disagreed as to whether this general rule had any application on the facts of the present case. The principal dispute in this context concerned whether, and the extent to which, the principles developed in the case-law concerning “loss of a chance” were applicable. I was referred by the parties to a number of authorities in that area, including some which I have already mentioned: Allied Maples Group Ltd. v Simmons & Simmons [1995] 1 WLR 1602; Vasiliou v Hajigeorgiou [2010] EWCA Civ 1475; 4 Eng v Harper [2008] EWHC 915 (Ch), [2009] Ch 91; Parabola

Investments Ltd. v Browallia Cal Ltd. [2010] EWCA Civ 486; Law Debenture Trust Corp PLC v Elektrim [2010] EWCA Civ 1142; Dennard v PwC [2010] EWHC 812 (Ch); AssetCo v Grant Thornton [2019] EWHC 150 (Comm); and the discussion of loss of a chance in McGregor on Damages 20th Edition.

490.

A relatively recent decision of the Court of Appeal (referred to extensively in AssetCo) contains a summary and exposition of the relevant principles both in relation to claims based on loss of a chance as well as the assessment of damages where there is uncertainty as to the amount of loss: see the judgment of Floyd LJ in Wellesley Partners LLP v Withers LLP [2015] EWCA Civ 1146, paragraphs [94] – [110]. These can be summarised as follows (square-bracketed numbers referring to the paragraphs of that judgment):

a)

The assessment or quantification of damages is an exercise which is different in nature from establishing whether any fact did or did not occur, or even whether any event would, in some hypothetical situation, have occurred. [96]

b)

The assessment of damages may be dependent on the court’s view as to whether particular events would have occurred or will occur. Those chances are to be taken account of in the assessment of damages [97]. Where quantification involves a hypothetical exercise, the court does not apply the same balance of probability approach as it would to proof of past facts. Rather it estimates the loss by making the best attempt it can to evaluate the chances, great or small (unless those chances amount to no more than remote speculation) taking all significant factors into account. [102 - 103, citing Parabola]. Where the quantification of loss depends upon events which did not happen the judge is left to assess to chances of the alternative scenario he is presented with. This has nothing to do with loss of a chance as such. It is simply the judge making a realistic and reasoned assessment of a variety of circumstances in order to determine what the level of loss has been. [104, citing Vasiliou].

c)

Questions of assessment of damages have to be distinguished from questions of causation [98]. The loss of a chance doctrine is primarily directed to issues of causation and needs to be distinguished from the evaluation of factors which go only to quantum. [104, citing Vasiliou].

d)

Where a breach of duty consists of an omission, and the question is what the claimant would have done had the breach of duty not occurred, the claimant must prove what he would have done on the balance of probabilities. [99]

e)

Causation of the claimant’s loss may depend on the hypothetical action of a third party, either in addition to the claimant himself or independently of him. In such cases, the claimant does not have to prove what the third party would have done on the balance of probabilities. For causation, all the claimant has to show is that the chance is a real or substantial one. Having done so, the claimant must still show, on the balance of probabilities, that the defendant’s act has caused the loss of the chance to this effect. Once that has been shown, the valuation of the chance is a question for the quantification or assessment of damages. [99].

491.

It is also apparent from decisions analysed in Wellesley that when it comes to the assessment of damages, quantification may be shaped by fact-findings that the court is able to make. Thus, in The Front Ace [2008] EWCA Civ 101, there was a fact-finding that the vessel would have been profitably engaged, and also as to the relevant market. This meant that it was not appropriate, in assessing damages, to make any discount for the possibility that the vessel would not have been profitably engaged: see Wellesley at [108]. Similarly, in Vasiliou, the court’s finding that the restaurant would have been a success precluded the argument that a general discount should be made for the possibility of failure: see [24] of Vassilou, cited at [104] of Wellesley. But in a case where there is uncertainty as to whether the claimant would find a market for its services, a discount to reflect the possibility of failure is appropriate as part of the evaluation of the relevant chance: see Wellesley at [107].

H5: Analysis and conclusions: Causation

492.

I start with the question of causation. I consider that the relevant question here is whether, on the facts, there was no loss because Updata Europe would have sold at the LMS price (i.e. on the terms which were ultimately agreed in July 2009) in any event. This was the question identified in paragraph 188 of the Claimants’ closing where the Claimants acknowledged that it was open to the Defendants to “show that the fraudulently induced transaction caused no loss because Updata Europe would have sold at the LMS price in any event”. It is also the question contemplated by the above passage in Chitty: “he will not have a remedy unless he would not have entered the contract (or at least not on the same terms) but for the misrepresentation”. The Defendants identified a similar question in paragraph 61 of their written closing:

“The Claimants, so it is understood, wish to claim as their loss the difference between the price a willing buyer would have paid a willing seller in 2009 and the price LMS in fact paid. But to do so they have to prove that the deceit has caused them that particular loss. If it is the case that they would have sold the shares under a distressed sale (to LMS) under pressure from the

Bank anyway, then any such ‘loss’ is not caused by the deceit.

It would have occurred irrespective of the alleged deceit.”

493.

Paragraph 188 of the Claimants’ written closing suggested that the Defendants bear the burden of proof on this issue. But Mr. Booth correctly acknowledged in the course of argument that the Claimants had to establish causation.

494.

At first sight, the question of whether or not Updata Europe would have sold at the LMS price is an issue to be resolved on the balance of probabilities, and has nothing to do with loss of a chance. This is because it is a question as to (as Mr. Choo Choy put it) “whether or not Updata Europe would have done this, that or the other”, which he accepted was to be approached on the balance of probabilities. The Claimants’ case was that this issue was indeed to be resolved on the balance of probabilities. It involved looking at the position in July 2009, and doing so on the factual premise that the misrepresentations had not been made.

495.

I consider that it is indeed appropriate to resolve this particular causation question by considering the issue on the balance of probabilities. This was the approach of the Court of Appeal in Sykes v Midland Bank [1971] 1 Ch 113 (a case referred to in Allied Maples and considered by McGregor on Damages, paragraph [10-159]. In that case, the plaintiffs’ claim for substantial damages failed, because they could not show that, even if properly advised, they probably would not have entered into the relevant contract. Similarly, in Dennard v PwC [2010] EWHC 812 (Ch), the claimants’ primary case (namely that they would not have proceeded with a contract with Barclays Bank if a different valuation had been given) was addressed by Vos J., and rejected, on the balance of probabilities.

496.

In 4 Eng v Harper, the claimants were the victims of deceit which had led them to purchase a company (E Ltd.). Their case was that if they had not been so deceived, they would have purchased T Ltd. instead. They sought damages by reference to the loss of the chance to earn income and capital profits from T Ltd. The case establishes that loss of a chance principles are potentially applicable in cases of deceit, as well as their more usual application to cases of negligence by solicitors and others. In that case, loss of chance principles came into play because the claimants contended that they would have purchased T Ltd., and a successful purchase of that company depended upon the acts of a third party; i.e. whether or not the owners of T Ltd. would be willing to sell to the claimants. However, the initial question for David Richards J. was whether, on the assumption that the owners of T Ltd. were willing to sell, the plaintiffs would indeed have purchased that company and could have funded the purchase. The judge approached that question on the balance of probabilities: see paragraphs [60] – [80]. The issue was addressed in that way, and without regard to

“loss of a chance” principles, even though the plaintiffs’ conduct would have been affected by decisions made by third parties; in particular whether the plaintiffs’ bankers would have been prepared to provide funding for the purchase (see [69]).

497.

The question in that case (would the claimants have been in a position to acquire T Ltd., and would they have sought to do so) is not quite the same as the question in the present case (would the claimants have entered into the contract with LMS in any event). But I do not consider that there is any reason why the approach, namely to

decide the question on the balance of probabilities, after considering all the evidence, should be any different.

498.

Finally as far as the authorities are concerned, in Wellesley, the initial question was whether the claimants would have opened a New York office, and secondly whether or not it would have obtained business from a particular customer. Floyd LJ said (at [109]) that the Claimants “had, first, to prove that its own actions would have been such as to place itself in a position to obtain that work, and it had to do so on the balance of probabilities”. It may well be that the question of whether a party’s actions would have placed itself in a position to obtain a benefit will itself depend, at least to some extent, on the actions of third parties. For example, the opening of an office in New York might well require funding from a bank, the agreement of a landlord to let suitable premises, the agreement of staff to work in the office, the granting of visas by the US authorities, and possibly regulatory approvals. However, I do not consider that the involvement of third parties means that loss of a chance principles need to be, or should be applied, when deciding whether or not the claimant would have opened the office. If the claimant cannot show, on the balance of probabilities, that he would have been in a position to open the office, then the claim cannot succeed.

499.

In the present case, the Claimants’ primary claim is that Updata Europe owned a valuable asset in 2009, and they were misled into selling it, at the price offered by LMS, as a result of the Defendants’ fraud. At that time (2009), the Bank had not exercised its security rights, and the decision as to whether or not to sell, and if so on what terms, was a decision for the Board of Updata Europe to take. It is of course true that that decision would be shaped by external considerations, including the positions taken by third parties. In order to decide what decision Updata Europe would have made, in the hypothetical world where there had been no deceit, there would be a range of factors which would be relevant to Updata Europe’s decision: whether higher offers had been received from third parties, what pressure there was from the Bank, what pressure there may have been from members of Mr. Johnsen’s family. But whilst these external considerations are highly relevant to what Updata Europe’s ultimate decision would have been, the ultimate question is whether Updata Europe would have sold at the LMS price in any event. This, in my view is and remains a question to be resolved on the balance of probabilities.

500.

The Defendants’ argument that the Claimants suffered no loss, because they would have sold at the LMS price in any event, ultimately boiled down to two principal points. The first point was that even if the misrepresentations had not been made, the course of the bidding process would have proceeded as it did, with the result at the end of that process, the LMS bid was the only bid. The second point was that if that were the position, the Bank would have compelled Updata Europe to accept the LMS bid, by making it known that the bid had to be accepted so that repayment of the Bank debt could be made, or ultimately forcing a sale using its powers under its security. In relation to these arguments on causation, it is necessary to consider what consequences would have likely resulted from a situation in which the representations had not been made.

501.

On the facts of the present case, I consider that if the representations had not been made, the consequence would necessarily have been that the true figures, representing management’s expectation, would have been revealed to Updata Europe, and thence to any other potential purchasers including Mr. Nielsen. The consequence would also

have been that on 3 June, if the figures had not already been revealed, Updata Europe would have been told that the management had given different documentation to LMS to that which had hitherto been given to Mr. Nielsen. In either event, it seems to me that the details underlying the headline numbers – for example the extensive detailed workings in the March Weighted Budget – would have been revealed to Updata Europe, and indeed to other potential purchasers. If one assumes that the misrepresentations had not been made, the corollary therefore would be that the true figures would be revealed; not least because there would then have been no point in the Defendants seeking to try to conceal the detail and because the information would need to go to into the Data Room. And in any event, the detail could easily have been flushed out by, for example, Updata Europe’s board asking for the detail, or in response to the questions asked by Mr. Nielsen who throughout was pressing for more information. I also accept Mr. Johnsen’s evidence that if he had been given positive information showing substantial values, “we would have been all over it” in terms of asking for the detail. Mr. Choo Choy was therefore correct to approach the case, in terms of causation, by “assuming against [himself] for the moment that the counterfactual should be equated with positive disclosure of the weighted budget”; i.e. on the basis that the true figures would have been revealed.

502.

If the representations had not been made, and in consequence the true figures had been revealed, this would inevitably have had a major impact on the way in which all the relevant parties would have reacted and behaved. In my view, it is wholly unrealistic to suppose that, if the misrepresentations had not been made, matters would have developed in the way that they in fact did, so that the best offer on the table in late June was an offer from LMS in the terms which Updata Europe ultimately accepted. Since it is more likely than not that there would have been a better offer on the table in late June, it follows that Updata Europe would not have sold at the LMS price in any event. My reasons for these conclusions are as follows.

503.

In the context of inducement, Mr. Booth drew attention to a passage from an article by Hon K.R. Handley, ‘Causation and Misrepresentation’ (2015) 131 LQR 277, 284, quoted with approval in Hayward v Zurich at [38] (per Lord Clarke):

“The representor must have decided to make the misrepresentation because he or she judged that the truth or silence would not, or might not, serve their purposes or serve them so well. In doing so they fashioned an evidentiary weapon against themselves, and the court should not subject the victim to “what if” inquiries which the representor was not prepared to risk at the time.”

504.

In the present context of causation, the misrepresentations are also evidentiary weapons against the Defendants. The reason why the representations were made was because the Defendants were not prepared to risk the consequences of telling the truth. They recognised that there was a serious risk of jeopardising the sale to their favoured PE house at the price offered. Updata Europe would then see figures which were highly material to the valuation of Updata Europe, and which would reveal the inadequacy of the LMS original offer based on £ 1.5 million EBITDA, even taking into account the relatively small (18%) increase made by LMS in their May offer.

505.

The true figures also would make the business more attractive to outside investors, including Mr. Nielsen and e-Kong, who would see that Updata UK’s business was much more substantial than the figures in the Financial Overview would suggest, and indeed was really taking off.

506.

In addition, if the misrepresentation as to equality of information made on 3 June had not been made, then it would have become known that Mr. Nielsen’s previous due diligence work had been conducted on a false basis. It is not difficult to see that Mr. Jorgensen at the Bank, who regarded equality of information to both prospective buyers as essential, would have reacted unfavourably to the way in which Updata UK’s management had behaved. But at all events, I have no doubt that he would have taken steps to ensure that Mr. Nielsen, and any other potential bidders, did have the same relevant management information as LMS. Given that the Bank itself, as well as Updata Europe, had a real interest in obtaining the best possible price on the sale, it is not difficult to conclude that, if necessary, the sale timetable could be extended somewhat so as to ensure that all potential purchasers had a fair crack of the whip.

507.

It is of course impossible to say exactly what would have happened, in terms of bidding, if the true figures had been revealed. However, in my view it is improbable in the extreme that Updata Europe would have let matters proceed in the same way as they did in fact proceed. At that time, Mr. Nielsen was using a multiple of 5 x EBITDA, and LMS had used 6.1 (albeit applied to historic results). Updata Europe’s Board comprised a number of intelligent people, and it would have been obvious to them that the LMS offer (based on EBITDA of £ 1.5 million) significantly undervalued the company. If this had happened, any discussions between Mr. Johnsen and LMS about the LMS offer of 16 April would have been very different to the discussion which took place on 29 April 2009, and which Mr. Hooft recorded in his note to file of that date. Mr. Hooft’s first key point in that note was that there had been a “Very friendly tone”. He went on to record his impression that “we were potentially not a million miles apart” and that “[o]verall Peter was very positive”. If the true figures had been revealed, I consider that Mr. Johnsen would have brought home both to LMS and UK management that a deal at the levels proposed by LMS would be unacceptable.

508.

Both LMS and UK management would then have needed to reconsider their positions. I was not persuaded by Mr. Hooft’s evidence that LMS had, in May 2009, virtually reached the limit of what LMS were prepared to offer. He was clearly a tough and skilled negotiator, who would have sought to minimise the price paid. But I consider that, if necessary, he would have been prepared to move rather higher. Certainly the figures for maintainable earnings which were produced by one of his team on 29 June 2009 (and which are described in more detail in Section I below) would have justified a significantly higher valuation.

509.

If, however, LMS were not prepared to offer significantly more, the management would have had to approach some of the other PE houses to see whether there was a willingness to make offers which more fairly reflected the value of the company. Hitherto, of course, those houses had been approached on the basis that the opportunity was to acquire Updata UK at or below the level of Bank debt. Had the representations not been made, however, it would have become clear that this option, whilst attractive to a PE house, was not a practical option. It is also important to recognise that the management had a very real desire to have a successful MBO, and

they would themselves have recognised the need for better terms to be offered to Updata Europe, if necessary by foregoing some of their personal advantages in the deal which they had negotiated with LMS. At the same time, Mr. Johnsen would have had detailed numbers which he could show to other potential outside investors. It is also relevant that both the Bank and Mr. Homann were owed money, so that both of them had a very real interest in fair value being received for the business.

510.

I also accept Mr. Nielsen’s evidence that the real numbers would have had an impact on his decision-making, and that of his consortium. I deal in more detail with Mr. Nielsen’s evidence below. The Defendants sought to rely, in the context of inducement, on Mr. Nielsen’s evidence that he did not believe that he had been given the same information as the other bidder. I do not think that this assists the Defendants in the context of the inducement issue, for reasons already given. But in my view it is positively damaging to the Defendants in the context of causation. If the misrepresentations had not been made, this would have led to a factual situation in which Mr. Nielsen and his proposed investor or investors did have the relevant figures on which to work. Instead of being discouraged from bidding as result a lack of information – something which was precisely what the Defendants sought to achieve by their deceit – and suspicion as to lack of equality of treatment, Mr. Nielsen and his proposed investor or investors would have been far better placed to bid. Mr Nielsen explained in evidence that:

“the information that was in the data room gave us an enormous challenge to extract information that you would normally expect that the management or the ones who were making the business plans would have done all that work already and had made contract per contract an overview of the cash flow projections, the risks involved and so on.”

He said that the Updated Kelso Presentation was useless: it contained a single number, which was a “best case” and he was embarrassed sending it to e-Kong because it was no basis on which to make an investment decision. “You can’t ask a professional investor or a strategic investor even to make investment decision based on the material which is a one-page financial projection and then a list of names of counties and councils that are favourites or preferred or not sure and 10%”. He said that e-Kong were very disappointed in the quality of information received. In my judgment, the position would have been otherwise if the misrepresentations had not been made.

511.

I consider that all of these factors would naturally have had the effect of driving the price offered for the shares towards their true market value rather than the price offered by LMS, which (for reasons discussed in Section I below) was substantially below their true value. Accordingly, I do not accept that, if there had been no misrepresentations, the best offer on the table at the end of June would have been the LMS offer. It seems to me that this is a necessary premise of the Defendants’ argument on causation; namely that Updata Europe would have accepted the LMS offer in any event. The argument assumes that the effect of the misrepresentations was to change nothing in terms of how matters would have progressed. In my view, however, if the true position had been known, matters would simply not have progressed as they did. The misrepresentations themselves, for reasons already given, provide an evidentiary weapon, and in my view a powerful evidentiary weapon, in

support of this conclusion. It necessarily follows that the Defendants’ case on causation fails.

512.

In the light of this conclusion, I regard it as unrealistic to ask “would Updata have accepted the LMS offer in any event” or a similar question: since it assumes that the best offer on the table as at the end of June would have been the LMS offer. Even if that were so, however, it is not probable that Updata Europe would have accepted it. Indeed, I would regard it as highly improbable. In my view, Updata Europe would have made efforts to explain to the Bank that the business was worth far more, and that it was now or shortly would be highly cash generative. Mr. Homann, who had the ear of Mr. Jorgensen, would have supported them in that argument. I do not consider it at all probable that the Bank would have forced a sale at an undervalue there and then. This would, as Mr. Booth submitted, have been contrary to the Bank’s own interests and would have exposed the Bank to potential litigation.

513.

That said I do not consider that the Bank would have given limitless time for Updata Europe to hold onto its shares, particularly if there were buyers around who were willing to pay for them. The Bank would have insisted that a sale took place as soon as reasonably possible. At the time when the bids came in June, there was still a certain amount of time to go before September; i.e. the date before which (subject to performance of other conditions) the Bank had agreed not to call in the facilities. I bear in mind that the Bank could have taken the point that there had been a failure to perform the other conditions, and therefore could have called in their loan. But I accept Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence that the Bank had no interest at that time in bankrupting Updata. I have also already noted that Mr. Jorgensen did not act aggressively in the period between January and June. I consider that (on the present unreal hypothesis that the only offer was that which LMS actually made) faced with arguments from Updata Europe, supported by Mr. Homann, the Bank would likely have shown a degree of flexibility so that fair value for the company could be realised. If they had not already done so, the same factors as identified above would then have driven the price towards their true market value. Again, therefore, I consider that even on this alternative hypothesis, the Defendants’ case on causation fails.

514.

I consider that the only relevant question on causation, certainly as far as concerns the Claimants’ primary case based on the sale in 2009, is that which I have addressed above; i.e. whether the Claimants would have sold to LMS at the LMS price in any event. I do not consider that this part of the claim raises separate issues of causation, which require an Allied Maples loss of a chance analysis. The primary claim is in respect of the value of an asset which Updata Europe were induced to sell by fraud. There are indeed questions which arise as to how, on the facts of the present case,

Updata Europe’s loss is to be quantified, bearing in mind any potential difficulties in realising the full value of the asset. But I consider that these are issues of quantification, not causation and I address them in Section H5 below. However, if I were wrong about that, and, if the relevant question on causation were whether or not there was a real or substantial chance of third parties offering a higher price, or of Updata Europe persuading the Bank that the offer from LMS should not be accepted, I would have answered these questions favourably to the Claimants.

515.

In reaching my conclusions on the causation issue, I have taken into account my assessment, as described in more detail below, of the evidence of Mr. Nielsen, Mr.

Jorgensen and the late Mr. Homann (as well as that of Mr. Hooft which I describe elsewhere in this judgment).

Mr. Nielsen’s evidence

516.

I start by setting out the principal features of the chronology concerning Mr. Nielsen’s involvement in the bidding process. By January 2009, Mr. Nielsen had expressed an interest in a possible investment or acquisition. By mid-January, he was being assisted in that process by Mr. David Medhurst, who had worked for the Australian banking group Macquarie. Mr. Medhurst was a corporate finance consultant with experience in various aspects of mergers and acquisitions, including deal structuring and valuations. At around that time he had set up in business as David Medhurst International Inc. with a subsidiary called European Equity Partners (Canada). Mr. Nielsen was also being assisted at this time or shortly afterwards by a lawyer, Mrs.

Marianne Phillip. He described himself as having a “very strong team” assisting him. Mr. Nielsen had a considerable amount of business experience himself, having worked as a management consultant in information technology and having been involved in the development, sale and purchase of numerous IT and telecoms companies over the years. He had also been chairman of Updata UK from 2002 to 2007, and therefore knew the business well.

517.

On 6 March 2009, the Bank wrote to Mr. Nielsen (with the concurrence of Updata Europe) granting a period of exclusivity which would commence on 5 March 2009 and end no later than 10 April, with a further two weeks to finalise his bid. During that time, he went with Mr. Homann and met Mr. Bennett and Mr. Baldorino at Reigate on 18 March. He received a small folder of materials which included the Financial Overview. His evidence was that it was pretty clear from the meeting that management were not keen on his involvement. He had a feeling that they were going to give him the minimum information possible. These impressions were consistent with the evidence, already described, as to the UK management’s views. Subsequent to the meeting, on 5 April, Mr. Homann circulated a list of questions, but these were not answered at the time.

518.

Mr. Nielsen did not make any bid on 10 April, but there were extensions of time which were granted for his due diligence: on 1 May 2009, Mr. Jorgensen said that he could offer an extension to 12 May 2009, but that on that date there needed to be a written offer. On 6 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen had a second meeting with the UK management, and a detailed note of that meeting was prepared by Mr. Bennett. The meeting was attended by the Defendants and Mr. Cowan for Updata UK, and by Mr. Nielsen, Mr. Medhurst and his colleague Ms. Olga Ojero. Mr. Medhurst explained that the deal was too small for Macquarie itself, but that Macquarie had interests in a number of other funds who had investments in a similar space. He and Ms. Ojero said that they were looking at either a quoted trade buyer or a number of financial buyers, and that ultimately it was up to Mr. Nielsen to decide on the most preferable. They favoured a group wide approach (which I understand to mean buying the whole group), and they felt that a trade buyer was most likely to want to go cross-border. Mr. Medhurst described, but did not identify, the trade buyer that they had in mind: a telecoms company which was not based in Europe, but which had world-wide interests apart from Europe. An important question was whether the investor would be interested in Denmark or not. But “the UK is not in question here”. In other words, there was no doubt that any buyer would be interested in the UK. Towards the end of

the meeting, Mr. Bennett was asked whether Updata UK was on target to reach its budget. Mr. Bennett answered “no”. (As set out in Section D above, a very different message was being given to the private equity houses who had been approached in early April).

519.

Following that meeting, on 13 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen (on behalf of his company

MLL Holding ApS) sent Updata Europe and Mr. Jorgensen a lengthy “Letter of Understanding – Intent to Provide a Binding Offer”. The letter was not a binding offer itself, but outlined the framework for an offer. It referred to the fact that questions raised of the UK management, and requests for documents, remained outstanding and unanswered. It also expressed concern that the UK management had authored a business plan which had not been contained in the due diligence binders provided, and that this had been used in meetings with potential equity providers to gain support for their MBO. The letter then set out a number of conditions for incorporation into any binding agreement, including a more detailed due diligence period.

520.

The Letter of Understanding contained certain figures, which indicated that Mr. Nielsen was valuing both the Danish and English operations on the basis of a multiple of 5 x EBITDA. Mr. Nielsen agreed in cross-examination that, for Updata UK, he had been using an EBITDA figure of around £ 1.496 million; i.e. the figure which had been contained in the Financial Overview.

521.

The Letter of Understanding received a negative reaction from the Bank and, a few days later, Updata Europe made a counter-proposal. On 26 May 2009, Mr. Nielsen wrote to the Bank indicating that he would shortly be discussing a revised offer letter with Mr. Medhurst and Mr. Homann as well as e-Kong. This was the first time that eKong had been referred to in the correspondence, although it seems clear that this was the investor that Mr. Medhurst had been describing at the 6 May meeting with management. Mr. Nielsen explained in his evidence that e-Kong was a good contact of Mr. Medhurst, who knew them well. In his letter to the Bank, Mr. Nielsen explained that e-Kong was a telecoms holding company, listed on the Hong Kong stock exchange, and that it had been analysing and preparing “this bid for Updata Europe A/S”.

522.

On the same day (26 May) e-Kong wrote to Updata Europe, copied to Mr. Birkeland. The letter was sent at Mr. Nielsen’s request and was “an indication on our part of an interest in participating in a consortium with Mr. Nielsen for acquiring such majority stake in Updata Europe or its business, assets and undertakings (or part or parts thereof)” upon terms and conditions to be agreed. The letter indicated that access to documents, information, data and people would be required, so that e-Kong could “fully appreciate the business and value of the Subject Assets”. Mr. Nielsen’s evidence was that this letter was also sent to Mr. Jorgensen.

523.

On the following day (27 May), Mr. Nielsen sent a revised Letter of Understanding. This repeated, to a large extent, his previous letter, but with some modifications. It was not a firm bid.

524.

By around this time, and as described in more detail in Section E, a bid timetable had been laid down and correspondence was developing in relation to equality of information and the provision of materials in the data room. Mr. Nielsen did not personally visit the data room, but he engaged Mr. Iversen to do so. On 11 June, Mr. Iversen visited, met Mr. Mantell and subsequently prepared a report for Mr. Nielsen.

525.

On 19 June 2009, e-Kong wrote to the Board of Directors of Updata Europe, referring back to their earlier letter. They referred to having carried out a fact-finding exercise over the past weeks, trying to learn more about the opportunity and referred to their discussions with, amongst others, Mr. Jorgensen and Mr. Homann. They indicated that in the light of their “ample experience of founding and developing different telecommunication companies”, they could see the market potential of Updata and had “gained interest in applying their expertise and experience again while joining existing shareholders of Updata in building Updata to become another profitable and scalable business”. However, they went on to refer to the fact that they had obtained “very limited information, data or knowledge” regarding Updata Europe and its nonUK subsidiaries, and “only until very recently some financial information on Updata UK”. They were therefore not in a position to submit a formal offer, but expressed an interest in exploring the possibility of a proposal which they set out in Annexure B to that letter. The annexure included further financial, legal and operational due diligence on Updata Europe and its subsidiaries.

526.

In the context of causation and loss, the material parts of Mr. Nielsen’s evidence in his witness statement were as follows. Prior to submitting his first letter of understanding on 15 May 2009, he was dissatisfied with the amount of information received from the UK management. They had been reluctant to give information at the March meeting and had not answered the questions sent on 5 April. He had raised his concerns in his letter of understanding. At the time of that letter, he was already in discussions with e-Kong as a potential investor. He had also had discussions with Macquarie itself, but e-Kong quickly developed as the main contender. e-Kong were a serious investor with a very professional approach: it was a company used to buying other companies and creating infrastructure. e-Kong wanted to acquire the whole group, but it was most interested in Updata UK.

527.

Mr. Nielsen regarded the establishment of the Data Room as a positive step; i.e towards making sure both bids had access to the same information. He also hoped that the involvement of e-Kong, which was a large company, might ensure that the bidding process was conducted fairly. But his hopes were disappointed. Mr. Iversen had indeed attended the Data Room, and seen and reviewed the relevant materials which included answers to Mr. Nielsen’s questions and the Updated Kelso Presentation. Mr. Iversen’s due diligence report, based on the information made available to him, was “useless”. As Mr. Nielsen explained in his evidence, this was a reflection on the quality of the information in the Data Room, not on Mr. Iversen. Mr. Nielsen said that:

“the information provided in the data room and the UK Management’s responses to my specific questions were, frankly, disappointing. It was clear to me that UK Management had not provided me with the information they had given to LMS – there was no way in my view that LMS had just got the Updated Kelso Presentation as the basis for their bid. But I wasn’t really in a position to force the information out of them: if they weren’t prepared to give it to me I probably couldn’t get hold of it.”

528.

In relation to the 19 June letter from e-Kong, Mr. Nielsen’s evidence was that despite the lack of information, e-Kong had nevertheless wanted to progress with further discussions. But the valuation of the company based on the information provided was low. Indeed, Mr. Medhurst could not work out why the LMS bid was so high, given the figures. Mr. Nielsen “simply did not have the backing from e-Kong to match that kind of offer; based on the material I had, I could not justify that kind of price”. He then went on to say:

“[54] I would say that if it had been possible, on the basis of information from Updata UK, to value the company at a higher level, the deal would probably have been even more attractive to e-Kong. They had enough money to meet a higher price and any difficulty that I faced in persuading e-Kong to invest in Updata UK had been because, on the values that Mr. Medhurst and I saw in the company, the project was possibly too small

[58] Mr. Medhurst and I were working on the basis of a 5x earnings multiple to value the business. If we had seen that Updata UK’s EBITDA for 2009/10 (based on contracts which were already won, or income streams weighted proportionately to win likelihood) was around £ 5 million, that would have had a significant influence on the valuation we would have attributed to the company.”

529.

Mr. Nielsen was cross-examined for a day. My impression during the course of evidence was that he was honest and fair-minded, and that his evidence was reliable. He had no significant personal interest in the outcome of the litigation, but had come forward because he thought that it was his duty to do so and despite the background of a degree of antipathy or falling out between himself and Mr. Johnsen. He has no business relationship now with Mr. Johnsen or any member of the family. At the time that he gave his evidence, I did not think that the cross-examination caused me to doubt the key features of his written evidence as summarised above.

530.

Nevertheless, and as requested by the Defendants, I have reviewed Mr. Nielsen’s cross-examination (and brief re-examination) in its entirety, and I remain of the same view in relation to his reliability as a witness. Mr. Nielsen spent a considerable amount of time working on the deal over a 6 month period. He sought to take a professional approach, and was assisted by experienced professionals in the corporate finance world. It is clear from the documentary evidence that he was very keen to see the figures for the Updata UK. I accept his evidence that this was the business that was of most interest to him and to any potential investor. As he explained, the Danish companies were ‘distressed’ and operated in a much smaller market than the UK. But it “wasn’t hard to convince that the UK was a substantial investment opportunity”. He recognised the potential of a sale to a strategic trade investor, who could “scale the company much better than … a private equity investment”. “The most important thing was to get the UK numbers in place”. e-Kong’s prime interest was certainly in the UK market, and although they were prepared to look at other markets, they wanted to “grab European foothold and start out with the most interesting market in Europe, being the UK”. The problems that he encountered along the road, and which led to his inability to make a firm bid, were that he “was waiting for information and the answers on key questions”, and ultimately that the figures that he was given were based on poor quality information and did not justify a price higher than that which LMS had offered. As he said: “it’s not the kind of sufficient information you would normally expect in a transaction of this kind”. At the end of his cross-examination, he said that he was very committed, he was very serious; he had a good team with lots of experience “but I did not receive the proper information for the due diligence to come up with a substantial – a substantial or firm offer”. I have no doubt that the Defendants saw Mr. Nielsen as a very real threat, and that this explains why in my view they took steps, by making false representations to Updata Europe, to hobble his bid.

Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence

531.

I did not consider that Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence had any real bearing on my conclusion that if the misrepresentations had not been made, matters would not have developed in such a way that the best offer on the table in late June was an offer from LMS in the terms which Updata Europe ultimately accepted. But it did have some bearing on the question of what would have happened if, contrary to my conclusions, matters had proceeded in essentially the same way that they did proceed, so that this was indeed the only offer on the table at that time.

532.

Mr. Jorgensen had retired from the Bank in 2012. I was told at the start of his evidence that he had been in poor health; that this was a personal matter that he did not want to go into further; and that he would indicate if he needed a break at any stage. I told him that if he needed a break apart from the usual ones, he should tell me. Mr. Jorgensen had given a relatively short witness statement in Danish, because he was not fluent in English. He explained at the start of his cross-examination, however, that his understanding of English was better than his ability to speak it, and that he would be happy to listen to the question in English and then to give his answer in Danish with the benefit of translation. As the cross-examination proceeded, however, Mr. Jorgensen in fact tried to give his evidence in English. From time to time, however, both the questions and the answers required translation, and this was carried out by an interpreter. It was perhaps unfortunate that the same interpreter was not present throughout his evidence: one interpreter attended on the first afternoon of his evidence, and then another interpreter (who to my mind seemed somewhat less accomplished) on the second day.

533.

Some criticisms were made by the Claimants, in their written closing argument, as to the process that was followed: the submission being that all questions and answers should have been translated. I did not consider that these criticisms were justified. It seemed to me that Mr. Jorgensen did understand the questions that he was being asked, and that where there appeared to be a misunderstanding or lack of clarity in either question or answer, assistance was provided by the interpreter. That was my impression at the time, and I have re-read the entire transcript of Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence and it remains my view.

534.

That said, it did seem to me that there was considerable force in the Claimants’ submission that Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence needed to be treated with “considerable caution”. This was not, I emphasise, because Mr. Jorgensen was in any way seeking to give anything other than truthful evidence. Far from it: the fact that he wanted to

give his evidence in English to the best of his ability was to my mind one indication that he was a witness who was trying to assist the court. I also had no doubt, as I listened to his evidence, that he was seeking to assist as best he could. However, it became clear as his evidence progressed – and in particular on the second afternoon of his evidence by which time he may well have been tiring – that he had a very poor recollection of the relevant events. Indeed, some of his answers towards the end of his evidence were treated with some incredulity by Mr. Choo Choy. Mr. Jorgensen thought that the sale to LMS was a sale of Updata Europe, rather than a sale of Updata UK. He said that he did not know that LMS had been working with the UK management and had been discussing the company with them. He said that he did not recall meeting LMS in April 2009 with the UK management, even though the meeting was referred to in his witness statement, and even though he had referred to the meeting in his oral evidence that morning. (“The first meeting we had with LMS to the close I think one month”). He could not remember the LMS offer letter. When asked whether he knew that the UK management were involved in the bidding process, he said that he did not know (prompting Mr. Choo Choy to say that this was “quite extraordinary”). His evidence that the period between the LMS letter to the close (of the sale) was 1 month was not accurate: the period was in fact close to three months (14 April to 9 July). Mr. Jorgensen could not recall many of the documents that he was shown in cross-examination (perhaps unsurprisingly in view of the passage of time).

535.

Mr. Jorgensen’s witness statement addressed the question of how the Bank might or would have acted if different financial information had been presented to the Bank. For example, he expressed that view that if, at the beginning of 2009, he had received

“positive forecasts of likely performance of Updata Europe and its subsidiaries, I believe that … it is very likely that I would have been receptive to allowing Updata Europe to continue as before and I would have put the company under less pressure to search for new investors”. It seemed to me that this evidence was not sustainable in the light of the evidence that Mr. Jorgensen had in fact received positive forecasts of likely performance in January 2009, particularly in relation to Updata UK, but had nevertheless put Updata Europe under some pressure by virtue of the terms of the agreement with reached with Mr. Homann in January 2009.

536.

Much of Mr. Jorgensen’s cross-examination was directed at how he did in fact react to the circumstances as they were understood to be, rather than to the question of how he would have reacted if the circumstances had been different. Indeed, it was only after I had asked counsel as to whether he was challenging the relevant paragraphs of Mr. Jorgensen’s witness statement, as to what he would have done in different circumstances, that questions were directed towards that issue. Mr. Jorgensen clearly had difficulty in recalling the events of the time, and in answering questions which were hypothetical. Indeed, the opening sentence of paragraph 31 of his witness statement stated, very fairly, that he could not say with certainty what he would have done differently if there had been information available to him that “confirmed positive forecasts about Updata UK’s performance”. Similarly, paragraph 36 of his witness statement acknowledges, sensibly in my view, that Mr. Jorgensen would have been less inclined to stop the sale process at a late stage, once LMS had been awarded exclusivity.

537.

Having considered Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence as a whole, and against the background described above, I do not consider that I can properly rely upon any particular passage in Mr. Jorgensen’s witness statement, or any specific answer in his oral evidence, in relation to how he would have reacted if the facts had been different. Rather, my conclusions as to what would likely have happened, as described above, are based upon what seems to me to be inherently probable in the light of Mr. Jorgensen’s attitude as expressed in the contemporaneous documents at the time, and as supplemented by evidence from witnesses who dealt with him, when taken together with a number of consistent themes in Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence. In particular, it is in my view clear that Mr. Jorgensen:

a)

did want to see Updata Europe’s debt reduced significantly, albeit not eliminated;

b)

did show a degree of flexibility in his approach to Updata Europe and Updata Denmark and did not want to bankrupt or liquidate them, but did not have limitless patience;

c)

was influenced by what he was told by Mr. Homann, as shown by the agreement reached in January, and also in the 20 May e-mail sent out shortly after Mr. Homann’s e-mail of 18 May;

d)

was concerned to ensure equality of treatment as between the bidders;

e)

was interested in a sale at fair value, and believed at the time (as he said in his evidence) that LMS was paying a fair price;

f)

would have been very reluctant to stop the sale at a late stage in the process, particularly if there was a risk that a buyer with available cash might then walk away.

Mr. Homann’s evidence

538.

Mr. Helge Homann died prior to the trial, and therefore his evidence could not be subject to cross-examination. Nevertheless, I considered that his evidence had some value in confirming my conclusions as set out above. As far as Mr. Jorgensen was concerned, Mr. Homann’s evidence was in substance that the former was persuadable: “I found it was always possible to persuade Mr. Jorgensen not to accept an offer, so long as we could persuade him that it was not a good offer, and that Updata Europe would continue to service its debt. So long as Updata Europe could show a proper income stream, Mr. Jorgensen might not be happy, but he would be satisfied”. He referred in this connection to the agreement reached in January 2009, which was made on the basis of expected receipt of dividends. To my mind, this evidence was consistent with what occurred.

539.

Mr. Homann then went on to describe his involvement with Mr. Nielsen’s bid, the due diligence process, and certain work that he carried out using the Financial Overview. He described his frustration at the lack of figures from the UK management, and his involvement in discussions with e-Kong including a conference call on 23 June between various participants (e-Kong, Mr. Nielsen and his team, Mr. Holm and Mr. Birkeland). The problem at this stage was that e-Kong were not in a position to bid on

the basis of the limited information that was available following due diligence. His evidence was that: “… the budget forecast was key in enabling – or preventing – a rival bid from being calculated”. He said that with the financial information contained in various documents (including the Weighted Budget), “the proper share price would have been around five times what Mr. Nielsen was able to justify on the basis of the figures that were actually provided to him by Mr. Baldorino and Mr. Bennett”. He went on to say:

“If Mr. Nielsen had seen the Budget Pack, which was not in the Data Room, he would have been able to use all of the detailed information in there for each contract to put together a bid. With this information, I would have been able to persuade the Bank to give us more time”.

540.

Again, I consider that Mr. Homann’s evidence, albeit not cross-examined upon, is consistent with the inherent probabilities as well as the evidence of Mr. Nielsen himself.

H6: Analysis and conclusions: quantification

541.

Having resolved the causation issue in favour of the Claimants, the next issue which arises is how to quantify Updata Europe’s loss. Mr. Booth submitted that the exercise was a straightforward one. The ordinary measure of loss is the difference between the value of the asset disposed of and the price obtained at the date of the loss: see Smith New Court and Platt. He said that in principle (and subject to his argument that the appropriate date of loss was 2014) there was no reason to depart from that approach. It would be inappropriate to apply any discount to reflect the possibility that Updata Europe would not be able to obtain the market value on a sale.

542.

The Defendants’ submission was, in essence, that this was an unrealistic approach in circumstances where there was considerable uncertainty as to whether any increased price could in fact be achieved. They argued for a mathematical approach, which involved assessing separately the chances of LMS increasing its offer, Mr. Nielsen increasing his offer, the Bank agreeing to extend time, and factoring in any other contingencies (such as other purchasers making proposals), and then multiplying each of the resulting probabilities. At most, whether on this approach or any other, any increase would have been no more than 5 or 10% above the price which LMS actually paid. Mr. Choo Choy pointed to various matters, including the uncertainty relating to whether Mr. Nielsen/e-Kong would have made an increased offer, and their difficulties in so doing in light of the management’s unwillingness to work with Mr. Nielsen. There were other factors militating against Updata Europe’s ability to obtain the market price; in particular, the tight timetable, and the fact that any new purchasers would have to carry out due diligence. Any purchaser would also inevitably know about the Bank debt, and would be looking to pay the minimum price possible. It would also be appropriate to take into account the value which LMS gave up by allowing Newwatch to retain its shares and acquire more. Furthermore, any hypothetical outside purchaser would be competing against an incumbent management, which was the worst kind of opposition. All of these matters would have a moderating influence on any possible increased price.

543.

In my judgment, the starting point is, again, that this is a case where the Claimants parted with a valuable existing asset which they owned. There was no dispute that a claim for the value of an asset disposed of in consequence of fraud was a recognised head of loss in the context of the tort of deceit, although of course credit needs to be given for the value received. The Claimants have established, on the basis of my findings above, that, if the representations had not been made, they would not have disposed of the asset on the terms which they did, and that the effect of the misrepresentation was that they were presented with a best offer which was lower than would have been the case if the misrepresentations had not been made.

544.

I agree with the Claimants that the starting point in the present case ought to be the true value of the asset at the time when the disposal took place; see Smith New Court Securities Ltd. v Citibank N.A.

545.

In the present case, I do not consider it appropriate to take any date later than the date of sale (or thereabouts in 2009) as the starting point for quantification. I do not consider that 2014 date (as contended for by the Claimants in their alternative case) would be a reasonable date to take. The position in 2009, and in particular July 2009, was that the Bank wanted a reduction in the indebtedness, and I have no doubt that it would not have been amenable to suggestions which would have had the effect of significantly postponing a large capital repayment, even if there were some possibility of dividends being paid and also a possibility of future growth in the value of the company. The evidence showed that the Bank had its own pressures and problems in the aftermath of the financial crisis, albeit I was not persuaded that there was any particular pressure by the Danish FSA in relation to the Updata Europe loans. Whilst I have concluded that there might have been some flexibility in terms of extending the timing of a sale, I consider that this is to be measured in terms of weeks or a few months at most, and not in terms of years. If there was a buyer in 2009 willing and able to buy the company, with funds available, the Bank would not have wanted the buyer to walk away, as Mr. Jorgensen’s evidence made clear.

546.

Updata Europe would have recognised this reality, including the need to preserve its relationship with the Bank (since Updata Europe including Updata Denmark were still in business) and would have proceeded to a sale. This would also have the benefit of repaying Vald. Nielsen in respect of the monies originally provided by Mr. Johnsen’s grandmother. I do not therefore consider that Updata Europe would, in July 2009 (when the sale took place) or September 2009 (when the extension agreed with the Bank ran out) have attempted to obtain an indefinite postponement of a sale of the shares in Updata UK. Nor do I think, on the evidence, that there would have been a real or substantial chance of obtaining the Bank’s agreement to such a postponement. In the light of Mr. Hildebrandt’s frank evidence, I also do not consider that, in the very difficult banking conditions of late 2008 and 2009, there was any real or substantial chance of Updata Europe finding another Bank willing to refinance. Accordingly, the relevant date for the assessment of loss is July 2009.

547.

These conclusions also mean that the Claimants’ alternative claim based on the 2014 date – namely a claim based on “loss of a chance” for the lost opportunity of persuading the Bank to postpone a sale – also fails. It is fair to note that Mr. Booth never embraced a claim based on “loss of a chance” with any enthusiasm. His opening submissions contained no reference to loss of a chance, and his primary submission (in a short note produced a few days into the trial, after I had raised the potential applicability of “loss of a chance” principles) was that this was not a loss of a chance case. I consider that Mr. Booth was correct, including in relation to his case for a 2014 date to assess loss. In accordance with the cases which I have already discussed, the issue of whether or not the Claimants would have decided, and would have been in a position, to postpone sale until 2014 is an issue to be resolved on the balance of probabilities: it concerns what the Claimants would have done. If the Claimants were unable to establish these facts, on a balance of probabilities, then the claim based on a 2014 sale should fail. There is in my view no intermediate case based on the lost opportunity to persuade Mr. Jorgensen – who was not a potential purchaser of the shares – to permit the Claimants to retain their shares.

548.

Accordingly, I return to my starting point for the assessment of loss, namely the value of the asset in 2009. The question is whether that is also the finishing point in the assessment of damages. In my view, even though the true value of the asset at the date of loss is the starting point for assessing loss, it is appropriate to consider all the factual circumstances in deciding whether or not it is appropriate to award damages by reference to the true value of the asset. Mr. Booth was inclined to agree that, in some circumstances at least, an award of damages less than the true value may be appropriate. He gave the example of a vendor who was, for some reason or another, not motivated to try to obtain the true value of an asset, because he was very favourably inclined to a particular purchaser.

549.

However, I do not think that that is the only case in which the facts may result in an award of damages which is different to the true value. The quantification of damages is, even in a case of fraud, compensatory not punitive. There is no authority which in my view compels the conclusion that, in a case of fraud, the court must assume that the shares could have been sold for their true value. There may be various factors which militate against this conclusion; for example: time-pressures on a vendor to sell, a weak bargaining position, a lack of expertise or professional assistance in relation to selling an asset where there is no instantly available market (such as a stock exchange) for the purchase of such assets. It seems to me that it is appropriate, before awarding damages by reference to the true value of the asset, to consider the chances of the relevant event occurring. I consider this to be in accordance with the law as to quantification of loss which is summarised in Wellesley and the cases there considered.

550.

Thus, in Mallett v McMonagle [1970] AC 166,176, Lord Diplock said:

“But in assessing damages which depend upon its view as to what will happen in the future or would have happened in the future if something had not happened in the past, the court must make an estimate as to what are the chances that a particular thing will or would have happened and reflect those chances, whether they are more or less than even, in the amount of damages which it awards”.

551.

Similarly, in Vasiliou at paragraph [25], Patten LJ (with whom the other judges agreed) said:

“Where the quantification of loss depends upon an assessment of events which did not happen the judge is left to assess the chances of the alternative scenario he is presented with. This has nothing to do with loss of chance as such. It is simply the judge making a realistic and reasoned assessment of a variety of circumstances in order to determine what the level of loss has been”.

552.

Patten LJ then referred to Parabola, where Toulson LJ said (in the context of a claim for lost profits):

“The next task is to quantify the loss. Where that involves a hypothetical exercise, the court does not apply the same balance of probability approach as it would to the proof of past facts. Rather, it estimates the loss by making the best attempt it can to evaluate the chances, great or small (unless those chances amount to no more than remote speculation), taking all significant factors into account”.

553.

In the present case, I have found that Updata Europe would not have retained the relevant asset beyond 2009, because there was no real or substantial chance of persuading the Bank to allow them to avoid a sale. The alternative scenario with which I am presented, on the Claimants’ case, is therefore that the shares would have been sold in 2009 for their true market value. I have to consider the chances, great or small, of that occurring. This is, as the above passages show, not a “loss of a chance” analysis, but simply the process of quantification of loss taking into account all relevant circumstances.

554.

I do not consider that the possibility of a discount from the true, objectively assessed, value of the shares involves taking, as the Claimants sought to suggest, an “arbitrary” approach. In various cases, the courts have awarded damages based on the reduced chance of realising what might otherwise be regarded as the true value of the asset: see, for example, First Interstate Bank of California v Cohen Arnold [1996] CLC 174 (CA), and Blue Circle Industries Plc v Ministry of Defence [1999] Ch 289. McGregor on Damages paragraph [10-050] specifically treats the latter case as a case of quantification of loss.

555.

However, the Claimants drew attention to the judgment of the Court of Appeal in Elektrim. The issue there concerned damages payable for breach of a contract which, if performed, would have required the valuation of shares by two investment bankers and a consequent payment to the claimants. Arden LJ delivering the judgment of the Court of Appeal said [46] that:

In the present type of case the court has to assess what a banker would have concluded as to the valuation of certain shares. That may not be easy but if something of value has been lost, the court must do its best to estimate that value and should not too readily decide that it is a matter of chance what the true value of something as concrete as a share is likely to be.

556.

I do not, however, consider that the decision in Elektrim means that it is never permissible to make an allowance for contingencies surrounding the ability of a party to realise the true value of shares, albeit that care needs to be exercised before doing

so. Ultimately, the question of whether a discount is appropriate depends upon the context in which the issue arises. On the facts of the present case as described above, where the relevant asset was in the course of being sold and there is obvious uncertainty as to what price could be achieved, I consider that it is appropriate to consider the chances of the sale achieving the true value of the asset in question, and if appropriate to apply a discount to reflect uncertainty.

557.

However, I do not accept that it is appropriate to address this question by considering each particular contingency on which a sale may have depended, and then multiplying the resulting probabilities together. The authorities reviewed by Bryan J. in AssetCo indicate that this may be appropriate in some loss of a chance cases. But for reasons already given, I do not consider that this is a loss of a chance case. In any event, neither AssetCo, nor the line of authority considered in that case including the seminal decision in Allied Maples, involved the question of how to value the claimant’s loss in circumstances where he was deprived of a valuable asset by fraud. As I have indicated, the starting point in such cases is the true value of the asset, but with the possibility of a discount to reflect the chances of realising the true value of that asset in the particular circumstances of the case. I would also in any event have considered the multiplication approach to be inappropriate in any event. The central question is to consider the prospect of a purchaser, whether it be LMS, some other private equity house, Mr. Nielsen, a trade buyer or otherwise, paying the true value for the shares, and doing so within the timescale of a sale by September 2009 or a few weeks or months thereafter. It would in my view be inappropriate to try to assess the percentage chance of any particular purchaser buying the shares, and then multiply together the various percentages. The reason can be illustrated by a simple example. If there was a single potential purchaser where the chance of paying true value was 75%, the damages would be assessed at 75%. But if there were two such purchasers, the damages would, on the multiplication theory, be calculated on the basis of a lower figure, namely 75% x 75%. The larger the number of potential purchasers at 75%, the smaller the damages on the basis of the Defendants’ multiplication approach. This counter-intuitive result must in my view be wrong. The reason is that each potential purchaser does not constitute a separate contingency that needs to be considered and evaluated and overcome by Updata Europe in order to obtain the benefit of a sale. In order to obtain a sale at true value, there only needed to be one purchaser. If there was one purchaser who was willing to pay 75% of the true value, the existence of other purchasers who were only willing to pay less would not diminish the amount that could be obtained from the purchaser willing to pay more.

558.

I consider that, as in many of the cases involving assessment of damages where there is an element of uncertainty, it is appropriate to take a broad view as to the appropriate discount in the light of the relevant facts. Turning now to the facts, I consider that there should be a material discount from the true value of the asset, but I do not consider that there are any factors which lead me to conclude that this should be a very substantial one. Indeed, it seems to me that there are good reasons for awarding something relatively close to true value.

559.

This is a case where the evidence is clear that the majority shareholding in Updata UK was an asset which was actually and potentially attractive to a variety of investors. The initial offering by Tenon to the private equity market quickly resulted in interest from a number of houses. It is true that the offers made were at or around what was understood to be the level of the Bank debt, but this was an unsurprising and obvious consequence of the “opportunity” having been presented as one to acquire the shareholding at that level. The AMR Report showed that Updata UK would potentially be of interest to trade buyers; i.e. to companies in the technology sector. This is borne out by the interest shown by e-Kong. The management itself was clearly very confident as to the future of the business, and were highly motivated to remove Update Europe and retain (with private equity investment) control of the business. There was another bidder actually on the scene (Mr. Nielsen), with a potential backer and a capable corporate finance adviser. In the context of causation, I have already indicated that, had the representation not been made, these and other factors would have had the effect of driving the price offered towards the true market value of the business. In addition, the expert accounting evidence served to confirm, in my view, the existence of a market of willing buyers for the asset in question. There was no suggestion, for example, that the asset was so specialised that there was only a very limited potential pool of potential purchasers.

560.

I also consider that this conclusion (i.e. that damages should be close to the true value of the asset) is supported, and reinforced, by a point which Mr. Booth emphasised in the course of argument. This is a case of fraud, where what happened was that the Defendants sought deliberately to divert the course of events from that which they would and should have taken if the 20 April and 3 June e-mails had not contained false information. In the context of an asset for sale, that course of events should ordinarily lead to the vendor receiving the fair value of that asset. In those circumstances, I do not consider that the court should look favourably on arguments to the effect that fair value should not be taken as the measure of loss, because there are too many imponderables to know whether fair value would have been received. There are always imponderables. But the Defendants were sufficiently concerned as to how events would transpire that they found it necessary to misrepresent the position. Again in the present context, their misrepresentations form an evidential weapon which should lead the court to be somewhat sceptical in relation to the Defendants’ submission that the Claimants would not, if there had been no deceit, have received the true value of their asset.

561.

I have considered the various factors relied upon by the Defendants in support of their case that, ultimately, Updata Europe would have received little more than the amount which LMS paid, and the extent to which it is appropriate the reduce the damages, otherwise assessed on the basis of the true value of the asset, because of these contingencies. The most significant points seem to me to be as follows.

562.

First, the sale was carried out in 2009 under some pressure from the Bank, and in a timescale which (once Mr. Jorgensen sent his e-mail on 20 May 2009) was to some extent dictated by the Bank. There was also the pressure arising from the fact that the January 2009 agreement between the Bank and Updata Europe/ Denmark meant the facilities could be terminated in September. But I do not consider that these factors should result in a very substantial reduction from the true value of the asset. The initial misrepresentation was made on 20 April 2009, when no timetable had been imposed on the bidders and there was still a fair amount of time to September. Even on 3 June, there were still some months before September. The evidence indicated to me that the process leading to a sale, including due diligence, can be accomplished relatively quickly if parties set their minds to it. Furthermore, by the middle of May

2009, if not before, a data room was being contemplated and was then set up; thereby facilitating any due diligence that a potential purchaser would wish to carry out. Accordingly, I did not think that the time-scales involved were such as to require a very substantial discount to the value of the asset because of the pressure to sell.

563.

Secondly, another possible discount arises from the fact that Mr. Johnsen had been trying for some time to raise investment, but had failed to do so. It is also the case, and an important consideration, that Mr. Johnsen’s efforts to find a purchaser gave the impression of being somewhat amateur. He did not engage professional advisers (the equivalent of Tenon or Mr. Medhurst), but rather seems to have carried out the work on his own, approaching people whom he knew or to whom he was introduced. These efforts had not been successful. Mr. Johnsen explained that, certainly in a number of cases, this was because he was seeking investment at the parent company level, and the structure of the shareholding made this unattractive. I did not think that such matters were a reflection on the true value of Updata UK, but were a reflection on Mr.

Johnsen’s ability to obtain full value for Updata Europe’s shares.

564.

On the other hand, whilst it is true that Mr. Johnsen had not succeeded in finding investors, the position by mid-April 2009 was that the Defendants had succeeded in finding a number of private equity houses who were potentially interested, and the Defendants were themselves highly motivated to carry out an MBO. So whilst Mr. Johnsen had not successfully found potential investors, the Defendants had done so with the assistance of firm of corporate finance advisers (Tenon) with expertise in this area. Similarly, Mr. Nielsen was using the services of Mr. Medhurst, who was looking (albeit with inadequate and false information as to the projected results of Updata UK) at both the trade market and the private equity market. It is wrong, in my view, simply to focus on Mr. Johnsen’s efforts on the “sell” side whilst ignoring the efforts which had been made, and could be made, on the “buy side” as well, where there was strong motivation for a sale and a potential market of buyers had been established. Furthermore, if the misrepresentations had not been made, Mr. Johnsen would have had figures – which had attracted the private equity market – which he could show other potential investors.

565.

Thirdly, there is the position of Newwatch, which was allowed to roll over its shareholding and acquire further shares. Neither expert suggested that this factor affected the true value of Updata Europe’s shares. However, it does seem to me that it is a factor which is potentially relevant to the price that would have been obtained upon a sale. Mr. Johnsen would in my view have been attracted to proposals which may have fallen short of the true value of Updata Europe’s shares, if they were accompanied by a willingness to allow Newwatch to retain its interest and acquire further shares.

566.

Fourthly, and to an extent related to the previous point, I consider that Mr. Johnsen was in a relatively weak bargaining position. It is a fact that Updata Europe had a substantial indebtedness to the Bank, and was under pressure to sell. Any potential purchaser would not have found it too difficult to find this out, since Updata Europe’s most recent accounts referred to its indebtedness.

567.

Taking all the relevant factors into account, I consider that the chances of obtaining the true value of the shares was less than 100%. I assess the appropriate discount to reflect the uncertainty of achieving true value at 25%.

I: Fair value of Updata UK

568.

The fair value of the shares in Updata UK as at July 2009 was the subject of expert accountancy evidence from Mr. Doug Hall for the Claimants and Mr. Paul Smethurst for the Defendants. Fair value in this context means the price that would be paid by a willing buyer and willing seller, rather than the price that might be realised in the scenario of a forced sale. Both experts had prepared two detailed written reports, and a very helpful joint report in which the differences between them were identified and the reasons for their respective conclusions were expanded upon.

569.

Both experts were agreed as to the basic principles by which the fair value of shares in a private company such as Updata UK should be ascertained. This involved making an earnings-based assessment by which an estimate of Updata UK’s maintainable earnings as at the date of the SPA on 11 July 2009 (such earnings being measured as EBITDA) is first made. A multiplier should then be applied in order to arrive at an estimate of the “Enterprise Value” of the company. That Enterprise Value would then be adjusted, where necessary, for any net debt. Two other adjustments would then be made, so that there were therefore four main components. These were: (i) maintainable earnings, (ii) the multiplier, (iii) a premium for taking control of the company, and (iv) a discount to reflect the fact that the shares were in a private company.

570.

The experts were agreed that, in relation to (iv), the appropriate discount was 33%. They were disagreed on the other three elements, and the respective positions of the experts were as follows:

a)

Maintainable earnings: £ 7,000,000 (Mr. Hall) or £ 4,500,000 (Mr. Smethurst)

b)

Multiplier: 6 (Mr. Hall) or 4.98 (Mr. Smethurst);

c)

Control premium: 35% (Mr. Hall) or 25% (Mr. Smethurst).

571.

These disagreements resulted in an overall difference between the two experts of around £ 20 million. Mr. Hall’s figure for the fair value of the equity was therefore £ 37,899,000. Mr. Smethurst’s figure was £ 18,666,000. The calculations which produced these figures were set out in their joint report, and are reproduced below:

DH PS Difference

Multiplier 6.00 4.98 1.03

£’000’s £’000’s £’000’s

EBITDA[A] 7,000 4,500 2,500 I

mplied total enterprise value [A x

multiplier] 42,000 22,388 19,613

Less: Net debt (100) (100)

41,000

22,288

19,613

14,665

5,572

9,093

56,565

27,859

28,706

(18,666)

(9,194)

(9,473)

37,899

18,666

19,233

Equity value (minority basis) [B]

Plus: control premium 35% or 25% [B x

35% Or 25%]

Equity controlling basis [C]

Less: Private company discount 33% [C x 33%]

Fair value of equity

572.

The above figures represented the experts’ views as to the fair value of 100% of the equity. Updata Europe had a 60% shareholding, and therefore the fair value of that shareholding would (on the basis that a premium for control was appropriate) be either £ 22.7 million (Mr. Hall) or £ 11.5 million (Mr. Smethurst); i.e. a difference of around £ 11 million. I considered that it would, on the facts of the present case, be appropriate to include such a premium. This is for the simple reason that Updata Europe had a 60% shareholding in Updata UK, whose sale would result in control of the company being transferred to the purchaser.

573.

The figures for maintainable earnings, multiplier, and control premium, as set out above, generally speaking reflected a figure which was at or close to the mid-point of a range of numbers which each expert initially put forward.

Forced sale

574.

It will be apparent from the above figures that there was a significant difference between the fair value of the 60% shareholding, as assessed by the experts, and the consideration received by Updata Europe on the sale to LMS. The amount of that consideration was £ 5,244,798 after taking account of the settlement of an intra group loan of £ 134,312. This was substantially lower than the figure of around £ 11.5 million put forward by Mr. Smethurst.

575.

The explanation for this difference, on Mr. Smethurst’s approach, was that the sale which took place in July 2009 was a “forced sale”. Mr. Smethurst described the characteristics of a “forced sale” as being either or both of the following: a compulsion to contract (i.e. an unwilling seller or purchaser) and/or a reduced sale period. The accountants were agreed that, in general terms, the price achieved on

“forced sale” will be lower than that which might be obtained assuming no forced sale. They were also agreed that it would be for the court to determine if the sale of Updata UK was indeed a “forced sale” and whether, as a result, Updata Europe suffered any loss. Mr. Smethurst’s view was that – whilst acknowledging that it was for the court to determine whether the sale of Updata Europe’s shares was a forced sale – if it was determined that it was a forced sale then (as he said in the joint report)

“there is no loss as the price achieved was the best that could be obtained in the circumstances”. In his first report, he put the matter this way:

“If the Court determines that this was a forced sale then in my view there is no loss. The amount offered and accepted reflected the circumstances of the sale and what a third party was prepared to part with in order to acquire the shares on offer”.

576.

Mr. Hall did not agree that, even if the sale were forced, Updata Europe suffered no loss, “as that rules out any opportunity to have obtained a higher price within the shortened timescale that a forced sale would entail”.

577.

I do not accept Mr. Smethurst’s view that if this were a forced sale, it follows that Updata Europe suffered no loss. It seems to me that on the facts of the present case, where fraud is alleged, it is essential to address the question: what would have happened if the fraudulent misrepresentation had not been made? This issue, addressed in detail in Section H above, involves the resolution of factual matters which are for the court to determine, and are not matters for the expert accountants. It is not right to short-circuit the analysis by proceeding (as did Mr. Smethurst) from a starting point - that the sale had characteristics of a forced sale - directly to the conclusion that there was no loss because the best price was obtained. As Mr. Smethurst fairly accepted in cross examination: “If – if there was fraud involved and some people didn’t have – and some people didn’t have information and others did, then I don’t know what would have happened”.

578.

It became clear in the course of his evidence that Mr. Smethurst’s view, that there was no loss, was reached without factoring in the fact that this was a case in which fraud was alleged. His oral evidence was that, prior to cross-examination, he had not realised that allegations of fraud were being made against the Defendants. Later in his evidence, he accepted that the question of whether or not Updata Europe had suffered a loss would depend upon all the circumstances, including what the effect would have been on the timetable for sale if proper or full information had been provided. He said that if there would have been “some latitude for some other course of action, then that’s where one might explore further”. His concept of a forced sale was very much a concept of the seller having to sell, and having in practice no or little room for manoeuvre. The extent to which there was room for manoeuvre is a factual question which I have addressed in Section H.

579.

I therefore did not derive any assistance from Mr. Smethurst’s view that there had been no loss. Indeed, it seemed to me simply to restate the argument, that Updata Europe would have sold at the LMS price in any event. This is an argument which I have rejected on the facts.

580.

In these circumstances, I did not consider that it was necessary or helpful to answer the question: was this a “forced sale”? If one were to apply Mr. Smethurst’s very broad criteria for “forced sale”, I would conclude that the sale did have some characteristics of such a sale. In one sense it could be said that there was a “compulsion to transact”, and that Updata Europe was not a willing seller. This was because Updata Europe was clearly under pressure to reduce the debt to the Bank, and it would have preferred to have retained its shares if it could. Had there been no significant debt, Updata Europe would not have been selling. However, the sale did not come about because the Bank actually forced Updata Europe to sell against its wishes, and so there was no “compulsion” in that sense. Indeed, when the bidding process concluded, it was Updata Europe’s decision to sell. There was also, again in one sense, a “reduced sale period”: in that a timetable was laid down in May 2009 for the bidding process leading ultimately to a sale. But as described in Section H, the overall timetable for the sale was not unduly compressed. Indeed, the whole process, starting from Mr. Nielsen’s expression of interest in January, took over 6 months, and nearly 3 months passed between the original LMS offer and the conclusion of the sale process.

581.

Overall, for the reasons given in Section H, I did not consider that this was a case where Updata Europe had no latitude or for manoeuvre at all. I also considered that Mr. Hall was right to say that there was a spectrum of “compulsion”, and that there might be different degrees or a spectrum of compulsion. The concept of a “forced sale” therefore involved, as he said, “shades of grey”. At one end of a scale, a bank may demand immediate repayment of a loan. At another end of the scale, it may give the company, say, 6 months to sell; i.e. enough time for an orderly sale. So “it depends where you are between those extremes”.

582.

My conclusion is therefore that such compulsion as existed in the present case did not lead to the conclusion that Updata Europe suffered no loss. However, in assessing the amount of Updata Europe’s loss, and specifically the extent to which Updata Europe would have obtained the fair value of the asset, it is necessary to take into account the pressure from the Bank to sell, and the fact that limitless time to do so was not available. I have sought to reflect these and other factors in my assessment of the loss suffered in the present case by application of a 25% discount from the true value for the reasons given in Section H.

The LMS offer

583.

A different line of argument on behalf of the Defendants, but leading to the same conclusion, was that this was a case where the market was tested, and where – in the context of a competitive bidding process – LMS made an offer to buy. The price at which they bought should therefore be treated as the market price or the fair value in the real world. The competitive bidding process started at an early stage. LMS was originally selected as the management’s preferred bidder after they had put in a proposal to UK management at the start of April 2009. At that time, LMS knew that they were in competition with other private equity houses. In due course, when LMS made its first offer to Updata Europe in April, its second offer in May, and then repeated that offer in June, LMS was doing so knowing that it was in competition with Mr. Nielsen. Accordingly, whilst the accountants might have their own views as to what was fair value, the best evidence of fair value was the offer which LMS actually made and which was accepted. In this context, the Defendants emphasised

that this offer made by LMS was made on the basis of full knowledge of the optimistic management’s forecasts, and was not therefore depressed because of a lack of financial information.

584.

I do not accept this argument. I agree with the Claimants that it is inappropriate to determine fair value by reference to the price that a single bidder was prepared to offer; particularly in view of the expert evidence which indicates that the LMS offer was at a significant undervalue. There may be a variety of reasons for the price offered by a particular bidder, and which do not reflect on the true value of the asset. For example, the bidder may be interested in the asset, but only if he can acquire it cheaply. He may have internal criteria, such as a targeted internal rate of return, which dictate the level of his offer. The level of his bid may have been dictated by a perception that a bank will pressurise a seller to sell in order to pay off a bank debt.

585.

The position is different if, instead of looking at a single bidder, there are a range of bids made by different players in the market. In the present case, that did not happen. There were a number of private equity houses which expressed interest, to Tenon and LMS, in the acquisition in early April. But these expressions of interest were not made to Updata Europe, but rather as part of a potential negotiation with Updata UK’s management. Furthermore, these expressions of interest were given in the context of the private equity houses having been told, in the Tenon Memorandum, that the opportunity was to acquire the asset at the level of the bank debt. It is therefore not surprising that their proposals were pitched at around that level.

586.

A further argument advanced by the Claimants, in support of their case that the LMS bid was not a guide to fair value, was that LMS had been told that Mr. Nielsen had been given different information as to the expected performance of the company. In that regard, the Claimants relied upon a statement in the initial presentation by LMS on 2 April 2009:

“Ex UD [Updata] AS chairman [i.e. Mr. Nielsen] possible “fly in ointment” and unfriendly party due to Peter Johnson conflict 2 yrs ago – also working off unrealistic projections”.

587.

The Claimants suggested that the “unrealistic projections” were the low projections contained in the Financial Overview. If so, then Mr. Nielsen would not have been perceived as likely to put in a competitive bid; because he was wrongly proceeding on the basis of the low figures. The Defendants, in contrast, suggested that “unrealistic projections” was a reference to the fact that Mr. Nielsen had been given the rather higher figures that had been circulated to Mr. Homann and others towards the end of 2008.

588.

I am not prepared to proceed on the basis that LMS knew that Mr. Nielsen was working from the unrealistically low figures in the Financial Overview. As the Defendants correctly pointed out, Mr. Hooft was not cross-examined on this particular passage in the presentation. It remains unclear as to what “unrealistic projections” LMS was referring. In my view, it is at least as likely that LMS was referring to the higher figures which had been in circulation at the end of 2008. If it was a reference to the much lower figures, then it is difficult to see why Mr. Nielsen was a possible “fly in the ointment”. Furthermore, no allegation of fraud has been made against LMS, and it seemed to me that an allegation that LMS knew that Mr. Nielsen was working from

lower figures would come very close (particularly in the light of the correspondence leading to the 3 June e-mail) to an allegation of fraud against LMS.

589.

A variation on these themes was the reliance placed by the Defendants on the value placed by LMS on the acquired asset at the end of 2009. The value attributed to LMS’

53.3% stake in Updata Infrastructure in its annual report for 2009 was approximately £ 8 million. This implied that the value of 100% of the company as a whole was approximately £ 15 million; an increase of 29% on its acquisition cost. This 2009 valuation to an extent supported the Claimants’ case the company was worth more than LMS paid for it, but also supported the Defendants’ case that the figures put forward by the accountants were too high. I did not, however, consider that I derived any real assistance from this valuation. There was no information as to how this value, used for the purposes of LMS’s annual report, was arrived at, and what criteria were applied. Moreover, I again do not consider that it is appropriate to value the asset, having regard to the expert evidence, by reference to the valuation of LMS alone.

Approach

590. Accordingly, my approach to ascertaining the fair value of the relevant asset is to consider the four principal constituent elements which the experts used in their methodology, and to resolve the three issues on which they were in disagreement. In order to avoid unnecessarily complicating the analysis, I shall express my ultimate conclusions – as did the experts in the table set out above – by reference to a single figure, rather than identifying a range and then a figure at or close to the mid-point.

Maintainable earnings

591.

Both experts took as their starting point a figure for the financial year (“FY”) 20092010 which was contained in a document called “Gross Profit Breakdown v10” which was prepared by Mr. Mantell. This document was last modified on 9 July 2009, shortly before the SPA was signed in the early hours of 11 July 2009, and therefore contains the management’s figures on almost the eve of the sale. The EBITDA shown in this document was £ 7,469,000. However, Mr. Hall had identified that this figure wrongly failed to take into account certain overheads or administrative costs totalling £ 809,000. This meant that the figure of £ 7,469,000 should be reduced to £ 6,691,000 for the FY 2009-2010. This figure was somewhat higher than the equivalent FY 2009/2010 figure in the March Weighted Budget (which was £ 6,071,000), and this reflected Updata UK’s strong performance since the time when that budget had been prepared. It should also be noted that the figure, whether £ 6,691,000 or £ 6,071,000, represented a very significant increase over the results for the FY 2008/2009 which had ended at the end of June. The company’s results for the FY 2008/2009, as set out in due course in restated accounts for that year, were £ 1.869 million. Importantly, however, both experts agreed that the relevant starting point for maintainable earnings was the FY 2009/2010, rather than the “trailing” FY 2008/2009.

592.

Using this starting point of the “Gross Profit Breakdown v.10” prepared in July 2009, Mr. Hall then made an estimate of earnings for the subsequent years to June 2011, 2012 and 2013. He assumed that the company would win 8 new contracts per year in these subsequent years. This compared to 7 new contracts secured in the FY to June 2009, and 14 new contracts secured in the FY to June 2010. His projections for the subsequent years were £ 6.767 million (2011), £ 7.819 million (2012), and £ 9.161

million (2013). The weighted average of these figures, applying a greater weighting to the earlier years, was £ 7.200 million. Mr. Hall rounded this down to £ 7 million; a figure which he considered could reasonably have been assumed by the UK management of Updata UK at the date of the SPA to be the maintainable earnings of the company. It was this figure of £ 7,000,000 which is contained in the table set out above.

593.

Mr. Smethurst started at the same figure of £ 7.4 million contained in the “Gross

Profit Breakdown v.10”. But Mr. Smethurst reduced it to a range of £ 4.2 - £ 4.7 million, ultimately a mid-point of £ 4.5 million for maintainable earnings. The reductions from the £ 7.4 million starting point were made for a number of reasons. Mr. Smethurst considered that a willing purchaser would not ascribe any value to contracts which Updata UK had weighted as having a probability of 50% or below. He also reduced the weighting of 90% and 70% probability contracts to 70% and 50% respectively. He also considered a contemporaneous e-mail from Mr. Szpiro of LMS, setting out his views as to maintainable earnings. This e-mail (described in more detail below) showed year-on-year reductions in projected earnings, and Mr. Smethurst applied the same percentage reductions as shown in the LMS e-mail. He also applied a 10-25% reduction in gross profit on rental and installation revenue on the basis of likely public sector cuts. Mr. Smethurst’s figure of £ 4.2 million assumed a 25% reduction, and his figure of £ 4.7 million reflected a 10% reduction. His figures also made allowance for the exclusion of overheads/ administrative expenses.

594.

Each expert supported his approach by reference to various factors. Mr. Hall referred to the fact that Updata UK’s revenue was not derived from one off sales, with no following rental stream. Rather, its revenue and margins were incremental as it added new contracts, each of which would provide a revenue stream for multiple years and with the good prospect of renewal at the end. Although it was relevant to look at the wider economic and commercial environment when considering the value of Updata UK, including the global financial crisis in late 2008, it was also important to look at the report prepared by AMR in July 2009 as part of due diligence for LMS. This showed that, notwithstanding the crisis, AMR considered that Updata UK’s business was likely to prove very successful. AMR reported positively on a revenue forecast of approximately £ 21.4 million for FY 2010, and EBITDA for that year of approximately £ 6.9 million. Mr. Hall drew attention to the forecast of maintainable earnings in the LMS e-mail of 29 June 2009. In his view, this supported a maintainable EBITDA level of approximately £ 7 million at that time.

595.

Mr. Smethurst referred to, and described in some detail, the wider economic and commercial environment. There was a general lack of available finance/ lending from banks to prospective purchasers. This, and the general economic climate, impacted upon the price that purchasers were prepared to pay in connection with corporate acquisitions. The number of corporate transactions was significantly reduced in 2009. The financial crisis also had an impact on the amount which local authorities were prepared to pay. Potential cuts to local authority spending were a matter of concern to Updata UK and a feature of the commercial landscape. Against this background, a prospective purchaser would not be looking at maintainable earnings of £ 7 million for a company which had never achieved EBITDA of anything approaching that level. The figure of £ 7 million represented a multiple of around 3.75 times the earnings achieved in 2009 (£ 1.869 million). It was not credible that a hypothetical purchaser

would use this value when considering how much to pay. Given the economic climate, a purchaser would take a more cautious view of contracts with only a limited chance of coming to fruition. Mr. Smethurst also drew attention, in addition to the uncertainty and instability caused by the global credit crisis and the threats of cuts in public spending, to question-marks as to the continuity of the existing UK management. Although there were generally positive comments in the AMR report as to Updata UK’s prospects, that report was not considering the amount that might be paid as between a willing buyer and seller, and did not contain a figure for maintainable earnings.

596.

It seemed to me that each expert made reasonably arguable points, as summarised above, in support of the views which each put forward. This is not a case where it would be appropriate to prefer the view of one expert against the other. I considered that a prospective purchaser would assess the company’s maintainable earnings at some point on the spectrum between the figures which each expert put forward. I consider that the appropriate point would be marginally more towards Mr. Hall’s figures than Mr. Smethurst’s for the following reasons.

597.

First, I consider that it is helpful to look at the figures for maintainable earnings which were given by Mr. Szpiro of LMS in his e-mail to Mr. Bennett on 29 June 2009. These figures were not in any way influenced by the exigencies of the present litigation. The purpose of preparing figures was explained by Mr. Szpiro at the start of his e-mail as follows:

“Richard

Please find attached a summary headline P&L for years 20112014.

To date we have focused on the 2009 out-turn and 2010 but we also need to give some consideration to the outer year figures as these will ultimately drive value on exit. To this end, it would be helpful if LMS could have a session with Vic, Jules and yourself at some point this week to discuss our broad assumptions. I will be in Reigate tomorrow but I know Pieter in particular would like to be present.

The attached figures are LMS’s base/conservative case figures and essentially build on the 2010 figures for “Current”, “In the Bag” and “Weighted” (as per Julian’s model, although here are small differences if trying to reconcile) by including further contract wins (called “New”) which are not in the pipeline”.

598.

Mr. Spiro therefore described the figures as “LMS’s base/ conservative case figures”. They built on figures which Mr. Mantell had provided. Mr. Szpiro made various assumptions as to further contract wins. He described the assumption applied to the

“Total Contract Value” of new contract wins as “conservative” and “somewhat harsh”. His figures showed wins, but the Total Contract Value was forecast to drop from £ 18.3 million in 2011 to £ 7.3 million in 2014.

599.

The bottom line EBITDA figures, which were contained in the attachment to the email, showed projections of: £ 7.4 million (2010); £ 6.515 million (2011); £ 6.633 million (2012); £ 6.791 million (2013); and £ 6.992 million (2014) see paragraph 119 above. The starting point for these figures, namely £ 7.4 million, was the same figure as in due course appeared in the July 2009 “Gross Profit Breakdown v.10” which both experts used. It was a figure which both experts agreed was overstated by around £ 800,000 because of the exclusion of overheads/ administrative expenses. It follows that the other figures for projected EBITDA, which assumed a 5% growth in administrative costs, would have been similarly overstated. After making this deduction, it will be seen that the figures for maintainable earnings in the years 20112014, as estimated by Mr. Szpiro, were between £ 5.7 million and £ 6.1 million.

600.

Mr. Szpiro did not give evidence at the trial, but Mr. Hooft was asked about this document and said that he remembered it. He disagreed with the proposition that the figures were conservative. In particular, he took issue with the starting figure of £ 7.4 million, and said that LMS had far more detailed figures from Tenon. LMS’s view for 2009/2010, he said, was “more in line of 5/6 million, not 7.4”. (It will be recalled that the figure in the Tenon Memorandum was just over £ 6 million.) He explained that Mr. Szpiro was seeking to extrapolate into the future from contracts recently won. When asked whether these were “intended to be realistic conservative assumptions as regards what was expected to happen going into the future”, Mr. Hooft said that he was just “disputing the word “conservative” because we at LMS did not think for example that 7.4 in 2010 was conservative.”

601.

I think that it is more likely than not that, notwithstanding Mr. Hooft’s evidence, the figures attached to the e-mail were indeed intended to be conservative, which is what Mr. Szpiro’s e-mail says. Because there has been no disclosure of LMS’s internal documents in these proceedings, there are no other contemporaneous LMS figures available. Viewed overall, and bearing in mind the error in relation to overheads, I consider that the LMS e-mail is relevant evidence that a willing purchaser would conservatively assess the company’s maintainable earnings looking into the future, and beyond FY 2010, as between £ 5.7 million and £ 6.1 million; i.e. a midpoint of £

5.9 million. This is consistent with Mr. Hooft’s evidence that LMS was looking at £56 million.

602.

Secondly, I agree with Mr. Hall that the AMR report does provide a valuable contemporaneous insight as to the prospects of the business, again uninfluenced by the exigencies of litigation. I thought that it was contemporaneous evidence that counteracted the suggested negative or at least cautious approach which, according to Mr. Smethurst, would be taken by a prospective purchaser.

603.

Thus, page 7 of the report describes how the company “took off in 2008.” The AMR report as a whole serves to explain why the company had succeeded, and gave a very positive view as to its future prospects. In particular, the report contained a fairly detailed analysis of the market, and amongst the headline points were: “Updata is well positioned to renew existing local authority contracts; good growth is possible beyond the pipeline, subject to competition” (page 12); “Respondent interviews indicate a high likelihood of further contract renewals” (page 13); “Updata’s pipeline is achievable at the probabilities Updata has assumed” (page 50); “Updata has good potential to add further customers in regions where it is already present, as the marginal cost of serving them is low” (page 18); “Through Logicalis, Updata has won

the PSBA, which will act as a springboard for additional Welsh contracts” (page 26); “Updata is a niche player in the local authority and education broadband market; its public sector focus is a relative advantage” (page 48); “High capital costs of an alternative provider, together with strong performance against KPCs [Key Performance criteria] make contract renewal highly likely” (page 54).

604.

Thirdly, I was not persuaded by Mr. Smethurst’s discounting of the probabilities which had been assigned to Updata UK’s pipeline. It seemed to me that not only Updata UK, but also Tenon, LMS and AMR, considered these probabilities to be reasonable. It is of course true that they were only assessments as to what might happen in the future, and that an assessment of a 10% probability of success by definition meant that there was a 90% chance of failure. However, I thought that a willing purchaser would expect some of the contracts with a 50% or less probability to come to fruition, not least because that is what must have happened historically (since the probabilities were assigned depending upon the stage reached).

605.

Fourthly, I thought that Mr. Smethurst’s most powerful point was, as Mr. Hall recognised in his evidence, that a figure of £ 7 million is a very considerable step upwards from the amounts which the company had previously made. A purchaser might naturally take a cautious view as to whether this would be maintainable. I agree, and this is one reason why I would not accept Mr. Hall’s figure of £ 7 million, and would reduce it to a figure of £ 5.8 million, which is towards the lower end of the range of £ 5.7 – £ 6.1 million to which I have referred. It is true that this is itself a considerable step up on the previous performance of the company, including the performance in FY 2008/9. Nevertheless, it represents a reduction on the figure in the Tenon Memorandum (just over £ 6 million) and a substantial reduction on the FY 2010 figure (correcting for administrative expenses) in the July weighted budget (£ 6.6 million). On the facts of the present case, however, such a step-up is justified. As the AMR report said, the company “took off” in 2008. And to be fair to Mr. Smethurst, his figure of maintainable earnings of £ 4,500,000 does acknowledge a very considerable step up.

606.

For these reasons, I consider that a figure of £ 5.8 million is appropriate for maintainable earnings.

Multiplier

607.

Mr. Hall adopted a multiplier of between 5.0 and 7.0 in his estimate of value, with a midpoint of 6. Mr. Smethurst adopted a multiplier of 4.85 to 5.1, with a midpoint of 4.98. Each expert considered in detail a number of transactions in the market at the relevant time. Argument developed as to the extent to which these transactions were comparable. Mr. Hall accepted that determination of the appropriate multiplier is not an exact science.

608.

Here, I consider that it is again valuable to consider the contemporaneous evidence as to multiples, prior to the onset of litigation and the careful analysis carried out by the experts. Mr. Homann described himself as a reconstruction specialist, and he clearly had experience of mergers and acquisitions. In his note to Mr. Jorgensen in January 2009, he used a multiple of 5 times EBITDA. The same multiple of 5 was used by Mr. Nielsen in the various proposals which he made. It is true that LMS used a higher figure of 6.1 in their letter of 16 April 2009. But this was applied to historic results,

and was in any event a rationalisation of their offer which was based on repaying the bank, rather than an attempt to calculate the appropriate EBITDA multiple. Mr. Hildebrandt’s evidence was that Mr. Nielsen’s multiple of 5 was reasonable.

609.

In these circumstances, I consider that a multiple of 5 is appropriate.

Premium for control

610.

In Mr. Hall’s first report, he expressed the view that a prospective purchaser would pay a premium of between 20% and 50% for control of a company, and that this should in effect be an additional amount over and above the figure derived by multiplying EBITDA by an appropriate multiple. Mr. Hall chose the midpoint (35%) as being the appropriate premium for control. It was common ground that there should be some addition to reflect the premium for control; because the “multipliers” derived from comparable companies in the market were generally for small parcels of shares, and therefore did not reflect the premium that would be paid for control.

611.

In his first report, Mr. Smethurst identified a number of takeovers in the IT consultancy and data processing sectors in 2009. Mr. Smethurst identified the share price on the day before a takeover offer was made, and the share price which was contained in the takeover offer. The average premium was 22.6%, and the median was 19.8%. He therefore applied a 22% uplift for control.

612.

Mr. Hall’s response, in his supplemental report, was that Mr. Smethurst’s methodology of comparing the price offered with the price on the previous day was inappropriate, because it assumed that there was no market knowledge whatsoever of the transactions until they actually took place. Mr. Hall therefore looked at data relating to the companies identified by Mr. Smethurst, including in some cases the average share trading price 3 months preceding the date of the initial offer. He considered it reasonable to assume that in at least some of Mr. Smethurst’s examples, the target’s share price had already increased to reflect a proportion of the control premium. Mr. Hall’s approach produced an average control premium of 34.07% and a median of 36.82%. It also resulted in a much narrower range of premiums for control, in contrast to the figures used by Mr. Smethurst which varied from 3% negative to 87% positive.

613.

In his supplemental report, Mr. Smethurst recognised that his previous methodology did not take account of information leakage that might have taken place prior to the day before the offer. He therefore looked at the share price one month prior to the offer. He excluded one takeover (Borland Software Corporation) which he described as an “outlier”: in the case of that company, the one-month comparison showed a premium of 188%. Having excluded this outlier, Mr. Smethurst’s figure was an average of 26.04% and a median of 23.11%. The midpoint of those two figures was 24.58% which Mr. Smethurst rounded to 25%. If the Borland transaction were to be included, then (on the basis of Mr. Smethurst’s figures) the average would be 38.54% (i.e. close to Mr. Hall’s figure of 35%) and the median would be 25.13%.

614.

The respective experts then carried out further analysis and expressed further views in their joint report. Mr. Hall considered in more detail a number of companies in Mr. Smethurst’s list, and made certain corrections to Mr. Smethurst’s calculations. For example, one of the companies (FDM Group Holdings PLC) had announced in June

2009 that it had received an approach. This was some time before one month prior to the offer, and it showed that Mr. Smethurst’s bid premium was understated. In the case of another company (Valtech SA), there was a press article which referred to a premium of 43.1% compared to the average trading price of the shares during the three months preceding the filing of the offer. In the case of Sodifrance, there had been an increase in the company’s share price in December 2008, following the signing of a memorandum of understanding. Mr. Smethurst’s calculation of the bid premium for that company was, in Mr. Hall’s view, understated: since he should have had regard to the share price between 17 November 2008 and 16 December 2008. In the case of Borland (Mr. Smethurst’s outlier at 188.46%), Mr. Hall relied upon a press release which referred to a premium of approximately 67% over the average thirty day closing price. Accordingly, this “outlier” should not have been excluded.

615.

Having made these and other adjustments, Mr. Hall’s figure for the average of the transactions was 38.75%, with a median of 36.12%. If Borland were excluded, the average was 35.93% and the median was 35.63%.

616.

Mr. Smethurst’s response in the joint report was to carry out further work to try to identify evidence of communication or rumour of a deal for each individual transaction and to consider premium by reference to the share price at that time. He pointed out that Mr. Hall has used a variety of approaches, sometimes looking at a period of 3 months prior to the transaction, and sometimes at other data. Mr.

Smethurst’s reworked calculation produced an average of 35.75%, and a median of 27.4%, if all the companies were included; i.e. including Borland and Sodifrance where the bid premia were much higher than the rest (87.5% and 89.75% respectively). In Mr. Smethurst’s view, however, these companies were outliers. Excluding those companies, the average was 26.15% and the median was 25.71%. The midpoint of the average and median premia was 25.93%; i.e. just above the 25% which Mr. Smethurst had selected. Mr. Smethurst did not, however, exclude a company (RGI SpA) which appeared to be an “outlier” in terms of the low bid premium (2.39%).

617.

In my view, reviewing this body of data as a whole, I consider that Mr. Hall’s initial assessment of 35% was justified. This was done by Mr. Hall on the basis, without detailed analysis, that bid premia usually fall within the range of 20 – 50%. However, it seemed to me that that broad estimate was ultimately proved to be valid. When considering Mr. Smethurst’s final table: of the 13 transactions referred to, 7 fell within this range and one (Carl Lamm) was only just outside it. Furthermore, if all 13 transactions are included, the average was (on Mr. Smethurst’s figures) 35.75%. I was not persuaded that it was appropriate, in what seems to me to be a fairly broad-brush exercise, to omit two of the transactions completely on the basis that they were “outliers”. I think that it is reasonable to look at all of the data, and on any view to include at least a substantial part of the premium paid for those companies.

618.

Furthermore, if those two “outliers” were to be excluded, then so should the low “outlier” (RGI SpA). If this is done, the average moves to 28.52% and the median to 27.4% on Mr. Smethurst’s figures. Both of these numbers are higher than Mr. Smethurst’s selected figure of 25%. However, the average on Mr. Smethurst’s figures for all companies (35.75%) corresponds very closely with the average as calculated by Mr. Hall (38.75%), and I do not attach great significance to the fact that Mr. Hall has sometimes looked at different date ranges in order to derive his average figures.

Conclusion

619. The relevant calculation of the fair value of Updata Europe’s 60% shareholding is therefore as follows:

Multiplier

5.00

£ 000’s

EBITDA [A]

5,800

Implied Total Enterprise Value ([A] x Multiplier)

29,000

Less: Net debt

100

Equity value (minority basis) [B]

28,900

Plus premium for control (B x 35%)

10,115

Equity (controlling basis) [C]

39,015

Less private company discount 33% (C x 33%)

(12,874)

Fair value of equity

26,141

Value of 60%

15,684.6

Calculation of Damages

620. On the basis of my conclusion in Section H, I assess the chances of Updata Europe obtaining fair value for its shareholding at 75%. Accordingly, the loss suffered by Updata Europe (and potentially claimable by Vald. Nielsen as assignee) is £ 11,763,450 (£ 15,694,600 x 75%) less the amounts actually received (£ 5,244,798). I therefore assess damages, subject to the question of assignment, at £ 6,518,652.

J: Assignment J1: The shape of the arguments

621.

In January 2011, three deeds of assignment were signed by various signatories. These were as follows.

i)

A “long-form” deed of assignment entered into by Updata Europe as assignor, Vald. Nielsen as assignee, and “other Persons” listed in the Schedule. Those other persons were all (bar one, Mr. Bremerskov) the former shareholders in Updata Europe at the time of the SPA: Vald. Nielsen itself, Mr. Johnsen, Jorgen Johnsen, Kirsten Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt. The subject matter of the assignment was “all the Assignor’s right, title and interest under and in respect of the Share Purchase Agreement and the Shares”. The assignment to Vald. Nielsen was “for and on behalf of” the persons listed in the Schedule. The governing law of this long-form assignment was Danish law.

ii)

A “medium-form” deed of assignment. The parties and signatories were the same. This assignment was governed by English law.

iii)

A “short-form” assignment, again with the same signatories and also governed by English law.

622.

Each of these agreements was dated in handwriting, on the front page, “19 November 2010”. On the first page of each agreement, the opening words are: “THIS DEED is dated 19.11 2010 …” Again, the date was handwritten. Each page was also initialled, and on the final page of each document there was a date underneath Mr. Johnsen’s initials: “19.11.10”.

623.

There was no dispute that the various signatories had not signed the documentation on 19 November 2010. The signatures were applied at various dates in the first half of January 2011. The three deeds of assignment had been sent, undated and unsigned, by Mr. Birkeland to Mr. Johnsen on 22 December 2010, and were then sent on to Mr. Homann later that day. They were then sent again by Mr. Johnsen to Mr. Homann on 5 January 2011 under cover of an e-mail described below. They were then signed by three signatories on behalf of Updata Europe: Mr. Bigaard, Mr. Allan Bartroff, and Mr. Kaj Kristiansen. The Claimants suggested that these individuals may have signed in late December or at some date prior to 3 January. But I think it unlikely that they were signed prior to Mr. Johnsen resending the documents on 5 January.

624.

Mr. Johnsen then picked up the signed documents from Mr. Homann in Copenhagen on 6 or 7 January. The deeds at that time already had the handwritten date of 19

November: the manuscript date on the cover page was in Mr. Homann’s handwriting. Having received them from Mr. Homann, Mr. Johnsen then collected the remaining signatures. The documents were signed by Mr. Jorgen Johnsen on behalf of Vald. Nielsen, and by the other signatories. This signature process was completed by 15 January 2011, and the original documents were then delivered to Mr. Birkeland on Monday 17 January.

625.

The Defendants’ original pleaded case as to the validity of the assignments started with a relatively narrow argument based on champerty and failure to obtain consent to the assignment in accordance with the terms of the SPA. Following disclosure, the case then expanded very considerably in the re-amended defence, served in January 2017, so as to allege, in substance, deceit against Vald. Nielsen and all the other “Signatories” on the Vald. Nielsen side of the fence (the three members of the Johnsen family, and Mr. Hildebrandt), as well as Mr. Birkeland. In 2018, there was a further amendment to allege deceit on the part of the Updata Europe signatories. There was, however, no pleaded allegation of deceit against Mr. Homann, who died before the further expansion of the pleading in 2018. The pleaded defence on this issue occupied many pages. The deceit related to the backdating of the assignment documents.

626.

As the trial and cross-examination progressed, however, it appeared to the Claimants that the Defendants’ case was narrowing. In particular, there was no crossexamination of Mr. Jorgen Johnsen, Mr. Hildebrandt, or Mr. Birkeland on the basis that they had acted deceitfully in relation to the assignment documentation. On 23 April 2019, prior to submission of written closings, the Defendants’ solicitors wrote in connection with the “obvious narrowing of the Defendants case” and identified the factual points that they would be pursuing in their closing argument concerning alleged wrongful behaviour in connection with the assignment.

“3. In essence, the Defendants’ case is that Mr Bigaard, Mr Homann and Mr Peter Johnsen had actual knowledge that the contracts of assignment were being (and thus intended that they be) backdated to 19 November 2010 for a deceitful purpose – namely, to mislead the Supervisor and/or creditors. Further, and as Mr Rosing confirmed (day18/160/16 – day18/161/3), assuming Mr Homann and Mr Peter Johnsen were acting as agents with authority to negotiate on behalf of Updata Europe and Vald Nielsen (and the other shareholders of Updata Europe named in the Schedule to the contracts of assignment) respectively as their principals (as the Claimants themselves allege), then their principals (namely, the eventual parties to the contracts of assignment) are treated as having the same knowledge and state of mind as Mr Homann and Mr Peter Johnsen.

4.

Further or alternatively, the Defendants will contend that, whether or not Mr Bigaard and/or Mr Peter Johnsen knew of the precise purpose of the backdating (namely, to deceive the Supervisor/creditors) they at least knew (at the time of the back-dating of the contracts) that the contracts were backdated, and that there had been no binding oral agreement on 19 November 2010. On the assumption that at least Mr Homann knew of the deceitful purpose, that is sufficient to invalidate the contracts of assignment, on the alternative basis described by Ms Gernaa (day20/50/12 – day20/51/17)

5.

In light of these facts and the provisions of section 5.1.2 of the Danish Act of King Christian V, the Defendants will contend that each of the assignment agreements falls foul of Danish morality/public policy and is therefore invalid or not binding as a matter of Danish law. Likewise, if and in so far as necessary, the Defendant will contend that such agreements are unenforceable as a matter of English law or public policy.

6.

Beyond the essential matters set out above, the Defendants will not be seeking primary findings regarding wrongdoing concerning assignment from the Court in closing arguments. That does not, of course, preclude the Defendants from making points relevant to credibility or honesty, or alleging that any of the Claimants’ witnesses had an intention to mislead or did not give truthful evidence on matters relevant to those primary findings. “

627.

In the course of oral closings, Mr. Choo Choy also confirmed that no case was being pursued in relation to champerty or that there had been a lack of consent to the assignment.

628.

In their written closings, the Claimants drew attention to the various changes in the

Defendants’ case, suggesting that they were scrabbling around in order to know what their case was. I did not think that there was any substance to this line of argument. The Defendants were not party to the discussions which led to the assignment, and had no knowledge of the facts save as they emerged from the documents, witness statements and evidence given at trial. It is not surprising that, as the Defendants’ legal team learned more about what had happened, their case narrowed or altered in certain respects.

629.

Nor was I impressed with any of the pleading points that were taken in the Claimants’ closing argument. It seemed to me that the case was sufficiently pleaded, indeed was pleaded in some considerable detail. It is true that the Defendants’ case originally involved allegations of deceit against more individuals on the Vald. Nielsen side than Mr. Johnsen. However, a case was always made against Mr. Johnsen, and I did not consider that the Claimants can reasonably complain that there was no pleaded case that, as a matter of Danish law, Mr. Johnsen’s knowledge was to be attributed to Vald. Nielsen. The pleading contains clear allegations against Mr. Johnsen. Since it was Mr. Johnsen who had carried out the negotiations with Mr. Homann, and was the only person on the Vald. Nielsen side who did so, it would ordinarily follow (certainly if English law were being applied) that Mr. Johnsen’s knowledge would be attributed to Vald. Nielsen. If it were to be suggested that Danish law produced some different result, then it would be for the Claimants to prove that Danish law as to attribution was different to English law. In the event, Mr. Rosing (the Claimants’ Danish law expert) confirmed what might be thought to be the ordinary position in his evidence; namely that where the terms of a contract are negotiated by agents on behalf of their principals, the knowledge of the agent acquired in the course of the negotiation is treated as the knowledge of the principal. He agreed at the conclusion of his evidence that if such agents were to share an intention to deceive a third party through backdating, an agreement negotiated by such an agent would be unenforceable: because the knowledge of the agent would be assumed to be the knowledge of the principal.

630.

Accordingly, I consider that the Defendants’ case should be addressed on the merits and the facts. The critical factual issue which arose on this defence was whether or not the backdating was for a deceitful purpose, namely to mislead the Supervisor of Updata Europe and/or its creditors, and if so who was party to any deceitful purpose. If there was such a deceitful purpose, then issues arose as to what were its consequences, both under Danish law and under the approach now taken to illegality under English law. The Claimants’ case was that there was no deceitful purpose to the backdating, and that in any event no-one on the Claimants’ side (and specifically Mr. Johnsen) was aware of this deceitful purpose. They also contended that even if an intention to deceive the Supervisor or creditors could be demonstrated, the assignment remained valid under English law.

J2: The facts

631.

In order to address this defence, it is necessary to set out the background facts in more detail. Evidence as to the circumstances in which the three deeds of assignment came to be made was given at trial by Mr. Johnsen, Mr. Bigaard and Mr. Birkeland. Mr. Homann had addressed the assignment in his witness statement signed in October 2016, prior to the expansion of the case to allege deceit against the various signatories on the Vald. Nielsen side. My description of the facts below includes my findings based on the evidence of the various witnesses.

632.

In the spring of 2010, Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt were already contemplating bringing proceedings against the Defendants (and possibly others) arising out of the sale transaction and their view that they had been misled. Mr. Birkeland at that time

took advice from English counsel, whom I understand to have been Mr. Richard Boulton (now QC) of One Essex Court. One potential difficulty, however, was that it was Updata Europe that had sold its shares under the SPA, and that company had now been acquired by companies owned by Mr. Bigaard. This led to the idea that there could be an assignment by Updata Europe of its rights to the former owners of Updata Europe who had, on the proposed case, lost out as a result of the conduct which had led to the sale at an alleged undervalue.

633.

In the latter part of 2010, Mr. Johnsen began discussions with Mr. Homann as to a possible assignment. These discussions began in October or November, but prior to the meeting on 19 November described below. Mr. Johnsen explained to Mr. Homann that he considered that Updata UK had been sold at an undervalue, and that he wanted to bring a claim against the UK management to reclaim the loss that he and the other shareholders in Updata Europe had suffered. Mr. Homann was by now working closely with Mr. Bigaard in relation to the business of Updata Europe. As Mr. Homann explained in his written statement, after the sale of Updata Europe to Mr. Bigaard, Mr. Homann continued to work with Updata Europe and he had authority to act on its behalf on various matters.

634.

The possibility of an assignment clearly had its attractions to Mr. Homann. Updata Europe had owed monies to KPMG, and as part of his settlement package upon leaving KPMG, Mr. Homann had taken an assignment of the debt. A successful claim against the UK management could produce funds which would enable this debt to be paid, as well as possibly other unpaid debts of Updata Europe. Equally, there was in practical terms no real downside to Updata Europe, or Mr. Bigaard, from assigning the potential claims. Mr. Bigaard had no interest in pursuing such claims himself: as he said in evidence, the Updata Europe group had many problems which occupied him at that time. The pursuit of a claim against the former management would be potentially expensive, and its prospects would have appeared very uncertain, and in practice it could not be pursued without the assistance of the former shareholders in Updata Europe. Mr. Bigaard could also see some positive advantages to an assignment. If the Johnsens recovered monies, that might encourage them to invest again in Updata Europe. In addition, a recovery might enable some of the debts of Updata Europe to be paid. Mr. Bigaard was happy to leave Mr. Homann to carry out the discussions. He described Mr. Homann as very skilled accountant and also an experienced businessman, and “so I trusted him to make the best agreement for him and the group when he was on his way to negotiate with Mr Johnsen”. Mr. Bigaard therefore left things to Mr. Homann and did not follow the detail of the discussions.

635.

Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen prepared to meet for further discussion on 19 November. Prior to that meeting, Mr. Johnsen had been in communication with Mr. Birkeland, and there had been discussion of a figure of DKK 2 million that would be paid to Mr. Homann if there were to be an assignment and the proceedings against management succeeded.

636.

Mr. Homann described the discussions and the meeting in paragraphs 38-41 of his witness statement. He said that he had authority to negotiate on behalf of Mr. Bigaard. He described how at the meeting, he and Mr. Johnsen “reached an agreement on the broad terms of what was being assigned by Updata Europe and how that assignment was to be paid for”. The agreement he described was that Updata Europe would assign any interests it had under the SPA to the Updata Europe shareholders at the

time (i.e. the Johnsen family and Mr. Hildebrandt). In return for the assignment, any compensation or damages that were received would be used to repay certain debts of Updata Europe which had not been paid from the proceeds of the original sale of Updata UK. Such compensation would be used to repay DKK 1 million in respect of the debt to KPMG which had been assigned to Mr. Homann, and a further DKK

250,000 in respect of other debts. Mr. Johnsen’s evidence was, also, that he reached an agreement with Mr. Homann at that meeting. Both Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Hildebrandt, neither of whom attended the meeting, gave evidence that they were told that an agreement had been reached.

637.

The Defendants did not dispute that there had been a meeting on 19 November 2010, but they contended that agreement reached was only no more than an agreement in principle rather than a legally binding oral agreement. They contended that this must have been understood by the participants, who would have known and understood that an agreement would have to be documented and signed before it was binding. They also contended that the documents indicated that the parties to the assignments were at that stage considering, or were agreed upon, DKK 2 million as being the sum that would be paid to Mr. Homann, and that it was only at a later stage that this was reduced to DKK 1 million. I will return to these controversial issues below.

638.

What is clear is that Mr. Johnsen did speak to Mr. Birkeland that same day, and Mr. Birkeland immediately started working on a draft “Assignment and Name Lending Agreement”. The metadata for the first draft of the document shows that the document was created at 19.34 on Friday 19 November 2010. Mr. Birkeland worked on it over the weekend, and it was last modified on the evening of Sunday 21 November at 18.51. He then sent it to Mr. Johnsen at 18.53 on the Sunday evening under cover of an e-mail saying:

“Let’s discuss. I suggest that we get the barrister to read through the assignment/ name lending [document]”.

639.

The draft agreement was between Updata Europe and Vald. Nielsen, and had an English governing law clause. Clause 4 contained a provision allocating compensation realised from the assigned rights of action. The first priority was DKK 2 million “owed by the Assignor to Helge Homann in relation to the fees originally owed by the Assignor to KPMG as per 11 July 2009 (and subsequently assigned to

Helge Homann”. The second priority was towards the discharge of DKK 250,000 “related to other obligations of the Assignor as per 11 July 2009 (and which remains outstanding)”. The balance was to be “paid in full to the Assignee”.

640.

On 22 November 2010, and before Mr. Birkeland had sent the draft agreement to counsel, Mr. Johnsen e-mailed him with a request from Mr. Bennett. Mr. Bennett was concerned about a tax liability arising out of the way in which the original SPA documentation was drafted. Some £ 500,000 in tax could be saved if the parties entered into a deed of rectification. Mr. Bennett asked Mr. Johnsen to whom he should send “the documentation for agreement on behalf of NewWatch”. Mr. Birkeland responded:

“If new agreements are going to be signed, the EU should probably also sign. The question is whether they have contacted the EU”.

The reference to “EU” was to Updata Europe. The e-mail is relied upon by the Defendants as indicating that Mr. Birkeland did not at that stage consider that there had been a binding assignment of rights from Updata Europe to Vald. Nielsen. Otherwise, it was argued, Mr. Birkeland would have referred to the need for Vald. Nielsen to sign as assignee, rather than Updata Europe.

641.

On 23 November 2010, Mr. Birkeland sent the draft Assignment and Name Lending Agreement to the clerk at One Essex Court, copied to Mr. Boulton. Mr. Birkeland’s email stated:

“As mentioned we have now got an opportunity to have assigned the Rights of Action and/or use the name of the vendor company in a potential action against the management team.

I would be grateful if Richard Boulton could review the agreement before we produce it to the new owners of Updata Europe A/S. Please let me know when you expect that Richard Boulton would be able to revert with his comments.

My clients have not been on the best terms with the new owners of Updata Europe A/S in the past and there is a risk that they will change their mind if the circumstances in Denmark that have made this arrangement possible change. I therefore hope that we can proceed with this agreement as soon as possible”.

642.

Each side relied upon this e-mail in support of their contention as to whether a binding agreement had or had not been reached. The Claimants referred in particular to the reference to the risk of Updata Europe changing their mind, as indicating that an agreement had been reached and that Mr. Birkeland was concerned to avoid the risk that Updata Europe would change its mind and try to walk away. The Defendants referred to the reference to “opportunity to have assigned” as indicating that what existed was an opportunity, but that nothing firm had been agreed.

643.

Mr. Boulton (who was at that time in Singapore) gave some initial advice by e-mail on 25 November, raising a number of queries and issues, including questions of champerty. It is not necessary to describe these in detail. On 30 November, Mr. Birkeland indicated that it would be best to discuss the matter further when Mr. Boulton returned to London. That discussion took place on the evening of 15 December, following which Mr. Birkeland sent through a revised draft. It was at this stage that the documentation changed from being a single agreement to three agreements. Mr. Birkeland explained to Mr. Boulton the idea behind the three agreements in the following terms:

UK Rights of Action: Assignment subject to English law (where the “consideration” is not specified) which is to be produced to the court;

DK Rights of Action: Assignment subject to DK law where the Consideration is specified – not to be disclosed to the court.

UK Assigned of Rights: This does not include “Rights of Action” and may be used e.g. to execute other documents related to Updata on more “amicable terms” without disclosing that we also consider to pursue the “Rights of Action”.

644.

Apart from now comprising three agreements, the drafts included other changes to the previous version, including making the “other Persons listed in the Schedule” party to the agreement. This was considered to be a way of addressing possible arguments on champerty.

645.

Mr. Boulton replied on 16 December 2010, with various comments. He stated that he could not advise at this stage on what documents might need to be provided to the English court. “It is possible that the Danish version would need to be produced”. He appears, however, to have had no difficulty in principle with the idea that there should be 3 agreements.

646.

By this time (16 December), nearly a month had passed since the 19 November meeting between Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Homann. There had been no further discussions about the assignment between them. None of the drafts had been sent to Mr. Homann for comment. The work on the documentation that was being done was carried out by Mr. Birkeland with the assistance of Mr. Boulton. Mr. Johnsen himself had not, by this stage, commented to Mr. Birkeland on any of the drafts. It seems likely that this was because there was little point doing so whilst the terms of the documentation were still under discussion between Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Boulton. But this changed shortly afterwards.

647.

A meeting was arranged between Mr. Johnsen, Mr. Homann and Mr. Birkeland for the evening of 21 December. Prior to that meeting, probably on the previous day, Mr. Birkeland went through a draft of the agreements with Mr. Johnsen. At this point, the consideration clause still referred to Mr. Homann receiving DKK 2 million. According to Mr. Birkeland, it was at this time that Mr. Johnsen pointed out that Mr. Homann had actually agreed a lower figure, namely DKK 1 million. Mr. Birkeland then amended the draft on 21 December, which he completed at around 1 pm or 2 pm. This was done prior to the meeting with Mr. Homann that evening. Although they were by that time in final form, the drafts were not given to Mr. Homann at that meeting. They were, however (as described above) sent by Mr. Birkeland to Mr. Johnsen, and then to Mr. Homann, on the following day (22 December). These were in the form which Mr. Birkeland had completed prior to the meeting.

648.

Mr. Homann was clearly content with the drafts. He did not raise any points or seek to negotiate. They were in due course signed by Mr. Bigaard and others in early January, as described above.

649.

Prior to signature, however, there had been a significant development. On 3 January 2011, Updata Europe was made the subject of a supervisory order by the Danish bankruptcy court. The court hearing was attended by both Mr. Bigaard and Mr.

Homann. A Supervisor, Mr. Finn Jepsen, was appointed over its affairs. This is akin to administration. As a matter of Danish law, as described below, any material contract concluded after that time required the consent of the Supervisor. From that date, it is common ground that Updata Europe was not entitled to enter into material contracts without the Supervisor’s consent. Mr. Jepsen was not asked to and did not consent to the assignment. There was no dispute that the assignment was a material contract.

650.

Two days after this appointment, on 5 January 2011, Mr. Johnsen sent an e-mail to Mr. Homann. He enclosed further copies of the agreements which had been sent on 22 December. The e-mail stated:

“Hi Helge.

Here are the electronic copies of the agreements entered into on the 2nd of October 2010”

651.

Mr. Johnsen described this e-mail as very peculiar and he could not explain the reference to 2 October. He also denied knowing about the appointment of Mr. Jepsen at the time. I do not accept this evidence. I have no doubt that Mr. Homann did tell Mr. Johnsen about the appointment of Mr. Jepsen, and that this created a potential problem in relation to the assignment documentation which at that stage had not been signed. There must in my view have then been some discussion about the possibility of backdating the documentation, and Mr. Johnsen in his e-mail was intending to lay the groundwork for backdating; by suggesting that the agreements had been concluded in early October. I also infer that Mr. Homann did not consider this date (2 October 2010) acceptable or justifiable. It may well be that there had been discussions about the possible assignment on or around 2 October, but there was no basis for saying that any agreement had been concluded at that time. So instead it was Mr. Homann who identified the relevant date as 19 November, and this was the date which he inserted at the start of the documents which Mr. Bigaard and others signed.

652.

I also was unpersuaded by Mr. Johnsen’s evidence that he added the date “19.11.10”, to his initials on the final page of the assignments, in order to make it clear that the final signature pages were linked to the assignment documents themselves. This could have been done by simply stapling the signature pages to the rest of the document, and in any event it is difficult to see that there was any room for doubt as to whether the final signature page formed part of the document. I therefore agree with the Defendants that this dating was done as a method of Mr. Johnsen reinforcing the date of 19 November 2010 which appeared at the start of the assignment documentation. Mr. Johnsen’s decision to do this was, in my view, indicative of the fact that he had previously been told by Mr. Homann about the appointment of the Supervisor, and that backdating was necessary in order to avoid potential arguments.

653.

I should also describe two other developments which are relevant to the parties’ arguments in relation to the assignment.

654.

First, it will be recalled that on 22 November, Mr. Bennett had raised the need for a deed of rectification. Mr. Birkeland in due course received documentation, and wrote to Mr. Hildebrandt and Mr. Johnsen about it on 4 December 2010. In his e-mail, he said:

“Please particularly note that Updata EU needs to sign. This may give us the opportunity to be “foresightedly/ preventively critical” and still cooperative”.

The first sentence is relied upon by the Defendants in support of its argument that Mr. Birkeland appreciated that there was not yet any concluded assignment: hence his reference to the need for Updata EU (not Vald. Nielsen as assignee) to sign. The second, rather cryptic sentence, referred to the fact that Mr. Birkeland saw the utility of the request for a deed of rectification; since this would provide an opportunity to give notice of the assignment as and when it was signed.

655.

This particular aspect of the story continued as follows. On 22 December, Mr. Birkeland wrote to Mr. Inkester of Nabarro LLP, who was dealing with the proposed deed of rectification on behalf of the new UK company and its shareholders, including the Defendants. Mr. Birkeland said that he had met with Mr. Homann “in relation to some other matters. There may be an opening in relation to UE as well, but it is still too early to tell. I will revert when I have something more concrete in this respect”. Mr. Birkeland did not therefore tell Mr. Inkester that there had been an assignment. On 28 January 2011, after the documentation had been signed, Mr. Birkeland wrote to Mr. Inkester commenting on the Deed of Rectification. His e-mail concluded:

“We should also now have found a solution for the purpose of Updata Europe A/s. As mentioned to you the board of directors in Updata Europe A/S has agreed to and assigned all rights related to the Share Purchase Agreement to Vald. Nielsen Holding A/S (a company owned by Jorgen Johnsen and Kirsten Johnsen) as part of a larger settlement of outstanding matters in Denmark. The assignment also include a power of attorney to sign documents on behalf of Updata Europe A/S if that is more appropriate”.

656.

Subsequently, on 14 February 2011, Vald Nielsen signed the Deed of Rectification as assignee of Updata Europe. This Deed of Rectification was beneficial to the Defendants, and the new UK company in which they owned shares, because there was a substantial tax saving. The Defendants did not at that stage seek to investigate or take any point on the validity of the assignment documentation, or even to ask to see it. However, the fact that the Defendants willingly signed the Deed of Rectification, thereby acknowledging Vald. Nielsen as assignee, was no doubt one reason why (belatedly) the Defendants abandoned their argument based upon lack of consent to the assignment.

657.

Secondly, the appointment of Mr. Jepsen as Supervisor lasted a very short time. His appointment was terminated in April 2011, so that Updata Europe then returned to being in control of its own affairs. There has been no suggestion that any creditors of Updata Europe have in fact been prejudiced by the assignment, or by the fact that during his brief period of office Mr. Jepsen did not consent to it.

J3: Danish law

658.

Evidence as to Danish law was given by a number of experts. The Claimants’ expert was originally Mr. Jens Rostock-Jensen, a partner in Kromann Reumert. His original

report addressed contractual issues concerning the Danish law relating to assignments, and his subsequent report addressed bankruptcy/insolvency issues concerning the effect of the appointment of the Supervisor. The Defendants’ expert on the contractual issues was Ms. Henrietta Gernaa, a partner in Gorrissen Federspiel. These two experts then produced a very helpful joint memorandum on the contractual issues. There was in fact very little disagreement between them. The Defendants also served a short expert report from Mr. Peter Nørtved, a senior legal counsel also with Gorrissen Federspiel. This addressed Danish bankruptcy/insolvency law, and gave rise to Mr. Rostock-Jensen’s report on that topic.

659.

By the time of the trial, however, Mr. Rostock-Jensen could not, owing to illness, be available to give evidence. His place was taken by two of his partners at Kromann Reumert: Mr. Jakob Rosing, who addressed the contractual issues and Ms. Kamilla Krebs who addressed the bankruptcy/insolvency issues. Those witnesses had considered the previous reports, including the joint report, of Mr. Rostock-Jensen and, subject to some relatively minor qualifications, adopted what he had said. There was rightly no objection to these witnesses substituting for Mr. Rostock-Jensen in this way.

660.

At trial, Mr. Rosing and Ms. Gernaa were both cross-examined, albeit not at great length, but in a manner which assisted in explaining the points made in the written reports. Ms. Krebs and Mr. Nørtved were also cross-examined, but very briefly indeed. I considered that all the experts sought to assist the court on the Danish law issues, and that there was in truth very little material disagreement between them. Furthermore, the narrowing of the Defendants’ case as to the invalidity of the assignment – and in particular the fact that reliance was no longer placed upon the fact that consent to the assignment had not been sought in advance – meant that some of the issues addressed by the experts are no longer of importance. The expert evidence on the contractual issues also strayed, perhaps inevitably, into questions as to how a Danish court would approach the factual evidence in a case. Neither side, however, placed significant reliance on this aspect of the Danish law expert evidence, and rightly so. The role of the experts was to identify the relevant principles of Danish law. The determination of how that law applies to the facts of the present case is a matter for the English court. The assessment of the strength or otherwise of the evidence in that regard is also a matter for the English court, applying its own approach to the evidence rather than any particular approach that might be taken by a Danish judge.

Danish law as to bankruptcy/insolvency

661.

In order to understand the nature and relevance of the case advanced on the contractual issues, it is appropriate to start by describing the material aspects of the evidence concerning the insolvency issues.

662.

The factual background can be summarised shortly. In the latter half of 2010, a bankruptcy petition against Updata Europe was issued by a company called Krone Kapital A/S. At around the same time, Krone Kapital, Deloitte and acompany called Actelis Networks (Israel) started bankruptcy proceedings against Updata Denmark. A hearing of the petition against Updata Europe took place on 3 January 2011. At that hearing, the Bankruptcy Division of the Danish Maritime and Commercial Court decided to postpone the bankruptcy petition which had been filed against Updata Europe. During the “postponement period”, Mr. Jepsen was appointed as Supervisor. In April 2011, however, the postponement period was lifted, and the company returned to normal operations.

663.

The Danish Bankruptcy Act, section 15, provides as follows:

“The debtor may not enter into transactions of material significance without consent from the appointed supervisor. No debts may be paid, unless in accordance with the order of priority of creditors, or if such payment is necessary to avert loss”.

664.

Ms. Krebs, adopting the report of Mr. Jens-Rostock, explained the consequences of a transaction entered into with or without the consent of the supervisor. This evidence was not controversial and was not therefore cross-examined upon:

i)

The requirement for supervisor consent is intended to guard the interests of the creditors.

ii)

If a transaction is entered into with the consent of the appointed supervisor, the counterparty is entitled to preferential payment in a subsequent bankruptcy estate. The consent of the appointed supervisor also has the effect that the transaction is subject to extended protection against avoidance of the transaction in the event of a subsequent bankruptcy.

iii)

The lack of supervisor consent does not, however, automatically render the transaction void or invalid as the authority to act is still with the debtor. A counterparty who has acted in good faith will be able to uphold the transaction.

iv)

One leading scholar has specifically addressed the situation where (as happened with Updata Europe) the debtor regains full authority over his assets, because no actual bankruptcy was declared. In those circumstances, the debtor will be bound by the transaction which had been entered into without consent.

665.

Ms. Krebs therefore expressed the view that the rules on consent from the supervisor were intended to guard the interests of creditors, in the event that the company was insolvent and was subsequently declared bankrupt. But in the event that the postponement period ceased (as happened in April 2011), and the debtor resumed ordinary business and regained full authority over his assets, the interests of creditors were sufficiently protected by the ordinary rules on management liability. According, in a situation where the debtor has resumed business and there is no bankruptcy, there is no basis for claiming that a prior transaction entered into without consent is (simply because of the lack of consent) invalid. The debtor is therefore bound by the transaction. Accordingly, the lack of consent is inconsequential in the event that the debtor resumed his ordinary course of business, as was the case with Updata Europe. As Ms. Krebs summarised the position in paragraph 13 of her report:

“it is my opinion that a transaction entered into without the consent of a supervisor, would not at a later stage be impeached due to the lack of consent from the supervisor, in the event that the debtor has subsequently resumed his ordinary course of business and is not declared bankrupt”.

666.

Since this evidence was uncontroversial, it followed that the Defendants could not rely simply on the lack of supervisor consent as invalidating the assignments. If the assignments were to be invalidated under Danish law, some different principle would need to be identified so as to achieve that result.

Contractual principles

667.

The relevant legal principle relied upon by the Defendants was summarised in the joint report as follows:

“The experts agree that if an agreement has been backdated with an intent to defraud/deceitful intent, e.g. misleading a third party, the agreement will be invalid”.

668.

The situation where there is an intention to defraud or deceive is to be contrasted with a case where there is what might be described as legitimate backdating. Thus, as Ms. Gernaa explained in her report, contracting parties may decide to date a document or an agreement on a day which falls before the document’s signature. In her opinion, Danish law would give effect to a backdated agreement:

“where the purpose of the backdating is to give formal approval to an oral agreement that was in fact entered into on the earlier date on the same terms. However, if the agreement has been backdated with an intent to defraud/deceitful intent, e.g. misleading a third party, the agreement will be invalid”.

669.

This passage of Ms. Gernaa’s report was then reflected in the joint report, where the experts agreed that “Danish law would give effect to a backdated agreement where the purpose of the backdating is to give formal approval to an oral agreement that was in fact entered into on the earlier date on the same terms”.

670.

In his evidence, Mr. Rosing explained that it was not necessary for the prior oral agreement to have contained precisely the same terms as those contained in the subsequent written document, in order for Danish law to give effect to the backdated agreement. In his view, it would “suffice if the main terms of the contract were agreed upon at the earlier date”. He illustrated this point by drawing a distinction between terms of the written agreement which fleshed out the earlier oral agreement, and terms of the written agreement which changed it. An example of the former category would be a case where the parties had agreed the main terms orally, but had not given thought to the question of governing law. If the subsequent agreement contained a provision for governing law, Danish law would uphold the backdated agreement (i.e. as taking effect on the backdated date), even though Danish law was not a matter which had featured in the parties’ discussions. An example of the latter category would be a case where the parties had agreed on a consideration of DKK 2 million, and had subsequently changed the agreement so as to provide for a consideration of DKK 1 million. In that situation, a main term would have been changed. This aspect of Mr. Rosing’s evidence was not substantially disputed by Ms. Gernaa. She agreed in her evidence with the proposition that “as long as you have the main terms of the deal

agreed, the fact that there are other things to be fleshed out … doesn’t alter the fact that the original oral agreement is binding and then is represented by the later agreement”.

671.

I considered that this evidence made complete sense. Where an oral agreement is reduced to writing, particularly if lawyers are involved, it is almost inevitable that the drafting process will mean that the final document contains terms which were not the subject of specific discussion. If it were a requirement that an agreement could only be backdated when there was exact precision between the prior oral agreement and the subsequent written agreement, it is doubtful whether any agreements could be backdated.

672.

A number of other aspects of the evidence in this regard are of potential relevance.

673.

First, if an agreement was backdated in circumstances where there had been a material change to the terms (DKK 2 million to DKK 1 million being an example), this did not in itself mean that the agreement was invalid. Instead, absent an intention to deceive, the agreement would remain a valid agreement; but it would only take effect from the actual date of the agreement, rather than the backdated date. Ms. Gernaa agreed with the proposition that, in this scenario, the agreement would be valid but could only be enforced from the date agreed, rather than the earlier date. Mr. Rosing’s evidence was to the same effect: if there was no intention to deceive, then the contract remained valid but would only take effect from the date when it was actually made.

674.

Secondly, the reason for the invalidity of an agreement where the backdating was effected in order to deceive is that the enforcement of the agreement would be contrary to Danish public policy. Under the Danish Act of King Christian V, section

5-1-2, contracts are to be observed “if not against the law or virtuousness”. A recent (2014) decision of the Danish Supreme Court (Case U 2014.2434 H) illustrates the application of that statute. In that case, C (a contractor) had agreed with A and B, the owners of a property, to carry out construction work. They had agreed that part of the price would be paid without the addition of VAT, with the intention of depriving the public purse of VAT and taxes in connection with the construction. C’s action to recover the balance of the price was unsuccessful, even though C had re-calculated the claim so as to include VAT. The Court held that:

“Under the Danish Act of King Christian V, section 5-1-2, an agreement may, in the circumstances, be invalid if the agreement is contrary to the general perception of morality, even though no other legal standards have been violated. The

Supreme Court finds that section 5-1-2 of the Danish Act of King Christian V is applicable when the agreement violates a third party’s interest or the interest of the public even though none of the contracting parties wish for the agreement to be set aside”.

675.

Ms. Gernaa said that the case illustrated the proposition that the question of whether the contract was contrary to public policy was to be judged at the time when the contract was made. Hence, C could not establish his claim even though he had subsequently decided to include VAT. Mr. Rosing, rather tentatively, suggested that a court might look at events subsequent to the making of the contract, in order to decide whether or not public policy should prevent enforcement of the contract. Thus, in the present case, Mr. Rosing suggested that the fact that the Supervisor’s appointment had been terminated after 3 months, with Updata Europe resuming full control of its activities, might be relevant. However, I thought that this rather tentative suggestion could not easily be reconciled with the decision in Case U 2014.2434 H and I preferred Ms. Gernaa’s evidence on this point. Accordingly, the question of whether a contract entered into with an intention to deceive third parties is contrary to morality within the meaning of section 5.1.2 is judged as at the date that the contract was entered into, notwithstanding that as a result of subsequent events there ceased to be any need to deceive or that there was no actual deception.

676.

Thirdly, the experts addressed the question of when an oral agreement would be binding. They were agreed that both written and oral agreements are valid and binding under Danish law, and that there are no formal requirements as to how an assignment agreement should be established or what terms it must contain. An oral agreement for an assignment is therefore binding in Danish law. However, if the parties have agreed that there is no agreement until the contract is signed, then the prior oral agreement will obviously not be binding. The experts were also agreed that it was necessary for the parties to have agreed on the main terms of the assignment. The main terms of an assignment would be (i) specification of precisely who the parties to the agreement are and (ii) specification of the assigned rights.

677.

The experts also addressed what seemed to me to be issues which were not of substantive law, but how a Danish court would approach the evidence in a case where there was a disputed oral agreement. This evidence showed that the existence and terms of an oral agreement are difficult to prove, and that a Danish court generally requires substantial evidence before recognising and enforcing an oral assignment agreement. If the parties are not able to prove that they have reached an agreement regarding the main terms, a Danish court would be reluctant to give effect to such an agreement. Proving an oral agreement in Denmark is therefore difficult, and the courts would likely to assume as a starting point that a significant agreement would not be binding until reduced to writing. Ms. Gernaa said that in a situation where both parties knew that the agreement would be committed to writing at a later stage, the courts would be “reluctant” to say that there was a binding contract prior to the point where the parties actually signed the contract.

J4: Analysis and conclusions

678.

It is in my view appropriate to consider, separately, the validity of the long-form assignment (governed by Danish law) and the medium-form assignment (governed by English law). The reason that there were these two separate documents was that Mr.

Birkeland decided that it was sensible to take a “belt and braces” approach, particularly in view of the question-marks as to possible challenges to the assignment based on champerty that had been raised by Mr. Boulton. Mr. Birkeland’s intention was that if for some reason one of the agreements was held to be invalid under its governing law, the other agreement could still be valid under its governing law. I consider that this, too, must have been the intention of the parties to the assignments; since it is the most obvious and an entirely rational explanation of why these two agreements were exercised. There was no suggestion by the Defendants that this was an impermissible approach either under English law or under Danish law. In view of this rationale, arguments which had featured in the Defendants’ opening as to the uncertainty of what had been agreed, and difficulties in reconciling the two agreements, were not pursued in closing and were in any event in my view illfounded.

679.

I focus on these two agreements because I do not consider that the third agreement, the so-called short-form agreement, has any material bearing on the issues. The explanation for that agreement was a concern on the part of Vald. Nielsen that it might not want to tell the Defendants the full detail of the terms of the assignment, in case it alerted them to the proposed litigation. Mr. Choo Choy confirmed that he did not rely on the intention to potentially conceal the full terms of the assignment as “an independent basis for non-enforceability’. But he did say that it was relevant, in terms of background, “as to the relevant individuals’ willingness to do what they have to do in order effectively pretend that the assignments were fully valid”. I did not think that even this limited point had any force. It seems that the idea that it might be problematic to show the Defendants the full terms of the assignment, and that therefore there should be a short-form document, had nothing to do with the case that there was an intention to deceive the Supervisor. It was Mr. Birkeland (against whom the pleaded allegation of deceit in relation to backdating was ultimately not pursued) who drafted the short-form assignment. Furthermore, he took advice from counsel in relation to the three assignments, and counsel did not suggest that there was anything improper in relation to the signature of three agreements, albeit that he made it clear that he was not expressing a view as to what might need to be produced to the court in due course.

The “long form” agreement governed by Danish law

680.

The issue here is an issue of fact: was there an intention to deceive the Supervisor on the part of Mr. Bigaard, Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen? There is no doubt that the reason that the documents were backdated was because of the appointment of Mr. Jepsen, and therefore a concern to avoid a suggestion that the assignments required his consent. But I did not consider that this fact in itself demonstrated that there was an intention to deceive. I agree with the Claimants that the real question was not whether, applying Danish law, there was a legally binding agreement made on 19 November 2010, but rather whether the parties to the assignments genuinely believed that there had been a binding agreement. If so, there could be no dishonesty in the backdating: if there was a genuine belief that a binding agreement had previously been concluded, the parties’ written agreement would have been giving formal approval to an oral agreement entered into an earlier date. On behalf of the Defendants, Mr. Choo Choy rightly accepted that if everybody genuinely thought the agreement had “absolutely been made on 19 November but for some technical reason, as a matter of Danish law, the agreement would not be treated as being made on 19 November, that it would be difficult then to say that they intended to deceive”. But he submitted that there was no such genuine belief; because the parties to the assignments appreciated that the deal would only be done when the documentation was drawn up and signed. The Defendants’ case in opening was that Mr. Johnsen, and the others on the Vald. Nielsen side, “knew the agreements were misleadingly backdated – misleading because there was no binding oral agreement on 19 November 2010 in the same terms as the three agreements they were signing. Their evidence that there was such an oral agreement is untruthful”. By the time of closing,

the only allegation along these lines, as far as concerns those on the Vald. Nielsen side, concerned Mr. Johnsen.

681.

It seems to me that the burden of proving that there was an intention to deceive is upon the Defendants. I do not consider that the evidence justifies a finding that any of the relevant individuals (Mr. Bigaard, Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen) had no genuine belief, in early January, that a binding agreement had been concluded on 19 November. Indeed, I think it more likely than not that when they looked back on what had happened, they believed that their written agreement was indeed giving effect to an oral agreement made earlier. In that regard, they did not subject the events to the rigorous scrutiny or legal analysis that would have been necessary if, for example, there had been litigation between the participants as to whether or not a binding agreement had been made at an earlier stage. Instead, they would have formed a broad view based on what had happened.

682.

Thus, there is no doubt that Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen did meet on 19 November, and there was indeed a discussion about an assignment. That is clear from the fact that Mr. Birkeland started his work on the documentation that very Friday evening, and had completed a draft by the Sunday. The meeting was between two people, neither of whom were lawyers, who knew each other well. It was not the first discussion between them. I have no reason to doubt the evidence of Mr. Homann, supported by Mr. Bigaard, that Mr. Homann had been given authority to deal with the matter. The discussion was not a difficult one, because (for reasons already given) it was in the interests of Mr. Johnsen as well as Mr. Homann and Updata Europe for there to be an assignment. It is in my view inherently probable that matters were then settled at that meeting, and that both Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Homann left the meeting thinking that they had a deal. This is consistent with the evidence of Mr. Hildebrandt, Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Bigaard as to what they were told at some point after the meeting, namely that there was a deal.

683.

I think it unlikely that either Mr. Johnsen or Mr. Homann gave any real thought on 19 November 2010 to the question of whether or not the agreement was binding as a matter of Danish or any other law. They were, after all, businessmen rather than lawyers. In my view, they would both have understood that the agreement would have to be documented properly. Hence Mr. Birkeland became involved immediately after the meeting. But there is no reason to think that there was any specific agreement between them that nothing was binding unless and until it was signed and documented. If either of them had been asked after the meeting whether or not their agreement was binding, each would probably said that they had done a deal and that they hoped and expected that the other side would not try to back away from what had been agreed, albeit that it remained to be documented.

684.

If one of them did seek to back away (and of course neither of them did), then that might have given rise to a healthy argument as to whether or not he was entitled to do so. I think that if that argument had come before a Danish court, the party who backed away from the agreement would have had the better of the argument; because proving an oral agreement is difficult, particularly in a situation where it was contemplated that the agreement would be reduced to writing. But it seems to me that this conclusion does not assist, or go very far in assisting, the Defendants’ argument that there was no genuine belief that there had been a binding agreement. In January 2011, the parties to the assignments were not applying their minds to how a Danish court

might resolve a theoretical dispute as to whether or not an agreement had been reached in November 2010. Rather, they were considering how matters stood in the light of the fact that a deal had been made in November, that there had been no dispute, that acceptable documentation had been produced on 22 December and had been ready for signature since that time. In those circumstances, I do not consider it surprising that the participants took the view that their signature of the documentation was giving effect to their prior agreement.

685.

In that context, I agree with the Claimants that it is a relevant, and indeed rather unusual, feature of the case that there is no evidence of any negotiation subsequent to 19 November meeting. All the drafting was done by Mr. Birkeland. There was some delay in producing a document to Mr. Homann, but this seems to have been attributable to Mr. Boulton’s absence from London and the need to address the points which Mr. Boulton raised. When the draft document was in due course given to Mr. Homann on 22 December, he raised no queries about it and it was subsequently signed without amendment by Mr. Bigaard and his colleagues. This seems to me to support the case that the agreement signed did indeed fairly reflect what had been agreed at the 19 November meeting.

686.

The only other opportunity for further negotiation was, as it seems to me, the meeting which took place on 21 December 2010 attended by Mr. Birkeland, Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen. But I have no reason to doubt Mr. Birkeland’s evidence that this meeting took place in the evening (or perhaps late afternoon), after he had completed the documentation.

687.

I agree with the Defendants that it is puzzling that Mr. Birkeland’s first draft (sent on 21 November) recorded a figure of DKK 2 million rather than the DKK 1 million which was only changed in the draft that was finalised on 21 December. Mr. Birkeland supported Mr. Johnsen’s evidence as to how the first draft came to refer to DKK 2 million: this was a figure that had been discussed between Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Johnsen prior to the meeting on 19 November as being the figure which Mr. Homann was looking for and which Mr. Johnsen was in principle agreeable; Mr. Johnsen had agreed a figure of DKK 1 million at the 19 November meeting; but when he spoke to Mr. Birkeland after the meeting, he was travelling with Mr. Homann in the same car, and he did not want to refer to the fact that the figure agreed was less than the DKK 2 million that Mr. Johnsen had been contemplating as the payment. The point was not picked up until 20 December when Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Johnsen went through the documents.

688.

I have to say that I was sceptical about this explanation when this evidence was given. However, I do not consider that I can reject it as implausible. The fact is that the documentation which was given to Mr. Homann on 22 December did refer to DKK 1 million: he had never been given any document showing DKK 2 million. If the agreement reached on 19 November had been an agreement for DKK 2 million, then it is difficult to see why Mr. Johnsen would subsequently have sought to reduce it, at a time when he was no doubt keen to finalise the documents, and possibly risk an argument with Mr. Homann; an argument about a comparatively small sum of money which was only ever going to be paid if the litigation was successful. Equally, it is difficult to see why Mr. Homann, if he had already agreed DKK 2 million, would have agreed to reduce it to DKK 1 million rather than sticking to what had previously been agreed. The fact that Mr. Homann then obtained signatures on the assignments, without any challenge to the DKK 1 million, again supports the proposition that the agreements reflected the amount (DKK 1 million) which had previously been agreed.

Mr. Birkeland’s evidence was that there was no negotiation at the meeting on 21 December about these figures, and I have no reason to reject that evidence.

689.

Against this background of a deal having been reached on 19 November 2010, and acceptable documentation giving effect to that agreement having been produced on 22 December, I think that it would not be right to conclude that – when the decision was made in January to backdate the assignments – any of the three individuals had no genuine belief that a binding agreement had been concluded on 19 November. I think that it is far more likely that each of them considered that there had been a prior binding agreement, that their written agreement was seeking to give effect to what had previously been agreed, and that it was therefore permissible to backdate.

690.

As far as Mr. Bigaard was concerned, he had not participated in the discussions, and had left things to Mr. Homann. His evidence was that he was told by Mr. Homann at some point in November or December that there was a “done deal”. This happened prior to Mr. Jepsen’s appointment, and therefore it was not something to which Mr. Jepsen needed to give his consent. Mr. Bigaard is a lawyer with over 40 years’ experience. He struck me as a very careful man, and I think that he would have hesitated long and hard before agreeing to backdate documentation for the purpose of deceiving Mr. Jepsen. I do not wholly accept the Claimants’ submission that he had no motive improperly to backdate documents, and no motive to lie to the court about what had happened. In theory, he may have been motivated to backdate the documents because the assignment was beneficial to Mr. Homann, with whom he worked closely, and potentially beneficial to Updata Europe at least in the long-term. In theory, he could then have lied to the court because he had no option but to justify what he had done, in view of the fact that he had backdated the documents. However, whilst there is a theoretical motivation, I did not think that this is what happened, or what is likely to have happened. I regard it as far more probable that Mr. Bigaard backdated the documents because he thought that they reflected a prior “done deal”, and that he considered that it was legitimate to do so.

691.

Similarly, I have no reason to think that Mr. Homann, who was an experienced professional, was intending to act deceitfully. The idea of backdating to 19 November seems to have been his idea. It is his handwriting at the front of the documents, and I infer that he did not think that it was appropriate to backdate to 2 October (the date referred to in Mr. Johnsen’s e-mail of 5 January). There was a great deal of evidence about Mr. Homann in the course of the case. He seems to have been held in high regard by many people, including Mr. Jorgensen and Mr. Nielsen. He had worked for KPMG for 37 years, where he was a partner. There was nothing in the evidence that suggested that he lacked integrity. Indeed, as I have previously mentioned, the pleadings themselves do not allege deceit against Mr. Homann, and the case against him seems to have developed at a comparatively late stage. But at all events, I am unable to conclude on the evidence that he intended to deceive Mr. Jepsen. Again, I think it far more probable that Mr. Homann believed that backdating was permissible because the written agreement reflected the agreement reached on 19 November.

692.

As far as Mr. Johnsen is concerned: he signed the documents after they had been signed by Mr. Bigaard, and he received them from Mr. Homann. Given that those individuals considered that backdating was permissible, in my view Mr. Johnsen had no reason to believe and did not believe otherwise.

693.

I also agree with the Claimants that it does not appear that any of these individuals had any qualms or worries about the backdating of the assignment after it had been done. If they had any concerns, it would have been a very simple matter – once Mr. Jepsen was off the scene in April 2011 – to have executed fresh documentation. The fact that no-one thought that this was necessary is, in my view, an indication that none of these individuals considered that they had acted improperly in backdating the documents.

694.

I do not consider that any of the documents authored by Mr. Birkeland during this period (such as the e-mail to One Essex Court, or the documents concerning the Deed of Rectification) cast doubt on this conclusion. I am ultimately concerned with the state of mind of Mr. Bigaard, Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen, against whom the allegation of intention to deceive is made. It is no longer alleged that Mr. Birkeland was party to any intended deception of the Supervisor. I agree that Mr. Birkeland’s statements during this period are potentially relevant to the question of whether Mr. Johnsen, with whom Mr. Birkeland was in contact, believed that a binding agreement had been made on 19 November 2010. However, there is no indication that this was an issue which was discussed between Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Johnsen at the time, or to which any thought was even given. This is not surprising. In November and December, it was simply not a live issue. Mr. Birkeland was not giving, and did not need to give, any consideration to the question of whether or not, as a matter of law, a binding agreement had been reached at the 19 November meeting. Rather, he was approaching matters on the basis that what was important was for the agreement to be documented. As Mr. Birkeland said, it would be very hard to prove that there was an agreement, or to act upon it, if it was not documented. He therefore said that he “needed to have a document signed by all parties to confirm the terms that had been agreed between Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen”. The statements which he made in his e-mails at the time therefore reflected his unsurprising view that it was important to document the assignment, and do not assist in answering the question of whether, when the documents were backdated, Mr. Johnsen (or Mr. Homann or Mr. Bigaard) believed that a binding agreement had previously been made.

695.

Nor did I think that the correspondence between Mr. Birkeland and Mr. Inkester advanced matters from the Defendants’ perspective: Mr. Birkeland was dealing with a solicitor who was on the other side, and he would naturally have been rather circumspect in his statements to him prior to having the signed assignment documents in his possession.

696.

Rather more significant, in my view, is the fact that Mr. Birkeland was subsequently given the backdated assignment documents in January, and does not seem to have reacted adversely to the fact that they were backdated. It is true that he did not at that stage know about the appointment of Mr. Jepsen, and that there is no suggestion any longer that Mr. Birkeland acted deceitfully. But he did know that the documents had only been finalised in December, and that there had been backdating. The fact that he did not comment is some indication that he too considered that the documents recorded an agreement which had been reached in November 2010.

697.

A significant amount of time at the trial was spent in exploring other agreements or negotiations which were on-going in Denmark at that time, including for example a settlement agreement between Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Nielsen, a potential loan by Vald. Nielsen to a company called Cagain, and a possible sale of Vald. Nielsen’s factory. Mr. Birkeland in his e-mail to Mr. Inkester had referred to the assignment “being part of a larger settlement of outstanding matters in Denmark”. I did not consider, however, that the existence of these negotiations supported a case of an intention to deceive, based on the proposition that the relevant participants knew that there had been no binding agreement in November 2010 for assignment. When Mr. Birkeland started to draft the assignment documentation on 19 November, immediately after the meeting, this was the only material document that he drafted. (He also sent through to

Mr. Johnsen, on 21 November, a draft letter of appointment whereby a Mr. Henrik

Hansen was to be appointed as an observer on the board of the Newco on behalf of Newwatch. But this has nothing to do with the various ongoing discussions in Denmark). In due course, when the assignment documentation was signed by the various representatives of Updata Europe, there is no indication that it was conditional upon the conclusion of any other contracts. Nor is there any such suggestion in the correspondence with Mr. Boulton.

698.

Mr. Birkeland explained in his second witness statement that there were indeed other agreements entered into and under discussion “around this time”. There was discussion of the replacement of an existing loan agreement between Vald. Nielsen and one of Mr. Bigaard’s companies, Bigaard Four Holding. A draft of a new loan agreement was circulated in early 2011, but this was not done until 7 February 2011; i.e. a month after Updata Europe had signed the assignment. Accordingly, it cannot be said that the assignment was conditional upon this loan agreement. There was also discussion of another loan agreement involving Cagain Europe and Change Networks. Mr. Birkeland drafted a loan agreement after the 21 December meeting, but in the end he did not believe that this loan was ever made. Again, therefore, the assignment was not conditional upon this loan agreement. The same can be said about a settlement agreement concluded between Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Nielsen. This was made on 31 January 2011, again some time after Updata Europe had signed. Moreover, Mr. Nielsen was not involved in the discussions concerning the assignment, and does not appear to have known about the details of the assignment until very recently. The documents therefore do not support a case that the assignments were conditional upon the conclusion of other agreements, or that the participants knew that there had been no binding agreement in November 2010 because other documents remained to be negotiated and concluded.

699.

The Defendants also relied upon a passage in Updata Europe’s annual report for the year 2009/2010, and which was finalised and signed by the Board (Mr. Bigaard, Mr. Bartroff and Mr. Kristiansen) in July 2011. This stated:

“The company’s partially owned subsidiary Updata Infrastructure UK Ltd. was sold during the financial year 2008/9. In connection with this sale consideration is being given to bringing a lawsuit against the management of the subsidiary on the basis of the circumstances surrounding the sale. As is estimated such a step would result in significant costs, the step is carefully considered.”

700.

I do not consider that this statement throws any light on the issue which I need to resolve. The position by the time that these accounts were signed off, in July 2011, was that the assignment documentation had been concluded many months previously. Updata Europe itself was not considering bringing a claim; since the claim had been assigned to Vald. Nielsen. In so far as the passage can be read as suggesting that Updata Europe was considering bringing a claim, and might incur costs, it is puzzling if not misleading. It is possible, however, as the Claimants suggested, that: (i) the language was deliberately phrased in the passive (“… consideration is being given”), because it was the assignee which was giving consideration to the possibility of action; and (ii) the passage was included because there would be some benefit to Updata Europe’s creditors if the action were to succeed. However, I do not consider that the passage provides any support for the case on intention to deceive by backdating.

701.

Reliance was also placed upon certain correspondence with Mr. Hildebrandt in early 2011. Prior to signing in January, he sought and received some reassurance from Mr. Birkeland that his economic interest in the claim would be protected. It seems to me that this episode is again of no real assistance in relation to the argument on intention to deceive. I accept that it is unlikely that the 19 November 2010 discussions and agreement between Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Homann had involved the question of whether shareholders such as Mr. Hildebrandt would be party to the agreement. However, Mr. Homann’s witness statement indicates that, unsurprisingly, he understood that the purpose of the assignment would be to benefit the former shareholders of Updata Europe, and this would of course include Mr. Hildebrandt and others. Subsequently, the idea emerged – during the drafting process and as a result of Mr. Boulton’s advice and concerns about champerty – that the former shareholders should be parties to the assignments, and in due course this is what happened (save for Mr. Bremerskov). But I do not think that, at the time, it would have occurred to Mr. Johnsen or Mr. Homann (or Mr. Bigaard, who was in any event distant from the detail) that this development was a material alteration to what had previously been agreed, or meant that it was improper to backdate the assignment.

702.

Accordingly, since I conclude that the Defendants have failed to prove an intention to deceive on the part of any of the individuals against whom the allegation is made, I consider that the Danish law assignment is valid and binding.

The medium-form assignment – governed by English law

703.

This conclusion means that it is unnecessary to consider in detail the arguments as to the validity of the English law assignment. This is because the Defendants’ case on illegality in relation to the English law agreement was based on the same illegality as was alleged to render the agreement unenforceable under Danish law: i.e. the case that the agreements were executed and back-dated for the purpose of or with the intention of deceiving the Supervisor and/or the general creditors of Updata Europe and avoiding the need to seek the Supervisor’s consent to the assignment. Having rejected the argument based on intention to deceive in the context of Danish law, it follows that the premise of the argument in relation to the English law agreement fails as well.

704.

Even if, however, I had accepted the Defendants’ case as to intention to deceive the Supervisor or the general creditors, I do not consider that this would lead to the conclusion that the English law assignment was unenforceable on the grounds of illegality. It was common ground that in relation to illegality under English law, it was appropriate to apply the approach set out in the judgment of Lord Toulson in Patel v Mirza [2016] UKSC 42, [2017] A.C.467 at paragraph [120]:

“The essential rationale of the illegality doctrine is that it would be contrary to the public interest to enforce a claim if to do so would be harmful to the integrity of the legal system (or, possibly, certain aspects of public morality, the boundaries of which have never been made entirely clear and which do not arise for consideration in this case). In assessing whether the public interest would be harmed in that way, it is necessary (a) to consider the underlying purpose of the prohibition which has been transgressed and whether that purpose will be enhanced by denial of the claim, (b) to consider any other relevant public policy on which the denial of the claim may have an impact and (c) to consider whether denial of the claim would be a proportionate response to the illegality, bearing in mind that punishment is a matter for the criminal courts. Within that framework, various factors may be relevant, but it would be a mistake to suggest that the court is free to decide a case in an undisciplined way. The public interest is best served by a principled and transparent assessment of the considerations identified, rather by than the application of a formal approach capable of producing results which may appear arbitrary, unjust or disproportionate.”

705.

Applying this approach, I first consider the underlying purpose of the prohibition which has been transgressed and whether that purpose will be enhanced by denial of the claim. Here, the underlying purpose of the prohibition transgressed is, as the Defendants rightly submitted, the deterrence of fraudulent conduct, and in particular conduct which is fraudulent towards (i) a person who has been appointed by the court as the equivalent of an administrator and thereby (ii) the creditors of a company. I agree that there is a powerful public interest in protecting the legal system from claims based on fraudulent documents. The purpose of the prohibition would therefore, all other things being equal, be enhanced by denial of the claim. But in the present case all other things are not equal; because an unusual feature of the present case is that the effect of the Defendants’ argument, if successful, would be to produce a result which in practice insulates them from liability for their own fraudulent conduct. Accordingly, the Defendants’ invocation of the importance of deterring fraudulent conduct rings hollow in the circumstances of the present case. Accordingly, I hesitate to say that in the context of the present case, the purpose of the prohibition transgressed would be enhanced by denial of the claim. But for present purposes I proceed on the basis that it would, whilst noting that, on any view, the

Defendants’ own fraudulent conduct is a matter which is relevant to the question of proportionality.

706.

Next, I consider any other relevant public policy on which denial of the claim may have an impact. I agree with the Defendants that, subject to one matter, there is no particular competing public policy which requires the enforcement of the assignment in Vald. Nielsen’s favour. The consequence of the non-enforcement of the assignment

is that Updata Europe would have throughout have retained its claims against the Defendants, albeit that a time-bar would almost certainly now prevent Updata Europe from enforcing its claims. The one matter is, again, that there is a public policy in favour of making those responsible for fraudulent conduct liable for the consequences of their actions. Again, however, I proceed for present purposes on the basis that this is matter which is relevant to the question of proportionality, rather than the question of whether there is any other relevant public policy on which denial of the claim may have an impact.

707.

I then turn to the question of whether denial of the claim would be a proportionate response to the illegality, bearing in mind that punishment is a matter for the criminal courts. It seems to me that denial of the claim, taking into account all the circumstances of the present case, would clearly not be a proportionate response. The particular circumstances of the present case which lead me unhesitatingly to this conclusion are as follows.

708.

First, this is a case where the Defendants have, in accordance with my previous findings, defrauded Updata Europe and (indirectly) the former shareholders of Updata Europe who have the benefit of the assignment (if upheld). It would in my view be grossly unjust if the assignee was to have no remedy, even assuming that there was an intention to deceive the Supervisor and creditors.

709.

Secondly, the Defendants’ case as to intention to deceive rests upon the 19 November 2010 dating of the documents, and upon the argument that the parties to the assignments had not – as at that date – reached a binding agreement. Even if that were the case, however, it seems to me to be very clear on the evidence that the parties did reach a clear agreement for an assignment prior to the appointment of the Supervisor. The factual position is that Mr. Birkeland produced the final draft of the assignment documentation on 21 December 2010, and this was prior to the final meeting in Copenhagen between himself, Mr. Homann and Mr. Johnsen on 21 December 2010. The documents were then sent by e-mail on 22 December, and were signed in that form. There is no evidence of any negotiation after that meeting on 21 December. It is also the case that by 21 December, the documents referred to Mr. Homann receiving DKK 1 million (rather than the DKK 2 million referred to in earlier drafts). Accordingly, even if I had accepted the Defendants’ argument that the original agreement was DKK 2 million, the reduction had been agreed by 21 December.

710.

A number of points flow from these facts, in the context of proportionality:

a)

In my view, the documentation could, without any substantial objection, have been backdated to 21 December 2010 (the date of the final meeting), rather than 19 November 2010. Both dates are prior to the appointment of the Supervisor. I consider it would be disproportionate in those circumstances to deny the claim on the basis that the parties to the assignments chose the November date for the documentation rather than the December date.

b)

Equally, if the documents had been signed promptly by the Updata Europe signatories, again the illegality argument would not run. It is likely that the reason why they were not signed promptly is not because there was any dissatisfaction with the documents or any further negotiation required, but rather because it was the Christmas period and no-one thought that there was any particular urgency.

c)

This also illustrates what in my view is the highly technical nature of the illegality relied upon by the Defendants in the present case. This is a case where the parties to the assignment had, prior to the appointment of the Supervisor, reached agreement on all material terms of the proposed assignment. The only problem, if there was a problem, was that the parties had not signed the documentation. True, this opens the way for the Defendants’ argument that the agreement reached was not binding unless and until the documents were signed. But it is difficult to see why, even if this were so, it would be proportionate to deny the claim.

711.

Thirdly, this is not a case where there can be any argument that the backdating actually caused any prejudice either to the Supervisor or the creditors of Updata Europe. The factual position is that the appointment of the Supervisor was rapidly terminated, in April 2011. The Supervisor never knew of the assignment. No creditors have ever needed to set aside the assignments.

712.

Fourthly, and again illustrative of the highly technical nature of the case advanced, it would have been perfectly possible for Updata Europe and Vald. Nielsen and the other signatories to have executed fresh assignment documentation in April 2011 or at any time thereafter. Had this been done, all of the Defendants’ arguments would have fallen away. The fact that this was not done indicates that none of the relevant individuals against whom the allegation of intention to deceive is made (Mr. Johnsen, Mr. Homann and Mr. Bigaard) had any qualms or concerns as to the backdating. This reinforces my conclusion that those individuals did not intend to deceive: the fact that no-one bothered to re-execute documentation after April 2011 is strongly suggestive of the fact that everyone thought that it had been legitimately executed in the first place.

713.

This leads to a related point. It seems to me that, subsequent to April 2011, the parties to the assignments have conducted themselves on the basis that these were valid and effective. Thus, Mr. Bigaard has clearly been aware of the present proceedings, and indeed has given evidence in support of the Claimants. In these circumstances, the fact that fresh documentation has not been executed, when it could have been, seems rather irrelevant, and is certainly not a reason for denying the claim. All the parties to the assignments therefore treated them as valid and continuing, and could easily have executed fresh documentation if they had wanted to.

714.

Fifth, it is in my view a relevant consideration in relation to proportionality that the Defendants themselves have taken advantage of the assignment for their own benefit. They were keen to obtain, for tax reasons, the Deed of Rectification. This was signed by Vald. Nielsen as assignee, and the Defendants were perfectly content with that. It is only now, many years later, and long after the tax benefits have been obtained, that the Defendants have decided to put the assignment under scrutiny.

715.

For all these reasons, I consider that denial of the claim would not be a proportionate response to the illegality. The Claimants contended that a further reason for so concluding would be the Defendants attempt to mislead the Court in the strike-out/ summary judgment application. I was not persuaded that the proportionality exercise contemplated by the Supreme Court in Patel v Mirza contemplated an examination of a party’s behaviour within the context of the litigation. I therefore do not rely upon that particular factor. But if it were relevant, then it would be an additional reason for rejecting the Defendants’ case.

K: Breach of fiduciary duty

The shape of the arguments

716.

The Claimants contended that each of the Defendants owed them fiduciary duties. The pleaded facts relied upon as giving rise to these duties were set out in paragraph

35 of the Re-Amended Particulars of Claim. Reliance was placed on the “circumstances of the negotiations and sale”. The specific circumstances included:

a)

The Defendants’ responsibility for the provision of information to bidders in the Data Room, such information being solely in the Defendants’ control;

b)

The Defendants’ provision of information to the bidders, in particular LMS, in the course of discussions to which the European Vendors were not party;

c)

The Defendants’ involvement in assisting LMS in putting together its offer on 16 April 2009; and

d)

The Defendants’ use of information available to them as senior employees or directors, and the fact that they knew that the EVs were not privy to that information.

717.

The fiduciary duties owed were said to include a duty on the part of the Defendants not to place themselves in a position of conflict without obtaining the EVs fully informed consent. Compliance with that duty put the UK management under a duty:

a)

to disclose to the EVs all material facts and matters relating to the proposed sale of Updata UK;

b)

not to make deliberately misleading statements to the EVs or prospective purchasers on material facts and matters relating to the proposed sale of Updata UK, so that the EVs were not compelled to part with their shares at an undervalue;

c)

not to prefer and promote their own interests at the expense of the EVs 718. These duties were alleged to have been broken by virtue of various matters:

a)

The failure of the UK management to provide the EVs with documents, information and explanations, specifically: (i) the March 2009 Weighted Budget or the information on which it was based; (ii) the Tenon Memorandum and Data Pack, or the information on which it was based; (iii) full details of contracts won or likely to be won; (iv) any other information material to the sale of Updata UK; (v) various

other budgets and projections and other financial information prepared in May, June and July 2009;

b)

The making of deliberately misleading statements to the EVs, and also to Mr. Nielsen.

719.

In view of my conclusion that Vald. Nielsen (as assignee of Updata Europe) is entitled to damages for deceit, the claim for breach of fiduciary duty is relevant only to the claim of Newwatch. I did not understand Vald. Nielsen to allege that it could recover an account of profits for breach of fiduciary duty in addition to damages for deceit. (In his closing submissions, Mr. Choo Choy referred to the need to elect between these remedies, and this was not challenged by Mr. Booth). Since Newwatch rolled over its shareholding in Updata UK into the new UK company, Newwatch had no claim for loss caused by deceit and could only advance a claim for breach of fiduciary duty. The object of such claim is to recover an account of profits.

720.

The parties’ submissions focused particularly upon the issue of whether or not any fiduciary duty was owed by the Defendants to the Claimants. There were also arguments, albeit to a lesser extent, as to whether or not any such duty was broken, and in particular the extent to which the claims advanced were permissible in the light of the order made by Field J. on the strike-out hearing. That order struck out claims: (i) for breach of fiduciary duty based on non-fraudulent misrepresentation, and (ii) as against Mr. Mantell, for breach of fiduciary duty based on non-fraudulent nondisclosure. There were also arguments as to whether it was appropriate for the court to order an account, particularly in circumstances where the Claimants had not sought to quantify or prove at trial the amounts claimed in consequence of the breach of duty.

Fiduciary duty: the law

721.

There is no doubt that the general position is that directors of a company do not, solely by virtue of their office of director, owe fiduciary duties to shareholders. Equally, the case-law establishes that there are circumstances in which such duties can be owed. The relevant principles under English law are to be found in the decision of the Court of Appeal in Peskin v Anderson & Ors [2001] BCC 874 and more recently in the judgment of Nugee J. in Sharp v Blank [2015] EWHC 3220 (Ch) [2017] BCC 187.

722.

Peskin concerned a claim against the committee of the Royal Automobile Club and against its holding company. A number of members had resigned their memberships without knowing of the possibility that there would be changes to the structure of the club and a sale of RAC Motoring Services Ltd., which operated the well-known motoring services business known as the RAC. The Court of Appeal dismissed the exmembers’ claims based on various alleged breaches of fiduciary duty, holding that the facts relied upon were insufficient to found a claim for the existence or breach of such duty. The relevant principles were explained by Mummery LJ as follows:

“[33]. The fiduciary duties owed to the company arise from the legal relationship between the directors and the company directed and controlled by them. The fiduciary duties owed to the shareholders do not arise from that legal relationship. They are dependent on establishing a special factual relationship between the directors and the shareholders in the particular case. Events may take place which bring the directors of the company into direct and close contact with the shareholders in a manner capable of generating fiduciary obligations, such as a duty of disclosure of material facts to the shareholders, or an obligation to use confidential information and valuable commercial and financial opportunities , which have been acquired by the directors in that office, for the benefit of the shareholders, and not to prefer and promote their own interests at the expense of the shareholders.

[34]. These duties may arise in special circumstances which replicate the salient features of well established categories of fiduciary relationships. Fiduciary relationships, such as agency, involve duties of trust, confidence and loyalty. Those duties are, in general, attracted by and attached to a person who undertakes, or who, depending on all the circumstances, is treated as having assumed, responsibility to act on behalf of, or for the benefit of, another person. That other person may have entrusted or, depending on all the circumstances, may be treated as having entrusted, the care of his property, affairs, transactions or interests to him. There are, for example, instances of the directors of a company making direct approaches to, and dealing with, the shareholders in relation to a specific transaction and holding themselves out as agents for them in connection with the acquisition or disposal of shares; or making material representations to them; or failing to make material disclosure to them of insider information in the context of negotiations for a take-over of the company's business; or supplying to them specific information and advice on which they have relied. These events are capable of constituting special circumstances and of generating fiduciary obligations, especially in those cases in which the directors, for their own benefit, seek to use their position and special inside knowledge acquired by them to take improper or unfair advantage of the shareholders.

[35] The court has been referred to the valuable and detailed surveys of the authorities, expounding the special circumstances which justify the imposition of fiduciary duties on directors to individual shareholders, in the judgments of Court of Appeal in New Zealand in Coleman v. Myers [1977] 2 NZLR 225 ( especially pp.323–325,328–330) and of the Court of Appeal of New South Wales in Brunninghausen v. Glavanics [1999] 46 NSWLR 538 (especially pp. 547–560). In both of those cases fiduciary duties of directors to shareholders were established in the specially strong context of the familial relationships of the directors and shareholders and their relative personal positions of influence in the company concerned.”

723. More recently, the case-law in England and elsewhere was reviewed by Nugee J. in Sharp v Blank [2015] EWHC 3220 (Ch) [2017] BCC 187. Mr. Booth accepted the correctness of Nugee J’s analysis. Nugee J. said:

“[12] I take it therefore to be established law, binding on me, that although a director of a company can owe fiduciary duties to the company's shareholders, he does not do so by the mere fact of being a director, but only where there is on the facts of the particular case a “special relationship” between the director and the shareholders. It seems to me to follow that this special relationship must be something over and above the usual relationship that any director of a company has with its shareholders. It is not enough that the director, as a director, has more knowledge of the company's affairs than the shareholders have: since they direct and control the company's affairs this will almost inevitably be the case. Nor is it enough that the actions of the directors will have the potential to affect the shareholders – again this will always, or almost always, be the case. On the decided cases the sort of relationship that has given rise to a fiduciary duty has been where there has been some personal relationship or particular dealing or transaction between them.

[13] I do not find this surprising. A fiduciary, as explained by Millett LJ in his classic judgment in Bristol & West Building Society v Mothew [1998] Ch 1 at 18A-F, is someone who has undertaken to act for or on behalf of another in circumstances which give rise to a relationship of trust and confidence. That is why the distinguishing obligation of a fiduciary is the obligation of loyalty: someone who has agreed to act in the interests of another has to put the interests of that other first. But the relationship between directors and shareholders is not in general like that. A director is a fiduciary for his company: by agreeing to act as director, he necessarily agrees to act in the interests of the company. But he does not have, by virtue of his appointment as director, any direct relationship with the shareholders: no doubt the interests of the shareholders and the company are in general aligned but this does not mean that a director has agreed to act for the individual shareholders or has a direct relationship with them – his relationship is with the company. If he is to be held to owe fiduciary duties to the individual shareholders, there must be something unusual in the nature of the relationship which gives rise to it. That no doubt explains why the cases where such a duty has been held to exist mostly concern companies which are small and closely held, where there is often a family or other personal relationship between the parties, and where, in almost all cases, there is a particular transaction involved in which directors are dealing with the shareholders, from which the directors often stand to benefit personally. The imposition of a fiduciary duty in such circumstances reflects the fact that directors who have a close family or other personal relationship with shareholders, and are entering into transactions with them, may be tempted to exploit that relationship to take unfair advantage of the shareholders for their own benefit.”

Existence of the fiduciary duty: the Claimants’ submissions

724.

The Claimants submitted that the circumstances in which fiduciary duties are owed are variable and depend upon the facts of the case. It is possible in “special circumstances” for a director or senior employee to owe fiduciary duties to the shareholders of a company. The existence of the duty was therefore “fact-specific”, and almost always involved: relatively small companies where there were certain directors who had the information and certain shareholders who were not in the same position; a situation where there was going to be some type of dealing or disposal, whether a direct purchase or a transaction involving a third party on which the shareholders’ rights would be affected; and where there was an imbalance of information.

725.

Thus, “special circumstances” included, in particular, the following:

a)

Transactions for the sale/purchase of shares: where there is a proposed transaction involving the disposal of the shareholders’ shares, and the director is either a purchaser or interested in the purchase, the director will inevitably hold more information about the value of the shares than the shareholder. The fiduciary relationship arises from the particular circumstances of the proposed transaction; the disparity in available information; and the special trust the shareholder must necessarily repose in the director to provide him with material information. The

Claimants referred in that connection to a number of Australian and New Zealand cases which were considered in Sharp v Blank, and in particular Crawley v Short [2009] NSWCA 410, Coleman v Myers [1977] 2 NZLR 255; Brunninghausen v Glavanics [1999] NSWCA 199; and Platt v Platt [1999] BCLC 745.

b)

Small / family held companies: many of the cases in which a director has been held to owe fiduciary duties to a shareholder involve small, family-owned companies. But there is no justification for confining cases in which such duties are owed to those in which the company was run as a family enterprise or quasi-partnership (where there is a preexisting relationship of trust and confidence).

c)

Vulnerable shareholders: transactions involving the sale/purchase of shares will put the directors in a special position of power. They will have a special opportunity to exercise the power or discretion to the detriment of the shareholders, such that the shareholders are vulnerable to abuse by directors of their position. The scope for unilateral exercise of a discretion or power to the potential determinant of another who is peculiarly vulnerable to the exercise of the power is a hall-mark of a fiduciary relationship.

726.

This was exactly the sort of case where the court should hold that fiduciary duties were owed by the Defendants to the EVs:

a)

Updata UK had only five shareholders. There were close relationships between the executive director/shareholders and EVs. Mr. Bennett was

Mr. Johnsen’s cousin and Jorgen Johnsen’s nephew. Mr. Bennett had been brought into the company by Mr. Johnsen when he was unemployed in 2003.

b)

The Defendants controlled information in relation to Updata UK. EVs (and the non-executive directors appointed by them) were dependent upon the Defendants for information about Updata UK’s financial position and its prospects. EVs necessarily trusted the Defendants to provide accurate information about Updata UK’s financial position.

c)

In the context of the proposed sale of EVs’ shares in Updata UK, the Defendants controlled the flow of information to: (i) EVs, (ii) the rival bidders (Mr. Nielsen and, by extension, the Data Room) and (iii) their own side (Tenon and LMS). EVs had to (and did) trust the Defendants that the information provided to them, and to Mr. Nielsen, was the same as the information that had been provided to Tenon and LMS.

d)

In the context of the proposed sale, the Defendants made false representations to EVs about Updata UK’s performance and projected performance, on which they knew EVs would rely. EVs had no way to check the accuracy of the information provided and took it on trust that it was accurate.

e)

The Defendants’ unique access to information about Updata UK put them in a position in which they could prefer their own interests to those of EVs, and take advantage of EVs’ particular vulnerability to non-disclosure of financial information in the build up to the sale.

727.

In his oral submissions, Mr. Booth emphasised that the imposition of a fiduciary duty in the present case would not conflict with the fiduciary duties owed by the Defendants to Updata UK. Concerns as to such conflict had been expressed in certain of the authorities, such as the decision in Percival v Wright [1902] 2 Ch 421. Whilst in certain situations the imposition of duties on directors vis-a-vis members at “every step of the way” could cause real problems in the running of the company, this was not so in the present case. If the transaction went through, it would make no difference to the company or the way that it was run: it was simply a sale of shares by existing shareholders to, in effect, other existing shareholders and an outside party (LMS).

728.

Here, therefore, there was a specific transaction being carried out for the benefit of the Defendants, and an information deficit between the parties. The Defendants were seeking to remove Updata Europe as main shareholder, and were planning an MBO. If there was going to be an MBO, it was particularly vital that as between those with knowledge on the inside and those with shares on the outside, that there was full and proper disclosure so that those who might be selling their shares were not disadvantaged by what happens. The court should impose a duty in that situation. If a director is going to take advantage of his knowledge to benefit himself, vis-a-vis a shareholder, it is not unreasonable to impose a duty to ensure that he is being full and frank about what the position is. If no fiduciary duty existed in the present case, then it is difficult to conceive of a case where it would be held to exist.

Existence of the duty: the Defendants’ submissions

729. The Defendants submitted that there was no basis for holding that a fiduciary duty existed in the present case. There was no relationship of trust, confidence and loyalty, or anything close to it. Neither of the EVs entrusted anything to the Defendants. Indeed, Newwatch was not selling at all, so it was impossible to see how that company was entrusting matters to the Defendants. None of the factors relied upon by the Claimants led to the conclusion that there was a special relationship in the sense described in Peskin and Sharp. The requirements for a fiduciary duty formulated in these English cases which should be applied, rather than any more expansive approach that may have been taken in the Australian and New Zealand cases. The Defendants’ more detailed submissions on these matters are to a large extent reflected in my conclusions below.

Analysis and conclusions: the authorities

730.

The authorities, as discussed in Sharp v Blank, show that the reason why the directors of a company owe fiduciary duties to the company is that, by virtue of their appointment as directors, they become agents of the company and stewards of its affairs. By contrast, the directors of a company do not, merely by virtue of their office of director, owe fiduciary duties to the shareholders, whether collectively or individually. This is because a company is legally distinct from its members, and the directors’ direction and control of the affairs and assets of the company cannot be equated with direction or control of the affairs or assets of the members. The general principle that directors do not owe fiduciary duties to shareholders is also supported by well-established policy considerations, as summarised by Nugee J in Sharp v Blank at [9(3)].

731.

It is also the case, however, that directors may be held to owe fiduciary duties to shareholders. This is by way of exception to the general rule. As Nugee J said at [13], there must be something unusual in the nature of the relationship which gives rise to it. In Peskin, Mummery LJ (with whom the other members of the Court of Appeal agreed) identified the situation in which fiduciary duties arise as depending upon the existence of “special circumstances which replicate the salient features of wellestablished categories of fiduciary relationships”. Such fiduciary duties generally attach to “a person who undertakes, or who, depending on all the circumstances, is treated as having assumed, responsibility to act on behalf of, or for the benefit of, another person. That other person may have entrusted, or depending on all the circumstances, may be treated as having entrusted, the care of his property, affairs, transactions or interests to him.” (Peskin at [34]).

732.

This approach is, as the Defendants correctly submitted, consistent with the classic analysis of fiduciary relationships contained in Millett LJ’s speech in Bristol & West Building Society v Mothew [1998] Ch. 1 at 18A-F, and cited by Nugee J. in Sharp at

[13]. A fiduciary is “someone who has undertaken to act for or on behalf of another in circumstances which give rise to a relationship of trust and confidence”. The distinguishing obligation of a fiduciary is the obligation of loyalty, including the obligation to put the interests of that other party first.

733.

It is not difficult to see why the courts in England and elsewhere have held that certain relationships between director and shareholder, or between shareholders inter se, replicate the salient features of well-established categories of fiduciary relationships. Coleman v Myers involved an old established private company in which many of the shareholders were relatives, and two directors (a father and son) engineered a takeover, persuading other family members to sell. The New Zealand Court of Appeal did not proceed on the basis that whenever a director purchased shares from a shareholder, a fiduciary duty would arise. Rather, each member of the court referred, in similar but not identical language, to the closeness of the particular relationship which existed in that case, including the trust or confidence that other family members placed in the father and son.

734.

Thus, Woodhouse J. said:

“… the standard of conduct required from a director in relation to dealings with a shareholder will differ depending upon all the surrounding circumstances and the nature of the responsibility which in a real and practical sense the director has assumed towards the shareholder.”

735.

He went on to identify factors which were relevant to the existence of the duty, and these included:

“dependence upon information and advice, the existence of a relationship of confidence, the significance of some particular transaction for the parties and, of course, the extent of any positive action taken by or on behalf of the director or directors to promote it”.

736.

Cooke J referred (at 330) to “the family character of this company; the positions of father and son in the company and the family; their high degree of inside knowledge; and the way in which they went about the take-over and the persuasion of shareholders”. He then described how, from its early days, the company had been very much a family one. “For many years [the father] had been its key figure. Inevitably and justifiably the shareholders must have come to repose confidence in him. The son was his natural successor.” 737. Similarly, Casey J said (at 371):

“I have no doubt that in this tightly-held family company, both directors owed a fiduciary duty to the appellants and to the other shareholders. It must have been clear to Mr AD Myers [i.e. the son] particularly that they were reposing trust and confidence in him, from their discussions and the inquiries they made. I have no doubt Sir Kenneth Myers [i.e. the father] was in everyone’s eyes the head of the family group and its associated shareholders, whom they respected and trusted to look after their personal interests in the management of the company. … In such a family situation the latter, as managing director, would inevitably have been expected to continue the care and prudence displayed by his father for the welfare of family and associates, notwithstanding the fact that he was bidding for their shares. The evidence points to his recognition of this in the discussions he willingly held with the appellants about the reasons for his take-over and his plans …”

738.

In Platt v Platt, David Mackie QC (sitting as a Deputy Judge of the High Court) found a fiduciary relationship to exist in the context of a company owned by three brothers, where the older brother (who ran the business) approached the other brothers to acquire their “birthright”. He considered that the facts of Coleman v Myers bore resemblance to those in the case before him.

739.

The decision of the New South Wales Court of Appeal in Brunninghausen, upon which the Claimants relied heavily, illustrates that a fiduciary duty can be held to exist even in a case where the shareholder does not actually place trust and confidence in the director. In that case, the plaintiff and defendant were brothers in law, being married to two sisters. They owned shares in a company, but had fallen out. There was, as the judge said, “no relationship of confidence, and indeed all trust had been broken years before and succeeded by hostility at the worst, wariness at the best”. Their mother-in-law was keen for them to restore harmony, and therefore there were discussions with a view to a buyout and in due course the defendant acquired the shares of the plaintiff. This was done at a significant undervalue, because the defendant did not reveal the existence of a substantial offer from a prospective purchaser of the company. Neither the judge nor the Court of Appeal considered that the facts were as strong as Coleman, but nevertheless a fiduciary duty was held to exist. Handley JA said [54]:

“If a fiduciary duty exists here it must arise from the bare facts of the relationship. These include the position of the defendant as the sole effective director, the existence of only one other shareholder, their close family association, the intervention of the mother-in-law to secure a family reconciliation, and the exclusive advantage or opportunity which the defendant’s position conferred on him to receive any offers to purchase the company’s business from third parties”.

740.

Brunninghausen was referred to in both Peskin and Sharp, without any suggestion that it was wrongly decided. It is clearly not a case where the plaintiff actually entrusted the care of his property, affairs, transactions or interests to the defendant. But as Mummery LJ said at [34], a fiduciary duty may arise where, depending on all the circumstances, a person is “treated as” having assumed responsibility to act on behalf of another, and the other person may, depending on all the circumstances, “be treated” as having so entrusted his property, affairs etc. to the other person. He described the case (and Coleman) as cases where fiduciary duties were established “in the specially strong context of the familial relationships of the directors and shareholders and their relative personal positions of influence in the company concerned”. Nugee J. in Sharp drew attention to the fact that it was a company with only two shareholders, where one had bought the other out.

741.

Brunninghausen is perhaps at the outer limit of cases where an English court might be prepared to say that the circumstances replicated the salient features of the wellestablished categories of fiduciary relationships. But in any event, as will be apparent from my discussion below, the facts of that case are very far removed from those of the present.

742.

The cases make clear that it is not possible to give an exhaustive list of the facts which will give rise to such duties. In a subsequent case in the New South Wales Court of Appeal, Crawley v Short, Young JA (delivering the leading judgment) said (at [108]) (quoting from an earlier judgment of his):

“Without attempting to state an exhaustive list, the duty will arise where the member has expressly or impliedly sought the director’s assistance and the director has expressly or impliedly undertaken to act on the member’s behalf, where the director occupies a place of influence in the family, of which family the members is also associated. These matters may be exacerbated if associated with other factors”.

743.

In a later passage, at [122], he identified the circumstances in which a shareholder or director/ shareholder holds a special position where he may owe a fiduciary duty to another shareholder:

“Without being an exhaustive list, this will occur where: one shareholder undertakes to act on behalf of another shareholder; where one shareholder is in a position to have special knowledge and knows that another shareholder is relying on her to use that knowledge for the advantage of another shareholder as well as herself; and where the company is in reality a partnership in corporate guise, nowadays termed a quasi partnership.”

744.

The authorities also illustrate a number of other relevant matters. The decision in Sharp shows that the mere fact that a director has more knowledge than (or indeed exclusive knowledge compared to) the shareholders of the company’s affairs, or that the directors’ actions have the potential to affect the shareholders, does not amount to “special circumstances” and does not give rise to a “special relationship” between the directors and shareholders. Such features are usual, indeed inevitable, features of the relationship between directors and shareholders of a company, since the directors direct and control the affairs of the company, whereas the shareholders do not: see Sharp v Blank at [12]. The existence of such features is therefore not sufficient to establish that the directors have undertaken (or that they have been entrusted by the shareholders) to act for or on behalf of the shareholders in any particular respect.

745.

It also seems clear that the mere fact that a director is purchasing shares from a shareholder is not in itself sufficient to give rise to a fiduciary duty. To hold otherwise would be contrary to the decision in Percival v Wright. English law has not yet, in my view, gone down this particular route, although a contrary approach was taken in the first instance decision in Coleman and can also be seen in some of the passages in Brunninghausen. As far as English law is concerned, even in a situation where a director is purchasing shares from a shareholder, the existence of a fiduciary duty depends upon the existence of special circumstances: see Re Chez Nico (Restaurants) Ltd. [1992] BCLC 192, 208 (Browne-Wilkinson VC).

746.

Overall, it seems to me that the circumstances in which a fiduciary duty will usually be held to exist are well-summarised by Nugee J. at [13] of Sharp: the cases where such duty has been held to exist mostly concern companies which are small and closely held, where there is often a family or other personal relationship between the parties, and where, in almost all cases, there is a particular transaction involved in which directors are dealing with the shareholders.

Application to the facts

747.

I consider that the facts of the present case are a long way from the circumstances of other cases where a fiduciary relationship has been held to exist, and that there are no special circumstances in the present case which replicate the established categories of fiduciary relationships. I address in turn each of the principal factual matters relied upon by the Claimants as supporting the existence of the fiduciary duty.

748.

Closeness of the relationship. Updata UK was not a closely held family company. There were five shareholders in Updata UK (Updata Europe, Newwatch, Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Bennett and Mr Nyegaard). In turn, Updata Europe had six shareholders (Peter Johnsen, Jørgen Johnsen, Kirsten Johnsen, Henrik Hildebrandt, Vald Nielsen and Henrik Bremerskov). Newwatch had two shareholders (Peter Johnsen and Mr. Hildebrandt). Accordingly, some of the shares were held, directly or indirectly, by members of Mr. Johnsen’s family. But many of the shares were not: Mr. Baldorino, Mr. Nyegaard and Mr. Hildebrandt were not family members. Furthermore, neither Mr. Baldorino nor Mr. Mantell (who was not a shareholder in or director of Updata UK) had any family or close personal relationship with either Updata Europe or Newwatch, or any of their shareholders or directors, or any of the shareholders of Updata UK other than Mr. Bennett.

749.

As far as Mr. Bennett was concerned: although he was a cousin of Mr Johnsen and nephew of Jørgen Johnsen and Kirsten Johnsen (Mr Johnsen’s mother), there is no evidence that he had a close personal relationship with any of them. Whilst his introduction into Updata UK had come via Mr. Johnsen, this does not establish a close personal relationship. Nor is this a case where, in contrast to the father in Coleman v Myers, any of the Johnsen family members looked to Mr. Bennett to protect their interests. The e-mail correspondence in 2009 in relation to Mr. Johnsen’s proposed “Project Eagle” was businesslike and relatively formal, rather than communications between friends or friendly relatives. This is unsurprising. As described in Section B above, relations between Mr. Johnsen and Updata UK’s management were, certainly by 2008-2009, not the best. The Board of Updata Europe was aware that there was a degree of antipathy on the part of the UK management towards them.

750.

The limited family tie between Mr. Bennett and Mr Johnsen’s family therefore had no bearing on the way in which Updata UK was managed. Nor did the EVs look to the UK management for the protection of their interests. Thus, when Mr Johnsen resigned from the Board of Updata UK in February 2008, the EVs appointed three new directors (Jørgen Johnsen, Flemming Holm and Henrik Hildebrandt) in order to protect the interests of the EVs (and those of Vald. Nielsen, which, by then, was not only a shareholder in Updata Europe but also a substantial lender to it). When it came

to the possible sale in 2009, Mr. Johnsen and the other board members similarly appreciated that they were the ones who would have to look after their own interests. Mr. Bennett, who was working with LMS, was not going to do that for them. They did not consult with Mr. Bennett, or any of the UK management team, so as to obtain their views as to the LMS offer. The EVs engaged their own legal adviser (Mr. Birkeland), and no doubt thought that they had sufficient experience and financial acumen to be able to evaluate the LMS proposals.

751.

In summary, there is nothing in the facts which justifies a conclusion either that Mr. Bennett (or any of the Defendants) undertook a responsibility to act on behalf of or for the benefit of the EVs, or that the EVs entrusted the care of their property, affairs, transactions or interests to any of them. Nor, in my view, are there any facts which lead to the conclusion that Mr. Bennett or the other defendants should be treated as having undertaken such a responsibility, or that the EVs should be treated as having entrusted the care of their property etc. to them.

752.

Furthermore, in contrast to some of the cases such as Coleman, this is not a case where Mr. Bennett or the other Defendants used their relationship with the shareholders in order to negotiate or push through a sale or other transaction. The origin of the sale to LMS lay in the approach of Mr. Nielsen in early 2009. This caused the Defendants to react by seeking investors for a possible MBO, leading in due course to the selection of LMS. Mr. Baldorino told Mr. Johnsen in an e-mail of 16

April 2009, referring to a conversation on the previous day, that: “we have embarked on facilitating a substantial proposal from LMS Capital”. There was, therefore, no approach by the Defendants on their own behalf, and Mr. Johnsen was only told of the forthcoming proposal from LMS on the day before it was made. When the offer was made on 16 April 2009, it was made by LMS in writing. It was not made by the Defendants. The offer contemplated that the transaction would be consummated by an acquisition vehicle, the newco, which would be financed entirely by LMS and selected management members. This is what in due course happened: the SPA was a sale by all the existing shareholders of Updata UK (including the Defendants themselves) to the new company, Updata Infrastructure Holdings Ltd. In the meantime, there were negotiations between Mr. Johnsen and others with LMS: in particular, a telephone call on 29 April 2009 between Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Hooft, another such call on 4 May 2009, and a meeting between Updata Europe board members and representatives of LMS at Mr. Holm’s home on 11 June 2009. The Defendants themselves did not participate in these discussions or negotiations. Accordingly, the ultimate transaction, including the terms on which Newwatch could rollover its shares and acquire further shares, was a consequence of the bidding process and a commercial negotiation between Mr. Johnsen and others and LMS. It was not a consequence of a commercial negotiation between Mr. Johnsen (or others from the EVs) with the Defendants, who had minority interests in the acquiring vehicle.

753.

EVs’ dependence on the Defendants for information about Updata UK’s financial position. I agree with the Claimants that the EVs were dependent upon the Defendants for information about Updata UK’s financial position. However, I agree with the Defendants that their control of information relating to Updata UK and the EVs’ reliance on the Defendants for such information was a usual incident of all relationships between directors and shareholders. The UK management inevitably had

more knowledge of the company’s affairs than the shareholders, since they directed and controlled its affairs. There is, therefore, nothing special about this fact, whether alone or taken with the other circumstances, which justifies holding that there was a fiduciary relationship.

754.

Again, a contrast is to be drawn between the circumstances of some of the cases where a fiduciary duty has been held to exist, and the present facts. This is not a case where the EVs had no access to Updata UK’s business information, other than for example audited accounts. Historically, as described in Mr. Hildebrandt’s evidence, both Mr. Johnsen and Mr. Nielsen worked at Updata UK’s offices, as did Mr. Hildebrandt both before and after he became a director of Updata UK. They could and did discuss matters with the UK management. Updata UK did provide financial information to Updata Europe; for example, Mr. Holm did receive regular cash flow statements, and he had a channel of communication to Mr. Mantell if he wanted financial information – albeit that Mr. Mantell would invariably want to check with Mr. Bennett before he provided anything. The present case arises not from the fact that the UK management gave no information to the EVs during the time when Updata UK was in business, or because the EVs had no access to financial information. Rather, it arises from statements made in 2009 when requests for information were made, but false answers were given.

755.

Control of the flow of information in the context of the proposed sale. I do not consider that this adds anything to the previous point. Again, the invocation of the directors’ superior knowledge of the business, compared to that of the shareholders, is not a special circumstance. It is the usual feature of the ordinary relationship between directors and shareholders.

756.

The making of false representations. I have accepted that false representations were made, and that there is therefore liability for deceit. But I do not consider that these facts in themselves, or taken in conjunction with the other matters that I have described, establish the existence of a fiduciary duty. Mummery LJ does refer to various events, including the making of material representations by directors to shareholders, as being capable of constituting special circumstances and generating fiduciary obligations. However, this statement is made in the context of the earlier part of [34] of his judgment, where he identifies the hallmarks of a fiduciary relationship. I do not consider that the relevant passage means that whenever a false statement is made, even in the context of a possible share acquisition by a director from a shareholder, a fiduciary duty arises.

757.

Unique access to information about Updata UK. I agree with the Defendants that this is no more than a reiteration of the earlier arguments concerning dependence on information, or control over the flow of information.

758.

Accordingly, I do not consider that any of the features relied upon by the Claimants, individually or collectively, justifies the conclusion that the Defendants owed fiduciary duties to the Claimants.

759.

This means that it is unnecessary to consider in detail the remaining arguments, and I shall only make brief comments about some of them.

760.

First, I was not persuaded that any fiduciary duty was owed to the EVs by Mr. Mantell, who was not a director or shareholder. None of the cases cited to me imposed a fiduciary duty towards shareholders on someone who was neither a director or shareholder. Similarly none of the factual circumstances indicated the existence of any such duty on his part.

761.

Secondly, if fiduciary duties were owed, then it seemed to me that my findings as to fraudulent misrepresentation, and the nature of the fraud in the present case, would inevitably mean that those duties were broken. The fraud involved deliberate and fraudulent concealment of the expected results of Updata UK and specifically of the March Weighted Budget, as well as the fact that the UK management had provided different “factual data” to Tenon and LMS. There can be no doubt that claims for breach of fiduciary duty based on fraudulent misrepresentation and fraudulent nondisclosure are permissible in the light of the order of Sir Richad Field.

762.

Thirdly, I did not consider that there was any case management reason which precluded the court from ordering an account. However, I was dubious as to whether it was appropriate, as a matter of discretion, to order an account in circumstances where Newwatch had rolled over its shareholding, had therefore not sold any shares, and had in due course benefited in full from the transaction with LMS which ultimately led to the sale to Capita.

763.

Accordingly, as a result of my decision that fiduciary duties were not owed, the claims based on breach of fiduciary duty fail.

L: Conclusion

764. The claim of Vald. Nielsen for damages for fraud or conspiracy succeeds, and I assess such damages at £ 6,518,652. The Claimants’ claims based on breach of fiduciary duty fail and are dismissed. I will hear argument as to consequential matters, including interest and costs.

Vald. Nielsen Holding A/S Newwatch Ltd v Baldorino & Ors

[2019] EWHC 1926 (Comm)

Download options

Download this judgment as a PDF (1.9 MB)

The original format of the judgment as handed down by the court, for printing and downloading.

Download this judgment as XML

The judgment in machine-readable LegalDocML format for developers, data scientists and researchers.